JP2016047352A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine includes start pockets capable of receiving a game ball driven onto a game area 1100. When the game ball enters the start pockets 2101 and 2102, lottery processing relating to execution of a jackpot game is performed with a predetermined winning probability. As a result, a jackpot game for giving privilege to a player is performed when winning a jackpot. However, although the average total number of consumed game balls required until winning of a jackpot in a normal game state is relatively large in this Pachinko machine, the relatively large average number of consumed game balls can be varied within a specific predetermined adjustment range.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 166

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine that can be played on condition that the game medium is consumed.

  Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, as seen in Patent Document 1, a lottery is performed based on the fact that game media consumed by being driven into a gaming area is received by a specific receiving port. Things are known.

  That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is first determined whether or not there is a game medium entering a specific receiving port. When a game medium is received at the starting port, a predetermined lottery process is performed, and when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the lottery process, the game medium that is less than the normal game state is stored. Transition control to an advantageous gaming state that can be won by consumption (number of driving) is performed.

JP 2008-022870 A

  In such a conventional gaming machine, the player can play at least a predetermined lottery result when a relatively large amount of game media is required in the normal gaming state. I have to do it all the time. However, in a normal gaming state, although a large amount of game media is consumed in this way, the consumed game media are often wasted without generating any value. , There is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will decline due to regret for the game so far.

  Further, in the normal gaming state, the probability that a predetermined lottery result is obtained is also low, so that an effect indicating that there is a high possibility that a predetermined lottery result is obtained is set as an effect condition that hardly appears. In spite of such production conditions, it is desired to realize a production that is effective in maintaining the game entertainment.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a situation, and it aims at providing the gaming machine which can suppress the fall of a game entertainment attraction.

In order to achieve such an object, in the invention according to claim 1, a game board in which a game area is formed, a start opening for accepting a game ball driven into the game area, and the start opening The game area required for the special lottery result to be obtained on the condition that a special lottery is performed based on the fact that the game ball has been received and the special lottery result is obtained at least. And a control means for controlling to an advantageous gaming state in which the game can be played so that an average amount of the total number of game balls to be played is relatively smaller than that in the normal gaming state, As the starting port, a first starting port and a second starting port are provided, and the control means performs the special lottery based on the fact that a game ball is received at the first starting port. 1 game The result of the special lottery by the row control means, the second game progress control means for performing the special lottery based on the fact that the game ball is received at the second starting port, and the first game progress control means is shown. In this way, the first special symbol control means for controlling the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol fluctuation display so that the result of the special lottery by the second game progress control means is shown. The second special symbol control means for performing such control, when in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol control means for the variable display of the first special symbol

A total value of the number of times and the number of times required for the second special symbol control display by the second special symbol control means is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated total value exceeds a specific number of adjustments. The normal time determination means to be performed, and the normal gaming state, during the period in which the normal time determination means determines that the specific number of adjustments has not been exceeded, the first start port is set to the second start port. First side game control means for allowing a game to be performed under a situation where a game ball is difficult to be accepted, out of the normal game state, after the normal time determination means determines that the specific number of adjustments has been exceeded. During the specific period, the average number of game balls to be thrown into the game area required for obtaining the special lottery result is relatively large, but is equal to or greater than that of the first start port. Probability of the second starting port A second side game control means that allows a game to be received so that a game ball can be received, and a game that can be obtained by a player when a special lottery result is obtained in a special lottery by the first game progress control means When the expected number of balls is the first expected value, a special lottery is performed based on the game balls entering the second starting port whose probability of entering is adjusted by the second game control means. When the result is obtained, at least a part of the average number of total hits of the game balls with respect to the game area required until it is determined that the specific number of adjustments is exceeded by the normal time determination means, Return privilege control means for controlling so that a player can acquire a game ball having a second expected quantity value that has been increased as a premium with respect to the first expected quantity value, and the first game Result of special lottery by means of progress control A high expectation notice determination means for performing a notice determination as to whether or not a specific high expectation notice effect is to be performed based on a determination that a specific high expectation notice effect is to be performed by the notice determination by the high expectation notice determination means As long as it starts the display output of the high-expected warning video that requires a certain time at a specific timing, and performs the production control so that the display output of the high-expected warning video ends when the predetermined time elapses from this start When the total value calculated by the anticipation notice control means and the normal time judgment means is in a relatively large period of time until it exceeds a specific number of adjustments, Display of a high-expected announcement video that requires a predetermined time at a specific timing after the first special symbol variation display is started, even though it has not been determined to perform a high-expected announcement effect. When a high-expectation notice forcing unit that can be controlled so that output is started and display output of a high-expected notice video that requires the predetermined time is started by the high-expected notice enforcement unit, a predetermined time elapses from this start. The gist of the invention is that it has a notice video blocking means for ending the display output of the high expectation notice video at an intermediate stage before the high expectation notice video requiring the predetermined time is not completed.

  According to the above configuration, when the total value in the normal gaming state exceeds a specific number of adjustments, the probability of entering the game ball is accepted at the second starting port with a probability equal to or greater than that of the first starting port. Is adjusted. Then, when the expected number of game balls that can be obtained by the player when a special lottery result is obtained in the special lottery on the first start opening side is set as the first expected quantity value, When a special lottery result is obtained as a result of the game balls being received at the second starting port, the average number of game balls to be thrown into the game area required for exceeding the specific number of adjustments At least a part of the game ball can be acquired by the player with the expected quantity value increased as a premium for the first expected quantity value. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the game balls consumed until the specific number of adjustments in the normal gaming state is exceeded are not wasted without creating any value, The decrease in the entertainment interest will be suppressed.

  When playing a game on the side of the second starting port, which has a probability of entering the ball that is equal to or higher than that of the first starting port, at least a part of the game ball that has been consumed before exceeding the specific number of adjustments. When a chance to get back is given, a relatively large period of time until the specific number of adjustments is exceeded is a chance to get back at least a part of the game balls that have been consumed so far. Will function as a period to be granted in a short time.

  In this regard, in the above-described configuration, when a specific highly anticipated notice effect appears in such a period, a pattern in which the effect is terminated at an intermediate effect stage is provided, and an intermediate effect stage is provided. It is shown that there is a high possibility that a special lottery result will not be obtained when the process ends at.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a back perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame, and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which pressed the press operation part in the operation unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame, and was seen afterwards. It is a front view shown in the state where a front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. It is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball feeding unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the ball | bowl feeding unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which removed the rear case of the ball | bowl feeding unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for the light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | strain of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a body frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a body frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen afterwards. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen afterwards. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout path, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution | circulation passage of the ball | bowl in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the terminal board box in a board | substrate unit, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the terminal board box in a board unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is a front view of a launching power supply board box, (B) is a sectional view of an AA line shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fastening mechanism in a back cover and was seen from the rear side. (A) is the left view of the locking device in a main body frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the locking device in a main body frame from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame that are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the back. (A) is the front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine, (B) is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming board using a gaming panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which looked at FIG. 103 from back. FIG. 110 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board in FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. It is a fragmentary sectional view which shows the crime prevention structure in the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state which accommodated the game board in the main body frame. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structural member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 112 from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game panel and the member with which it was attached, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a front view of a winning device unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the winning apparatus unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the winning apparatus unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize-winning apparatus unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a front view of the base member in a winning device unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the mechanism part in a prize apparatus unit from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the mechanism part of the winning device unit for every main structural member, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the opening-and-closing drive mechanism of the 2nd start port, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the opening / closing drive mechanism of the 1st opening / closing prize-winning apparatus, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the opening-and-closing drive mechanism to the vertical direction, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a cross-sectional perspective view which shows the operation state of an opening / closing drive mechanism. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd opening / closing prize-winning apparatus and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower part of the 2nd opening and closing prize apparatus from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the side decoration unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center object and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the base frame member, the warp passage, the shelf board, and the shelf rear cover of the center accessory from the diagonal front. (A) is the principal part enlarged front view which expanded the upper left part of the game board, (b) is the principal part enlarged front view which expanded the right center part of the game board. (A) is the cross-sectional perspective view which looked at the AA cross section in FIG. 132 (a) from diagonally forward, (b) is the cross-sectional perspective view which looked at BB cross section in FIG. 132 (b) from diagonally forward. is there. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the relationship between a base frame member and a game panel. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper side accessory unit in a back unit from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper side accessory unit into the large unit part and the small unit part, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the large unit part for every main structural member, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotation unit in a large unit part, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the large side light emission rotation part and the small side light emission rotation part in a rotation unit, and was seen from diagonally forward. (A) is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the small side light emission rotation part and its drive part longitudinally, and was seen from diagonally forward, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the small side cover member from diagonally downward. is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the small side light emission rotation part and its drive part from diagonally back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary decoration body in a small unit part, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the rotary body decoration body longitudinally and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the enclosure unit of the small unit part and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the left side accessory unit in a back unit from diagonally forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of a left side accessory unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side accessory unit for every main structural member, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the principal part of the left side accessory unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable decoration body in the left side accessory unit, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the right side accessory unit in a back unit from diagonally forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of a right side accessory unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side accessory unit for every main structural member, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable decoration body in the right side accessory unit from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable decorative body for every main structural member, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable part main body in a movable decoration body, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable arm part in a movable decoration body, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the drive mechanism in the right side accessory unit, and was seen from diagonally forward. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory provided with the logo display unit in a back unit from the lower front, (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a). It is the perspective view which looked at the logo display unit from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the logo display unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the shelf back decoration unit in a back unit from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the other structure in the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the display unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the left side accessory unit in a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the right side accessory unit in a game board. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 170 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 169. It is a block diagram which shows the drive circuit of a firing solenoid. It is a circuit diagram which shows a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group. It is a figure which shows the characteristic of a DC / DC converter. 172 is a timing chart of predetermined points in the drive circuit for the firing solenoid of FIG. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the main process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is the interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for lottery processing for jackpots, (B) is a reach determination table used for lottery processing for reach, and (C) is a lottery processing for types of jackpots. It is a symbol determination table used for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol change time determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16ms regular process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control processing. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the display screen of a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the display screen of a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the display screen of a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the display screen of a liquid crystal display device. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example about the determination process of the production pattern at the time of normal production mode, and a stop symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example about the determination process of the production | presentation pattern at the time of appearance rate change mode, and a stop symbol. It is a time chart which shows an example about the control method concerning the display output of the high expectation warning animation which appears in a specific high expectation notice effect. It is a time chart which shows an example of the display effect which appears in the liquid crystal display device 1900, when a specific fluctuation pattern is determined by the main control MPU4100a side. It is a figure explaining the example about the display effect (specific expected production pattern) of high expectation matched with production command "04H". It is a figure explaining the example about the display effect (specific expected production pattern) of high expectation matched with production command "04H". It is a figure explaining the example about the display effect (specific expected production pattern) of high expectation matched with production command "04H". It is a figure explaining the example about the display effect (specific expected production pattern) of high expectation matched with production command "04H". It is a figure explaining the example about the display effect (specific expected production pattern) of high expectation matched with production command "04H".

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame constituting the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, main body frame, game board constituting the pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

  1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is inserted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side, and a front face of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 A door frame 5 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. The door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 stores a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball placed below the game window 101 and storing game balls. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5, are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in which the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 extend in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. The horizontal width of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width dimension. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  The pachinko machine 1 is desired to have a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 in a front view, and protrudes forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. However, the player can recognize the inside of the game area 1100. By inserting a hand or the like, it is impossible to touch game balls, obstacle nails, various winning holes, and bonus items in the game area 1100. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes the back of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detaching structure between the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 that extend in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides that extend in the vertical (vertical) direction. Frame plates 12 and 13, and four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, and each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 is connected by the connecting member 14. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them together. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, And an engagement notch 15 that is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step 10a that is recessed from the other general surface is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is like that.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. The protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength rigidity is enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 106). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, etc. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held as a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. The plate-like horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-like vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other A plate-like engagement piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engagement notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. The vertical piece 18 is divided into front and rear parts. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch between the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, a predetermined screw passes through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 and is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper side inner side surfaces of the side frames 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like that. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower side inner side surfaces of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. The side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled into a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of the present example is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12 that is disposed so as to face the upper support bracket 20 and the upper support bracket 20 that is fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10. Fixed to the lower support bracket 21, the reinforcing bracket 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support bracket 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13, and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement bracket 22. The decorative cover 23 is provided. The upper support bracket 20 and the lower support bracket 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support protruding piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. The support side hole 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend toward the center of the tip from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b, and the left side frame depending on the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that contacts the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that continues to the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (see FIG. 14). 14) and a stop drooping portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the drooping wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the supporting saddle hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper shaft support bracket 630 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hole 20c in the upper support bracket 20. Further, the upper support bracket 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by a fixing piece 20a and a hanging fixing piece 20d.

  The strength of the support protrusion 20b is enhanced by a hanging wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b. The details of the upper support metal 20 will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the player can be concealed so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a square shape so as to be inclined from the side of the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support bracket 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c Support projections 21d. A main body frame pivot formed on a main body frame pivot bracket 644 (see FIG. 66, etc.) of the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21. After the support protrusion 21d of the support bracket 21 is inserted into the support hole of the main body frame pivot support 644 in the main body frame 3, the pivot support pin 633 of the upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support stud 20c. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 that are disposed at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction inside the right side frame plate 13. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. This guide plate 26 is used to smoothly guide the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is mounted and fixed in a replaceable manner.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and the support projecting piece 20b is supported by a rivet 28. On the other hand, it is pivotally supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from a position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operation part 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the opposite side of the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operation part 27b, and the front end of the stopper part 27a are formed to bulge forward. An arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, the lock member 27 is configured such that the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c is the hanging wall when supported by the support protrusion piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state). 20e is in contact with the inner surface of the stopper 20a, and the stopper 27a closes the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The tip of the stopper 27a is inclined to the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The head space portion is not closed, and a space in which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support hole 20c. .

  The support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example is such that the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c so that the stopper portion 27a The tip side faces the stop drooping portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f so that the abutting portion is in contact). In a normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 positioned in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a are respectively provided. The center is in a state of being offset in an oblique direction and facing each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 supporting the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support saddle hole 20c. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. In addition, since the arcuate tip end surface 27d is provided at the tip of the stopper portion 27a, the lock member 27 is smoothly rotated when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c and comes into contact with the arcuate tip end surface 27d, the acting force F is Component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip end surface 27d (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip end surface 27d), and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hole 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment for rotating the tip part in the direction away from the support protruding piece 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 633 is formed between the tip part of the stopper part 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole part of the support collar hole 20c. Maintain the state of being pinched between the inner surface of one side. To. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and is an elastic formed integrally with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and to prevent the pivot pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a. Does not rotate in a direction in which it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 20f and disengages any further, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude beyond the support protruding piece 20b.

  Even if the shape of the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 or the distal end portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the axis fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Since the one side of the tip end of the stopper portion 27a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the present applicant points out that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The action of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed, a lower support bracket is mounted on a main body frame pivot support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame pivot support bracket 644 (see FIG. 63). 21 support protrusions 21d need to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27, thereby pushing As shown in FIG. 16B, the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, so that the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support rod hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not contact each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c and rotates in the clockwise direction, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 20c. The distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support saddle hole 20c.

  This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support saddle hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support rod hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 is lifted, and the main body frame 3 is detached from the outer frame 2 by releasing the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal 21. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are made of wood, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal ( For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game hall, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing it at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such an operation is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nails can be easily nailed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used without problems in existing island facilities. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, it becomes possible to form a thin wall while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 has a large horizontal dimension. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12, 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and the connecting member 14 is engaged with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased, and it is sturdy. It can be made into a rectangular frame. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 25. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover as seen from the rear after being disassembled from the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view.

  The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a gaming frame 101 having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape) as shown in the figure. The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 below the lower end. A pair of side speaker covers 290 disposed and attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. .

  Further, the door frame 5 passes through the tray unit 300, the tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the door. A handle device 500 that is attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 that is disposed on the rear side of the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. The glass unit 590 is provided.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 26 to 30. FIG. 26A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 26B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 30 shows the wiring state for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view which expands and shows.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is a door having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially elliptical shape having a vertically long shape. The frame base body 110, the upper bracket 120 for fixing the upper decorative unit attached to the upper center of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110, and the lower left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 A pair of side speakers 130 arranged on both outer sides, a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base body 110, and the front side of the door frame base body 110 are attached to the lower right corner when viewed from the front. And a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a side surface of the side speaker 130 and a front side of a wiring 136 (see FIG. 24) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like on the outside of the right side speaker 130 in front view. Is further provided with a cover member 134 that is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 (see FIGS. 22 and 24). The cover member 134 can guide the wiring 136 along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and holds the wiring 136 so that the wiring 136 does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. Can be done.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is configured so that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the lower surface of the gaming window 101 are covered with the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in a rear view. ) And a launch cover 191 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the gaming window 101, and a rotational position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191. The handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100 and the rear side of the handle device relay board 192 are covered. The door frame is disposed on the opposite side of the middle device relay board cover 193 and the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 with the center in the left-right direction (right side of the left-right center (back side) in the rear view). A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base main body, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a door pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. A wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of the wiring cord 196 that connects the frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side is provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has a strength capable of sufficiently supporting the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 to be described later. 4, and an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. In this example, each decoration unit 200, 240, 280, each decorative board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, dial driving motor 414 or sensor 432a, 432b provided in the operation unit 400, 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the wiring cord 196 that connects the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. As will be described in detail later, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate of the main body frame 3 are extended to the rear by being held by the wiring holding member 197. 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape by synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a cutout portion of a rectangular shape 101a into which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Is formed. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the gaming window 101 and widths of the left and right sides of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is like that.

  In addition to the gaming window 101, the door frame base body 110 is disposed on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and attaches and fixes the ball feeding unit 580 and the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130. The ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 28) and the game ball penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and stored in the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 are transferred to the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supply and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 inclined obliquely so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface which is arranged in the lower right corner portion and bulges forward in the front view is retracted Part 114, a wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment part 114 and allows the wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 28, the door frame base main body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and a door frame base main body in the rear view. A board mounting part 118 for mounting the door frame base board 194 disposed on the lower right side (axis support side), and an arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting part 111 on the left side (open side) in the rear view of the lower end of the gaming window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for protruding backward and mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear side. The glass unit support step 110a with which the outer periphery of the front surface can abut and the glass unit locking member 190 can be rotated by protruding backward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. Further comprises a, and four of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Further, the rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a door frame protruding piece 110c protruding a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side thereof, and the door frame protruding piece 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. The rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a positioning projection 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and engages with the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. The positioning projection 110d is fitted into the fitting groove 612 so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 27, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like. In addition, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the upper bracket 120, the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base body 110 has an attachment portion 110g (see FIG. 24) for attaching the speaker bracket 132 for attaching the side speaker 130, and an attachment hole 110h (FIGS. 18, 24, and 24) for attaching the side speaker cover 290. Are formed at appropriate positions.

  In the side speaker cover 290, as shown in FIG. 25, the left and right ones are arranged so as to pass through the glass unit support stepped portions 110a into which the glass units 590 are fitted from the rear side. In a state where the glass unit 590 is removed from the 110 (door frame 5), the glass unit 590 can be detached with a predetermined screw through the mounting hole 110h. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18, the mounting hole 110 h for mounting the side speaker cover 290 is configured such that the rear side is covered by fixing the security cover 180 to the door frame base main body 110. Therefore, in order to remove the side speaker cover 290, first, the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 must be removed from the door frame base body 110. Accordingly, it is possible to take time for removing the side speaker cover 290 to allow a person who performs an illegal act to remove the relatively large glass unit 590. The removal work can be made conspicuous, and the deterrence (safety) against fraud etc. can be enhanced by deceiving theft acts on the side speakers 130 and the fraudulent acts on the game area 1100 etc. It has become.

  In addition, the door frame base main body 110 includes a lower dish ball supply port 310g and a foul cover unit 540 in the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting part 118. A rectangular ball passage opening 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

  Next, the upper bracket 120 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the upper center of the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the left and right attached to the door frame base unit 100 are left and right. The upper gap formed between the side decoration units 200 and 240 is concealed, and both left and right ends are supported by the side decoration units 200 and 240, respectively. The upper bracket 120 is partially inserted into the upper decorative unit 280 so that the upper decorative unit 280 can be supported from above when the door frame 5 is assembled. It is like that.

  The pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, but the intersection of the central axes is a predetermined distance from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view (for example, 0.2 m to 1). .5 m), the sound is delivered most efficiently to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the side speaker 130 mainly outputs middle and high range sounds, and is disposed at a position as far away from the pachinko machine 1 as possible in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

  The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 disposed on the rear side, so that the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side opened as shown in FIGS. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly below the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the lateral direction as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, and the cross section is formed in an I-shape. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 includes a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in the upper and lower parts in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. The wiring holding member 197 has an end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled, and a step 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the vertical direction. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates to the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the stepped portion 195a.

  This wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined bundling in a holding hole 197a which is paired up and down with the wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It will be pushed forward by the part and will turn in the direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, so that wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in a direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). Thus, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is unfolded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to this example, the end of the wiring frame holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the door frame base substrate cover 195 is moved so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since it is pivotally supported on the rear surface and a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, the main body frame 3 When the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions (such as disconnection of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.) due to pinching.

  Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when a force acts through the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent blurring in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent occurrence of problems.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is hung between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from drooping even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and the main control board 4100, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, and the like as the main body side electric devices are connected to the door side. Decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262, a ball rental unit 360, and a handle as electric devices Location 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and to prevent a problem that the wiring 196 is pulled and disconnected or the connection connector is disconnected. it can. In addition, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, so that the conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-213675). ), The wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being rubbed and causing problems such as leakage or disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197 a that are arranged at a predetermined interval in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the held binding band 198 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 through the holding hole 197a, and to reliably prevent the wiring 196 from dropping together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

  Even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the wiring 196 is connected by the wiring holding member 197 as described above. Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wiring 196 from drooping when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding, the main body frame 3 having increased strength and rigidity on the side of the door frame 5 that is pivotally supported. And the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 with high security against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with protrusions protruding at least from the both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction to the side along which the wiring 196 is located, the wiring is formed by the pair of protrusions and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

  In addition, the length from the base end to the tip end of the wiring holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the base of the base end, and the main body frame 3 extends in the wiring 196. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center side of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member Since a pantograph-like link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring when opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, the opening / closing operation can be facilitated, and an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196, etc. can be reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-like link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring 196 that extends from the front end of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the front end side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and gathered compactly, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 being closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the step 195 a that can store the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and the wiring frame holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since it is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 or The wirings 196 can be gathered in a compact manner, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by other members, thereby preventing a problem from occurring.

  Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5. It is possible to reliably achieve the function and effect. Moreover, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 which can hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by enlarging the game area 1 and can attract the player's interest strongly by having the large game board 4 is provided. it can.

  Further, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tube portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tube portion 141 from the rear end of the tube portion 141 as shown in FIGS. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base body 110. Although not shown in the drawings, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially coincident with the wiring passage opening 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. The three grooves 502a are arranged and formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other. Yes. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 that is inclined obliquely so that the shaft of the cylinder portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) toward the front in a front view. Similarly, the shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 is also inclined obliquely.

  Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 attached along the lower back surface of the gaming window 101, which are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having shaft pins 155 provided on the upper surface and the lower end portion of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3 so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side end edge of both long side edges thereof. A lower bent protrusion piece 159 that is bent forward (see FIG. 27), and an upper bent protrusion piece 160 that is bent forward to the right side (open side) portion of the upper long side edge when viewed from the front. And a vertical bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward at the central portion of the upper long edge and is extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent protrusion piece 159, the upper bent protrusion piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to be engaged and locked with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertical bent protruding piece 161 is locked to the locking piece 592 b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the horizontal direction and It is possible to restrict movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes an open side outward bent protrusion 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154, As shown in the figure, the open side inner bent projecting piece 164 is formed so as to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent projecting piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 to be described later is provided at the lower rear side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side and opens to the outside of the shaft support side (see FIG. 106). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent protrusions 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side.

  The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. Although there is a possibility that an action may be easily performed, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example includes the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the U-shape (see FIG. 106), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and only the pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. This crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 A formed contact recess 181 and a post-crime prevention protrusion 182 protruding rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181 are provided. In addition, the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180 are respectively provided with crime prevention rear end protrusions 183 that protrude rearward along the shape of the ends. Note that the right (axial support side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183 in a rear view is longer than the opposite (open side) crime prevention rear end projection 183. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention projection piece 184 projecting along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end.

  The security cover 180 has a mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) attached to the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 in front view and a mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side). By attaching to the security cover attaching part 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. In a state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the pre-crime projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the post-crime protruding protrusion 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and the half on the open side is front. The component 1110 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool enters the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the post-crime projecting piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  The crime prevention cover 180 can cover the lower portion of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. In addition, it is possible to prevent the hitting ball that flies or reversely feeds the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

  Accordingly, in this example, the crime prevention cover 180 covers the rear lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (the gaming window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the gaming window 101, the glass unit 590 and the like from the front side of the door frame 5 Even if a highly flexible tool is inserted between the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) and a fraudulent act is attempted, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, Thus, the pachinko machine 1 with higher safety can be provided.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with fitting portions 190a that are rotatably fitted to locking member mounting portions 110b that protrude rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 has a retaining screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is pivotally supported with respect to the locking member attaching part 110b.

  The locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a protrusion protruding rearward on the rear side, although the detailed illustration is omitted, and this protrusion rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating. Of the four glass unit locking members 190, no protrusion is formed on the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right in the rear view, and the rear surface is a flat surface. ing.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. In addition, when the launch cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, the rear surfaces thereof are substantially in the same plane. The front surface of the ball striking device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side.

  The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side decoration frame 202 that forms a skeleton of the right side decoration unit 200, a side upper decoration member 204 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 202, and a side upper decoration member 204. The side upper decorative lens 206 fitted from the rear side, the upper side of the side decorative frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 204 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 206. A side upper cover 208; a side lens 210 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 208 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 202 from the rear side; and a side inner lens 212 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 210 It is equipped with.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A substrate 214 and a right side lower decorative substrate 216 which is disposed on the lower side from a substantially vertical center of the side inner lens 212 on the lower side and on which a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted; A right side upper decorative substrate cover 218 that covers the rear side of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative substrate 214, and a right side that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 Attached to the side lens 210 and the side decoration frame 202 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 216. The right side under the decorative board cover 220 that is provided with a.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 includes an upper right speaker 222 disposed at the upper left portion in the front view of the side decoration frame 202, and an upper portion that supports the upper right speaker 222 and is fitted to the upper rear portion of the side decoration frame 202. A speaker bracket 224; an upper speaker cover 226 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 224 and the side decoration frame 202; and a side sub-lens 228 attached to a predetermined position on a side surface of the side upper cover 208 from the inside. Yes. On the rear side of the side sub-lens 228, the LED 214c of the upper decoration board 214 on the right side is arranged so that the LED 214c is decorated for light emission.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, a side decoration frame 202, a side upper decoration member 204, a right side upper decoration board cover 218, and a right side lower decoration board cover 220 are formed of a light-impermeable member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surface of the frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204. Further, the side upper decorative lens 206, the side upper cover 208, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker cover 226, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the side sub lens 228 of the right side decorative unit 200 are translucent members. The side upper cover 208 is substantially milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 206, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker bracket 224, the upper speaker cover 226, and the side sub lens 228 are substantially transparent. It is said that.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the side surfaces of the side lens 210 and the upper speaker cover 226 that are formed to be substantially transparent and the surface side of the side inner lens 212 and the upper speaker bracket 224 are formed in a polyhedral shape. The light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210 and the side inner lens 212 It cannot be clearly seen from the person side. Further, the front surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently illuminated and decorated with light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b, and the like. The decorative boards 214 and 216 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can appropriately emit light so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be illuminated.

  The side decoration frame 202 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure, and specifically, along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. An arc-shaped inner frame 202a and an upper portion that is arranged at a position away from the inner frame 202a toward the outside and is linear along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper portion. The outer frame 202b formed in an arc shape so as to bend toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 202a, the upper end frame 202c connecting the upper end edges of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a, the outer frame 202b and the inner frame The inner frame 2 is arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of the lower end frame 202d that connects the lower end edges of 202a and the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b. And a, and the partition frame 202f having a slit 202e of a predetermined width with connecting 2a and an outer frame 202b.

  The inner frame 202a of the side decorative frame 202 extends with substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the outer frame 202b is formed in a straight line at the substantially same position as the rear end of the inner frame 202a, while the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is the upper and lower sides. Are formed in an arc shape such that both ends of the projection protrude forward. Further, the curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the linearly extending portion of the outer frame 202b is formed in an arc shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. Further, the partition frame 202f of the side decoration frame 202 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 202f is disposed on radiation extending radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the gaming window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 202 is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b by a plurality of partition frames 202f, and each of the divided frames is divided. Is a light emitting decoration opening 202g, and a peripheral lens portion 210a of a side lens 210, which will be described later, is fitted from the rear side. In addition, the radiating lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 is fitted into the slit 202e of the partition wall frame 202f from the rear side. Further, the slit 202e and the light emitting decoration opening 202g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 202f, and the respective light emission modes can be made different.

  As shown in the drawing, the side upper decoration member 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 202b of the side decoration frame 202, and the rear surface. Are formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 204a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 204 has a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the openings 204a arranged in a line.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 206 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 204, and from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 204 to the vicinity of the front end thereof through the opening 204a. A plurality of light guides 206a capable of protruding is provided. The light guide portion 206a has a polyhedral shape at the tip, and can be inserted and fitted into the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204 so that it appears as if a jewel has been fitted into the opening 204a. It can be done. Further, the light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 disposed on the rear side by the light guide portion 206a of the side upper decorative lens 204 can be emitted forward (player side) from the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204. In addition, the tip of the light guide unit 206a can be shined as a gemstone.

  The side upper cover 208 of the right side decoration unit 200 has an upper surface and a right side surface (in front view) substantially aligned with the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and a lower surface (lower end). Has a shape substantially along the side upper decorative member 204. The side upper cover 208 is provided with a mounting step 208a that is open at the bottom and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 204 can be accommodated in the lower front portion. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, or the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 204 or the like is formed on the end surface. Also, two cutouts 208b arranged on the upper and lower sides are formed on the right side surface of the side upper cover 208, so that the side sub lens 228 attached to the inside through the cutouts 208b is desired to the front side. It has become. By inserting the side sub lens 228 into the notch 208b of the side upper cover 208, only this portion can emit light in a different manner.

  The side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 has a shape that is substantially along the side decoration frame 202 and has a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the light emitting decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202 later. A peripheral lens portion 210 a and a radiating lens portion 210 b inserted into the slit 202 e of the side decorative frame 202 later are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 does not include the peripheral lens portion 210a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202, and the corresponding part is opened forward and downward. It is set as the accommodation step part 210c made. The accommodation step 210c accommodates an upper right speaker 222, an upper speaker bracket 224, and the like which will be described later. Further, the side lens 210 includes an attachment portion 210 d that forms the upper surface of the accommodation step portion 210 c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step portion 208 a in the side upper cover 208.

  The side lens 210 has a curved surface shape that bulges to the front side so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiating lens portion 210b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 202f of the side decorative frame 202. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 210a is not uniform. Thus, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a is irregularly refracted. In addition, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron can provide a distinctive appearance in which the peripheral lens portion 210a is sparkling.

  The side inner lens 212 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion where the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiating lens portion 210b are formed in the side lens 210 as shown in the figure. It corresponds to the main body part 212a having a recessed rear surface and the radiation lens part 210b (slit 202e of the side decoration frame 202) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body part 212a and projects forward from the main body part 212a. And a plate-like light guide part 212b arranged at the above position. The main body 212 a of the side inner lens 212 is formed in a state in which the front surface is kept a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 210. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body 212a of the side inner lens 212 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The light transmitted through the main body part 212a is irregularly refracted by the non-uniform thickness of the main body part 212a.

  By combining the side inner lens 212 with the side lens 210, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a and the main body portion 212a can be birefringently refracted. It is almost unrecognizable. Further, the irregular reflection due to the polyhedral shape along with the irregular refraction allows the side lens 210 (circumferential lens portion 210a) to have a brilliant appearance and make the sense of perspective unclear.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the light emitting decorative openings 202g of the side decorative frame 202 (the periphery of the side lens 210). The LEDs 214a and 216a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 210a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slit 202e (side lens 210 of the side lens 210) is used. The LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b) have a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °). Note that the LED 214c of the upper decorative substrate 214 on the right side that decorates the side sub lens 228 with light emission is a red LED in this example.

  Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs a mid-high range sound, and is attached to a predetermined position and in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 224. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 224 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion 224a that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed to the upper end back side of the horn portion 224a in the upper speaker bracket 224 so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 224a in front view. It has become.

  The upper right speaker 222 of this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 224 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 224 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness.

  The upper speaker cover 226 that covers the front side of the upper speaker bracket 224 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 202 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decorative frame 202. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 210. Further, a plurality of through holes 226a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 226 so that sound from the upper right speaker 222 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 226 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing in different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 226 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 226 and the upper speaker bracket 224, the light is irregularly refracted, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the through hole 226a formed in the upper right speaker 222 and the upper speaker cover 226 from the player side. The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side.

  The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the drawing, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed substantially symmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 includes a side decoration frame 242 that forms a skeleton of the left side decoration unit 240, a side upper decoration member 244 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 242, and a side upper decoration member 244. The side upper decorative lens 246 fitted from the rear side, the upper side of the side decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 244 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 246. A side upper cover 248, a side lens 250 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 248 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 242 from the rear side, and a side inner lens 252 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 250 It is equipped with.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and the left side upper decoration in which a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256, which is disposed on the lower side from a substantially center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 252 and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Attached to the side lens 250 and the side decoration frame 242 so as to sandwich the lower decoration board 256. That the left side under the decorative board cover 260, and a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 includes an upper left speaker 262 disposed in the upper right part in the front view of the side decoration frame 242, and an upper part that supports the upper left speaker 262 and is fitted to the upper rear side of the side decoration frame 242. The speaker bracket 264 and the upper speaker cover 266 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 264 and the side decoration frame 242 are provided.

  In the left side decoration unit 240, a side decoration frame 242, a side upper decoration member 244, a left side upper decoration board cover 258, and a left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of a light-impermeable member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244. Further, the side upper decorative lens 246, the side upper cover 248, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker cover 266, and the upper speaker bracket 264 of the left side decorative unit 240 are formed of a translucent member. The substantially entire side upper cover 248 is milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 246, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper speaker cover 266 are substantially transparent.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the side surfaces of the side lens 250 and the upper speaker cover 266 that are formed to be substantially transparent and the surface side of the side inner lens 252 and the upper speaker bracket 264 are formed in a polyhedron shape. The light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 It cannot be clearly seen from the person side. Further, the front surfaces of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently decorated with light emission by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, and the like. The decorative boards 254, 256 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. The left side decoration unit 240 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light.

  The side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure, and specifically, along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. An arc-shaped inner frame 242a and an upper portion that is arranged at a position away from the inner frame 242a toward the outside and is linear along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper portion. The outer frame 242b formed in an arc shape so as to bend toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 242a, the upper end frame 242c connecting the upper end edges of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a, the outer frame 242b and the inner frame A lower end frame 242d for connecting the lower end edges of 242a, and the inner frame 2 arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b. And a, and the partition frame 242f having a slit 242e of a predetermined width with connecting 2a and an outer frame 242b.

  The inner frame 242a of the side decoration frame 242 extends with substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the outer frame 242b has a rear end at a linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 that is formed in a straight line at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 242a, whereas the front end is vertically Are formed in an arc shape such that both ends of the projection protrude forward. Further, the curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the linearly extending portion of the outer frame 242b is formed in an arc shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. In addition, the partition frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 242f is arranged on the radiation that extends radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the gaming window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decorative frame 242 is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b by a plurality of partition walls 242f. Is a light emitting decoration opening 242g, and a peripheral lens portion 250a of a side lens 250 to be described later is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radiating lens portion 250b of the side lens 250 is fitted into the slit 242e of the partition wall frame 242f from the rear side. Further, the slit 242e and the light emitting decoration opening 242g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 242f, and the respective light emission modes can be made different.

  As shown in the drawing, the side upper decoration member 244 of the left side decoration unit 240 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 242b of the side decoration frame 242 and is also provided on the rear surface. Is formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 244a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 244 has a Jomon-like relief on the upper side along the openings 244a arranged in a row.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 246 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 244 and extends from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 244 through the opening 244a to the vicinity of the front end thereof. A plurality of light guides 246a that can protrude is provided. The light guide 246a has a polyhedral shape at the tip, and by inserting and fitting into the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244, it can appear as if gems are also fitted in the opening 244a. It can be done. Further, the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 disposed on the rear side by the light guide portion 246a of the side upper decorative lens 244 may be emitted forward (player side) from the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244. In addition, the tip of the light guide 246a can be shined as a jewel.

  The upper side cover 248 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a top surface and a left side surface (in front view) substantially aligned with the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and a lower surface (lower end). The shape is substantially in line with the side upper decorative member 244. The side upper cover 248 is provided with a mounting step 248a that is open at the bottom and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 244 can be accommodated in the lower front portion. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 244 and the like are formed on the end surface. Further, the side upper cover 248 includes a covering portion 248b that covers the upper shaft support portion 156 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 from the front side on the outer side surface (the left side surface in a front view).

  The side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a shape substantially along the side decoration frame 242 and has a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the light emitting decoration opening 242g of the side decoration frame 242 later. A peripheral lens portion 250a and a radiation lens portion 250b to be inserted into the slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242 later are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 250 does not include the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 242g contacting the upper end frame 242c of the side decoration frame 242, and the corresponding part is opened forward and downward. It is made the accommodation step part 250c made. The housing step 250c accommodates an upper left speaker 262, an upper speaker bracket 264, and the like, which will be described later. The side lens 250 includes an attachment portion 250d that forms the upper surface of the accommodation step portion 250c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step portion 248a in the side upper cover 248.

  The side lens 250 has a curved surface shape that bulges to the front side so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiating lens portion 250b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 250a is not uniform. As a result, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a is irregularly refracted. In addition, the inner surface formed in a polyhedral shape allows the peripheral lens portion 250a to exhibit a distinctive appearance.

  The side inner lens 252 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 250 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion where the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiating lens portion 250b are formed in the side lens 250 as shown in the figure. It corresponds to the main body 252a having a recessed rear surface and the radiation lens portion 250b (slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body 252a and projects forward from the main body 252a. A plate-shaped light guide portion 252b disposed at the position. The main body portion 252 a of the side inner lens 252 is formed such that the front surface thereof is kept a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 250. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The light transmitted through the main body 252a is irregularly refracted by the non-uniform thickness of the main body 252a.

  By combining the side inner lens 252 with the side lens 250, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and the main body portion 252a can be doubled and refracted, and the shape of the object disposed on the opposite side can be changed. It is almost unrecognizable. Further, the irregular reflection due to the polyhedral shape along with the irregular refraction allows the side lens 250 (circumferential lens portion 250a) to have a sparkling appearance and make the perspective feel unclear.

  The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the light emitting decorative openings 242g of the side decorative frame 242 (the periphery of the side lens 250). The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 250a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slit 242e (side lens 250 of the side lens 250) is used. The LEDs 254b and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 250b) have a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °).

  Similar to the side speaker 130, the upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a mid-high range sound and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion 264a that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. And the upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper speaker back side of the upper end of the horn portion 264a in the upper speaker bracket 264, so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 264a in front view. It has become.

  The upper left speaker 262 of the present example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, and this causes noise to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the front speaker bracket 264 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 264 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness.

  The upper speaker cover 266 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 264 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 242 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 242g in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decorative frame 242. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 250. Further, a plurality of through holes 266a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 266 so that sound from the upper left speaker 262 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 266 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing different directions like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 266 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness. Accordingly, in the upper speaker cover 266 and the upper speaker bracket 264, the light is irregularly refracted, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the through hole 266a formed in the upper left speaker 262 and the upper speaker cover 266 from the player side. The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250.

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the rear.

  The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and between the upper edge on the center side in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has a substantially inverted isosceles triangular shape as viewed from the front, and penetrates the central opening 281a that penetrates largely to the center and both the left and right sides of the central opening 281a. A front decorative member 281 that has a pair of side openings 281b and into which the tip of the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted above the central opening 281a, and a rear side in the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 A central lens 282 fitted from the rear side, an inner lens 283 arranged at the rear end of the central lens 282, a pair of side lenses 284 fitted from the rear side into the side opening 281b of the front decorative member 281, and an outer shape in front view The shape is similar to that of the front decorative member 281 and the center lens 282, the inner lens 283, and the pair of side lenses 284 are placed in front. A main body member 285 attached to the rear side of the front surface decorative member 281 so as to be sandwiched between the decorative members 281; And a board cover 287 attached to the rear surface of the main body member 285 so that the outer shape of the front view is substantially the same as that of the main body and covers the upper decorative board 286 from the rear side.

  The upper decorative unit 280 extends rearward while being bent continuously from the lower end of the front decorative member 281, and the upper front end is supported by the front decorative member 281, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is downward A lower surface decorative member 288 having a pair of lower openings 288a penetrating toward the lower surface, and a lower lens 289 fitted into the lower opening 288a of the lower surface decorative member 288 from the upper side and fixed to the lower surface decorative member 288 and the substrate cover 287, It is equipped with. In this example, a plating layer having metallic luster is formed on the surfaces of the front decorative member 281 and the lower decorative member 288. The LED 286a of the upper decorative substrate 286 is disposed at a position corresponding to the central lens 282, and the LED 286b is disposed at a position corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289. The lens 284 and the lower lens 289 can be individually decorated with light emission. In this example, the LED 286a is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b is a high-intensity white LED.

  The front decorative member 281 in the upper decorative unit 280 of this example has an inner peripheral shape of the central opening 281a in an arc shape in which the central upper end is a side extending left and right, the central lower end is a vertex, and each side is loose in front view. And has three protrusions extending from the approximate center of the upper side on both sides of the upper side and the apex of the lower side into the central opening 281a. The front decorative member 281 has a plurality of streaks extending obliquely outward and upward on the outer side of the upper side of the central opening 281a, and the front decorative member 281 is formed from the central opening 281a by the streaks. A side opening 281b is formed so as to extend along the streaking as well as the shape of the blade extending.

  The central lens 282 fitted into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 has an outer shape substantially the same as that of the central opening 281a, and has a shape that bulges forward. Are formed in a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions. The central lens 282 of this example is formed of a transparent (colorless transparent, colored transparent) resin. By fitting the central lens 282 into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, the central lens 282 looks like a jewel that is trillant cut, and the front decorative member 281 looks like a jewel base. .

  The inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 is formed of a transparent resin so as to close the opening on the rear side of the central lens 282, and a fine lens (or prism) is formed on the surface. A plurality of light sources are formed so that light from the upper decorative substrate 286 can be diffused widely toward the central lens 282 side. On the other hand, the side lens 284 fitted into the side opening 281b of the front decoration member 281 is formed of a transparent resin so that the front surface thereof is substantially continuous with the front surface of the front decoration member 281 when fitted into the side opening 281b. Has been. Note that a plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the back surface side of the side lens 284, as with the inner lens 282, and the entire side lens 284 is substantially uniform by the light emitted from the upper decorative substrate 286. Can emit light.

  Note that the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284 have a feeling of being clouded by a plurality of minute lenses formed on the surface, and the rear side is not clearly seen through the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284. It has become.

  The main body member 285 of the upper decorative unit 280 has an outer shape substantially conforming to the shape of the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, and the front end opening is inclined downward and closed. Center portion 285a inclined obliquely upward, and a closed rear end disposed on both sides of the central portion 285a is positioned substantially at the same position as the rear end of the central portion 285a, and the front end extends shorter than the central portion 285a. And a plurality of openings 285c formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the upper decorative substrate 286, penetrating the rear end surfaces of the central portion 285a and the side portion 285b. ing. When the upper decorative board 286 is arranged on the rear side of the main body member 285, the LED 286a of the upper decorative board 286 is inserted and arranged in the opening 285c so that the light from the LED 286a does not leak to the rear side. It has become. Further, the central part 285a and the side part 285b of the main body member 285 are recessed from the front side to the rear side, so that light from the corresponding LEDs 285a and 286b does not affect the side.

  The lower decorative member 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed so as to become thinner toward the rear, and the left and right side surface shapes thereof are the upper speaker covers 226 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. The shape of the end portion of the upper speaker frame 266 near the upper end frame 202c, 242c is substantially the same as the end shape of the upper speaker cover 226, 266 closer to the upper end frame 202c, 242c. ing. The lower lens 289 is sandwiched between the lower surface decoration member 288 and the upper speaker covers 226 and 266. Further, light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the left side upper decorative substrate 254 is supplied to the lower lens 289 via the upper speaker brackets 224 and 264 of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It emits light.

[1-2E. Side speaker cover]
Next, the pair of side speaker covers 290 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side speaker cover 290 covers and decorates the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and includes the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the dish unit 300, and the like. It is arranged between.

  The side speaker cover 290 supports a cover body 291 having a disk shape and a plurality of holes curved so as to cover the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an outer periphery of the cover body 291 from the front side. A main body member 292 that has an annular opening that is formed so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and a lower plate of the dish unit 300 that is disposed below the main body member 292. And a lower member 293 formed so as to be continuous with the left and right rear ends of the cover 328. In this example, since the cover body 291 is made of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 is possible. As long as it can be protected.

  In the side speaker cover 290, a plating layer having metallic luster is formed on the surface of the main body member 292. The lower member 293 is formed of a translucent member having a milky white color similar to that of the lower plate cover 328 in the plate unit 300 described later.

  The side speaker cover 290 of this example is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 independently of the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the dish unit 300. Through a mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18) formed at a predetermined position 110, the door frame base body 100 is fixed to the door frame base body 100 by a predetermined screw inserted from the rear side of the door frame base body 110.

  Thereby, after removing the security cover 180 in the door frame 5, the side speaker cover 290 can be removed to the front side by removing the screws attaching the side speaker cover 290 from the rear side of the door frame 5. The side speaker 130 can be removed by removing the speaker bracket 132 from the front side of the door frame 5. Therefore, even if the side speaker 130 needs to be replaced for some reason, the front side of the side speaker 130 can be removed without removing the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the dish unit 300, and the like from the door frame 5. Only the side speaker cover 290 that covers the speaker can be easily removed, and the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced.

  Thus, in this example, in order to replace the side speaker 130 attached between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the dish unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. First, since the main body member 292 disposed on the front side of the speaker in the side speaker cover 290 is detachably attached to the door frame base main body 110 from the rear side, the door that closes the front surface of the main body frame 3 After opening the frame 5 to the front side and removing the body member 292 from the rear side of the door frame 5 to the door frame base body 110, the body member 292 and the cover body 291 are attached to the door frame base body 110 (door frame 5). When it is moved to the front side and removed from the door frame 5, the side speaker 130 faces from the front side of the door frame 5. Since the side speaker 130 is sandwiched by the speaker bracket 132 attached to the door frame base main body 110 from the front side, the speaker for the door frame base main body 110 from the front side of the door frame 5 after the main body member 292 is removed. By removing the bracket 132 and releasing the holding of the side speaker 130, and further moving the side speaker 130 to the front side, the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 are moved to the door frame 5 (the door frame base main body 110. The side speaker 130 can be removed from the door frame 5 without being removed from the door frame 5, and the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily replaced.

  Further, even when a player or the like hits the door frame 5 (side speaker cover 290) during the game and the side speaker 130 is damaged, as described above, the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily removed. Since it can be exchanged, the interruption time of the game due to the exchange of the side speakers 130 can be shortened as much as possible, and the interruption is prolonged, so that the player becomes irritated and less interested and the interest is lowered. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the side speaker 130 is sandwiched between the speaker bracket 132 and the door frame base main body 110, and the side speaker 130 can be attached to the door frame 5 ( Since it can be attached to the door frame base body 110), the side speaker 130 does not need to be provided with a mounting piece, a mounting hole or the like, the cost for the side speaker 130 can be reduced, and the cost for the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the cover body 291 that covers the front surface of the side speaker 130 is formed of a metal plate (punching metal) having a plurality of through holes, the cover body 291 is not affected even if a player or the like hits the cover body 291. Deformation and breakage can be reduced as much as possible, the side speakers 130 can be sufficiently protected to prevent the occurrence of defects, and the durability of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced. .

  Moreover, since the side speaker cover 290 which covers the side speaker 130 is provided between the left and right side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker 130 is positioned relatively close to the player. However, as described above, the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced, and the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible. Thus, it is possible to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating. In addition, since the side speaker 130 is arranged as close as possible to the player, the sound output from the side speaker 130 can be heard by the player more efficiently, and a powerful sound is provided. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by making the sound production enjoyable.

  Further, since the side speaker 130 is disposed between the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the continuity of decoration by the side decoration units 200 and 240 can be maintained, and the side decoration unit can be maintained. 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 can be connected without a sense of incongruity, and the pachinko machine 1 that can prevent the appearance from being deteriorated by the side speaker cover 290 and attract the player's attention strongly can be obtained. Further, since the surface shape of the main body member 292 in the side speaker cover 290 is formed so as to be continuous with the surface shapes of the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker cover 290 is formed on the side decoration units 200 and 240. It is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable even if the side speaker 130 is provided on the front side separately from the side decoration units 200, 240, etc. The design of the front surface of the door frame 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be made favorable.

  Furthermore, when removing the main body member 292 of the side speaker cover 290 from the door frame 5, it is necessary to first remove the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 attached to the rear side of the door frame 5. It takes a little time to remove the glass, and it is possible to make the removal work troublesome for those who are trying to perform illegal acts, etc., and to make the removal work stand out by removing the relatively large glass unit 590 The pachinko machine 1 having high deterrence power (safety) against fraudulent acts etc. can be made by deceiving theft or fraudulent acts.

[1-2F. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the rear.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 to be described later, and games stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a ball hitting device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of the present example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and that extends in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped upper plate body 312 which is fixed at substantially the center of the front surface and opened upward and rearward and has a large front side left side (axial support side) bulging forward, and the front end of the upper plate body 312 covers the upper outer periphery. The upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward, and a plurality of openings 316a attached to the upper front edge of the upper plate upper panel 314 and penetrating in the vertical direction A plate front decoration member 316, and a plurality of light guide portions 318a which are disposed between the plate upper decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 and are fitted into the openings 316a of the plate upper decoration member 316 are provided. did The right pair of upper dish upper lens 318 and upper dish upper lens 318 are arranged on opposite sides of the upper dish upper panel 314 and are attached to the lower surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 and have a plurality of color LEDs 320a and 322a on the upper surface. Are mounted between the upper plate upper decorative panel 320 and the upper plate upper decorative panel 314 and the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322. And an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine prisms for diffusing the light to the upper dish upper lens 318 side.

  The dish unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 at the lower side of the upper dish body 312 and opened upward and rearward, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end toward the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the front, and fixed to the upper part of the lower dish body 324, and in the front view, the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the same manner as the lower dish body 324. A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and an opening 328a along the front ends of the lower plate top plate 326 and the lower plate main body 324, and covers the outer periphery of the opening 328a A cover 328, a dish side middle cover 330 having openings 330 a that are disposed on both left and right sides of the lower dish cover 328 and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and an opening 330 a of the dish side middle cover 330 A dish-side middle cover lens 332 fitted from the side, and a dish-side outer cover 334 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the dish-side middle cover 330 and extending in the left-right direction to positions corresponding to the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100. ing. Note that the dish side middle cover 330 disposed on the right side when viewed from the front is formed with a lock hole 330b at a right end portion thereof to face a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, a handle insertion hole 334a into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front is formed in the right dish side outer cover 334 when viewed from the front.

  Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing game balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. A lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling downward the game balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower tray 302, and installed on the upper left side in front view of the tray unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball rental unit 360 that operates a ball rental machine (also referred to as CR unit 6; see FIG. 171).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending in the left-right direction. Is provided. A ball rental unit attachment portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and attaching the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side of the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front) and has a horizontally long rectangular shape that passes through in the front-rear direction and an upper dish ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (substantially in the height direction of the plate unit base 310), and the upper plate And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e that are disposed directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper tray ball supply port 310c, protrude forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support part 310e arranged immediately below.

  The dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular ring in front view. A groove 310f and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is disposed in the lower right portion of the center surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply bowl 310h that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish bowl supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish bowl supply bowl 310h. A notch 310i formed on a side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

  The upper tray ball supply port 310 c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base main body 110 and the cutout portions 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. The unit 540 communicates with the first ball outlet 544a. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction when viewed from the front and is recessed backward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side when viewed from the front is slightly lower with respect to the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower with respect to the front-rear direction. As a result, the difference in height between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 increases toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 are: Since it becomes impossible to go straight into the front upper plate 301 from the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the paid-out game ball comes into contact with the game ball whose front side is closed and rolls. The direction is changed, and is guided to roll rightward in the guide recess 310j, and is released from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower stages in the upper plate 301, so that when the game ball blocks the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the player does not bring the game ball by hand. However, it is possible to continue to supply (release) the game balls that have been paid out into the upper plate 301, and to prevent the player from feeling troublesome about the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. , By dedicating the player to the game ball driving operation and the game using the game ball that has been driven in, it is possible to suppress the interest in the game from being reduced, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 Can be done.

  The upper dish ball outlet 310d of the dish unit base 310 includes an opening 344a of the upper dish ball removal base 344 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Via the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply rod 310h extending rearward from the rear side extends rearward through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 It is connected to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  In this example, as shown in the drawing, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with an enlarged portion 310k that spreads leftward in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply port is provided by the enlarged portion 310k. The front end of 310g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310g at an early stage due to the game balls in the lower plate 301 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g, and more games The sphere can be supplied into the lower plate 301.

  The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (the shaft support side) bulges forward from the center in the front view, and the bottom surface is entirely lowered at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. Yes. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the pivot support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310 c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310 d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located in the vicinity of the middle position in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 312a that can come into contact with the game ball from the center in the left-right direction at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 312a is electrically grounded (grounded) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper dish body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper dish body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction to which an upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, which will be described later, is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape that is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312 at the front end, and a decoration attachment portion 314b for attaching the upper plate front decoration member 316, and an upper portion at the center in the left-right direction. And an operation unit mounting portion 314c for mounting an operation unit 400, which will be described later, formed in a step shape lower than the decoration mounting portion 314b at a position in front of the plate body 312.

  Although not described in detail, the decoration mounting step 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314 has upper and lower positions at positions corresponding to the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decoration substrate 320 and the upper plate left decoration substrate 322 attached to the lower surface. An opening or notch that penetrates in the direction is formed, and an opening through which a wiring cord that connects the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control unit 4140 can pass is formed in the operation unit mounting portion 314c. .

  The upper front decorative member 316 has a shape extending in a left-right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314, and the light guide part 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 from the lower side to the plurality of openings 316a. And the upper plate upper lens 318 can be held between the upper plate upper panel 314 by being attached to the decorative attachment portion 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314. Further, an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine lenses (prisms) on its surface is disposed below the upper plate upper lens 318, and an upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and an upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are disposed. Is sufficiently diffused so that the entire upper dish upper lens 318 can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly. As shown in the figure, the inner peripheral shape of the opening 316a in the upper dish front decorative member 316 is formed in a pear shape, and the light guide 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 fitted into the opening 316a is the same. It is shaped, and by fitting this light guide portion 318a, it appears to have an appearance as if a pair-shaped gemstone was fitted into the opening 316a of the upper dish front decorative member 316. .

  The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a that extends in a fan shape forward in a plan view and has a rear end that is formed in a straight line in the left-right direction and has a substantially lower center on the upper surface, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front and side ends excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the side of the bottom plate 324a The upper end rising upward from the end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower dish top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear part of the upper end.

  The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is formed in an inverted triangle shape with the outer shape in front view bulging downward and arcs on each side, and includes an opening 328a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center. The inner shape of the opening 328 a is a shape that matches the shape formed by the front ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326, and forms the opening of the lower plate 302. The lower plate cover 328 is made of translucent milky white resin, and although not shown, color LEDs are arranged on the back side at predetermined intervals, and the entire lower plate cover 328 emits light. It can be decorated.

  The dish side middle cover 330 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower dish cover 328 in a front view, and is predetermined along a lower side of the lower dish cover 328 from a substantially center in the left and right direction to a side surface of the door frame 5 in a front view. The upper rear end extending to the side surface of the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side middle cover 330 includes an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the dish side middle cover lens 332 is fitted into the opening 330a from the rear side. Further, the right (open side) dish side middle cover 330 in the front view has a lock hole 330b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 near its outer end (right end). When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 330b.

  The dish side middle cover 330 further includes a bottom plate portion 330 c extending rearward from the lower front end thereof, and the rear end of the bottom plate portion 330 c is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is like that. In addition, a part of the lower side of the lower plate body 324 is covered by the bottom plate portion 330 c of the plate side middle cover 330.

  The dish-side outer cover 334 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the dish-side middle cover 330 when viewed from the front. It is formed in a box shape. In this example, a handle insertion hole 334 a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the right (open side) dish side outer cover 334 at a position corresponding to the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and a part thereof is attached to the dish unit base 310. Further, the lower side excluding the central portion of the lower plate body 324 is covered with the plate side outer cover 334 and the plate side middle cover 330.

  The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 is provided for the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341 that is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper dish upper panel 314 so as to be movable back and forth, and the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341. And an operation piece 342 supported on the front side of the dish unit base 310 and moved upward and downward by the vertical movement of the operation piece 342, and a ball feed unit 580 described later. The upper plate ball removal slider 343 disposed on the rear side of the plate unit base 310 is provided with a contact piece 343a that comes into contact with the operation rod 583c of the ball removal member 583, and the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is slidable in the vertical direction. An upper dish ball removal base 344 that is supported and attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 310.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 is omitted, an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper dish ball removal button 341 is arranged so that the upper dish ball removal button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. The coil spring is urged upward. The upper dish ball removal slider 343 is biased upward by a coil spring provided between the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  The upper dish ball removal base 344 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper dish ball discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 and simultaneously communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to open forward 344a (see FIG. 43), and a ball guiding channel 344b that communicates with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper dish ball removing base 344 and guides the game ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then guided backward (FIGS. 42 and 44) and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, it extends toward the right side (axial support side) end portion in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper dish ball removing base 344. And a ball passage 344c through which game balls can be distributed.

  In the upper dish ball removal base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guide channel 344b communicated with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is transferred to the ball feed unit 580 so as to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feed opening 113. Can be supplied to.

  Further, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344b of the upper plate ball removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110. In addition, the lower end extending to the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game balls discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 are It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The rear end lower portion of the bulb passage 344c is closed by an upper dish bulb passage cover 345.

  When the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also provided. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 in a predetermined direction by moving the contact piece 343a downward. The partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. Thereby, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 enter the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and the ball guide path 344b. After that, the balls are discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball base 344, and from the lower dish ball supply port 310g to the lower dish 302 via the lower dish ball supply rod 310h of the dish unit base 310. It can be discharged.

  Note that the ball removal member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is biased upward by the coil spring. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent breakage and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower dish ball removal base 351 disposed between the bottom plate portions 330 of the dish side middle cover 330 disposed on the lower side of the lower dish body 324 in front view and left and right. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324, and rotating the opening / closing shutter 352 while lowering the lower dish A lower dish ball removal slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 are provided.

  The lower dish ball removal base 351 includes a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324. The open / close shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b, and a shutter ball extraction hole which is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction and can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b. 352b, and a closing portion 352a is biased by a coil spring between the lower dish ball removal base 351 and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a.

  Although not shown in detail, the open / close shutter 352 includes a contact pin that can come into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353, and the contact pin comes into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353. The lower dish ball removal slider 353 is rotated so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward, or the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring. Can be done.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the lower dish ball removal button 354 is arranged at a position sandwiched between the left and right dish side middle covers 330 on the lower side in the horizontal direction of the lower dish cover 328 in the dish unit 300. The surface shape is such that the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the plate side middle cover 330 is smoothly continuous.

  Further, the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is configured such that the shutter ball removal hole 352b of the open / close shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 and the base ball removal hole 351a of the lower dish ball removal base 351. In order to hold in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removal button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removal button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. Yes, the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (the lower plate 302). When the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pushed rearward, the lower dish ball removal button 354 and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slide backward, and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slides backward. The opening / closing shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower plate ball hole are formed. 324b matches, and the game balls stored in the lower dish 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 300 through the lower dish ball removal hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removal slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removal button 354 is left in the opened state, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is provided in the lower dish ball. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removal button 354 is not kept depressed, while being held in a state where it matches the hole 3324b.

  On the other hand, when closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted lower dish ball removal button 354 is further pushed backward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the lower dish The ball slide 353 can be slid, and the open / close shutter 352 urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball removal hole 324b by the coil spring, the closing portion 352a is moved to the lower plate by the urging force. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removal slide 353 slides forward, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower dish ball removal button 354 is lowered. It returns to the position of the closed state substantially coincident with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, and the game ball can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  Note that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the detailed mechanism is omitted.

  The lending unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending unit 360 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then pushes the ball lending button 361, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. It can be lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the cash balance or prepaid card that has been inserted is returned. Yes. In addition, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash or prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball rental unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. The ball lending unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

  The dish unit 300 of the present example includes an upper dish 301 and a lower dish 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine having two storage dishes. The pachinko machine 1 can be reminiscent, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new pachinko machine), it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play by reducing anxiety given to the player. It has become.

[1-2G. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 to 50. 45 is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation unit is pressed in the operation unit.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and a press that can be pressed by the player An operation unit 405, which can accept a player's operation or move the dial operation unit 401 in accordance with the gaming state, and not only a game ball driving operation for the player It is intended to be able to participate in production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a columnar pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower coupled to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disc-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that is fixed to the rotating shaft of the drive gear 412, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support tube 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 are arranged. There is a spring 418 that biases upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a and button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 422a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 that is attached so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and covers the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit attachment portion 314c in the dish unit 300, a surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the cover main body 426, and an operation portion holding member 416 attached to the upper surface of the base member 420. Dial support substrate 430 having an opening 430a through which the button support tube 416b and the inner tube portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted on the upper surface corresponding to the ring of the dial operation portion 401. Are fixed to the lower side of the base member 420 and A button decoration board 432 having a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting rolling, a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting an operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a color LED 432d mounted on an upper surface directly below the pressing operation unit 405; It is equipped with.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a material having translucency, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extended surface, an outer tube portion 401c that extends downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a cylindrical shape, and is shorter than the inner tube portion 401a, and an outer tube And a flange portion 401d extending in an annular shape outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange 401 d in the dial operation unit 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a in the upper cover 422. Moreover, the dial operation part 401 is provided with the connection latching | locking part (refer FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder part 401a, and when the connection latching claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is latched, dial operation part 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a at a position that is lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401a. As will be described in detail later, the protruding portion 401 f can come into contact with the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from being further immersed into the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation unit 401 and the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation unit 405 are arranged such that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation unit 401. In this case, the contact area is increased when they are in contact with each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the button body 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button main body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape whose bottom surface is narrowed downward, and the upper end of a coiled spring 418 is inserted into the truncated cone-shaped bottom surface. In addition, a through-hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through-hole 406a. It is like that.

  The button main body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b that extend downward from the lower outer periphery and protrude outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By engaging with a locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward movement end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come out of the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support tube 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating within the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the button main body 406 has a predetermined angle by the gap. It can be rotated within the range.

  Further, the button main body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c that extends downward from a different position on the outer peripheral lower part of the locking claw 406b and can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432. The press detection piece 406c is detected by the press detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than a substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than the upper side, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a lower side than the step portion 407a smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and an upper side than the step portion 407a is a dial operation portion. The inner cylindrical portion 401a 401 has a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 contacts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. Further, the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. A character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b in the operation portion holding member 416, and an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It can be done.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410 b that extend upward from a position at which the upper ends face each other and project inward, and these connection locking claws 410 b are provided in the dial operation unit 401. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected to each other so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylinder portion 401a.

  The driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432. Although details will be described later, the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c are arranged between each other. The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed therebetween. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410 and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the drive gear 412 is driven to rotate by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating the forward / reverse rotation of the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) in small increments by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a predetermined rotation angle for a short period of time based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, so that the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. A feeling can be given.

  Further, the operation unit holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. Button support cylinder 416b that slidably moves in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 ( 49 and FIG. 50), and a through hole 416c that transmits light from the LED 432d that passes through the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and is mounted on the button decoration board 432 to the button support cylinder 416b (press operation unit 405). And a rotation detection sensor 4 attached to the button decoration board 432 through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416d through which 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e that passes through the bottom of the button support tube 416b in the vertical direction and is attached to the button decoration board 432, and an opening 416e that is desired from above, and downward from the bottom. And a pair of board holding claws 416f for locking and holding the extended button decorative board 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support tube 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and is locked. A plurality of abutting portions that can abut against the claw 406b are further provided. By this contact portion, the button main body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) can be rotated within a predetermined angle range, and is not rotated in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration board 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Is provided.

  The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) about a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be rotatable. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coiled spring 418 is disposed between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button main body 406, and the button main body 406 (press operation unit) 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit strongly. The base member 420 has a lower concave portion 420b that can be fitted to the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b that vertically penetrates the operation holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b across the opening 420a and that is recessed downwardly so as to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. I have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b and is attached to the motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f opening downward at the lower ends of the leg portions 420e are provided.

  Further, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover body 426 disposed on the outer side of the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is located upward from a different position outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses and mounting holes for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper and lower surfaces thereof.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower concave portion 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the top surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation unit holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 placed on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate within the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof fitted to a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later. 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 accommodated in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. Thereby, the overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and includes an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the flange portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. The engaging claw 422b that protrudes downward is provided at both ends in the major axis direction, and the engaging claw 422b is engaged with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  The upper cover 422 includes a claw-like locking piece 422c that extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side in the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction in the pachinko machine 1) and protrudes outward at the lower end. I have. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper dish front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

  The upper cover 422 is configured such that the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the base member 420 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422a with the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration board 430, the dial member 401, and the like attached thereto. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass, it is possible to prevent the dial operation unit 401 from being pulled upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially coincident with the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at both upper portions in the major axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

  As shown in the figure, the cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that passes through the center in the vertical direction and through which the dial operation unit 401 (excluding the flange 401d) can pass, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the tray unit 300, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided. .

  The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing part 426b of the cover main body 426. Although not shown in detail, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment part 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state where the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is slightly lifted from the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover body 426 can be elastically deformed to reduce the impact when it is pressed or hit.

  In the operation unit 400, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw with the front cover 428 removed, and then the cover body 426 is attached. The surface cover 428 is attached to the upper surface.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is the same length. In addition, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432 a and 432 b attached to the button decoration board 432 has an interval in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 that is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410. It is said that. Thereby, although details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection is detected. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  The operation unit 400 of the present example, as will be described in detail later, can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, Rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from turning on purpose, or a click can be added to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward in small increments.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 50, in the operation unit 400 of this example, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401, and the button cap Since 407 (press operation part 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e, the load applied to the press operation part 405 is dialed via the step part 407a and the protrusion part 401f. The operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of this example presses the pressing operation unit 405 so that the dial drive motor 414 is adjusted in small increments while the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other. By repeatedly rotating and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operation unit 401, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 so that the game and production can be enjoyed. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if a player or the like hits the operation units 401 and 405 strongly, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely attached to the player. In addition to being able to operate, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by enjoying the effects using the operation units 401 and 405. it can.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is struck strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is also struck, The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and it is possible to prevent the hitting impact from being concentrated and prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can be made to withstand strong hits, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405 and to entertain the performance using the operation units 401 and 405 and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As shown, when the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the cover body 426 can absorb an impact and a load by elastic deformation, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is connected to the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, an impact is caused by the bottom of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (the dish unit 300). Since the load can be received, the impacts from the operation units 401 and 405 can be dispersed and the impacts can be prevented from being concentrated. Can be increased.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e protruding downward from positions where the operation parts 401 and 405 are supported, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even when the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by contacting the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 in the base member 420 are not provided. The portion that supports the base plate is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the shock from the operation units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps the base member 420 in plan view. Even when the operation unit holding member 416 that holds the dial operation unit 401 moves away from the base member 420 when the operation unit 401 is struck from the upper side, the dial operation unit 401 comes into contact with the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotation drive including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised and attention can be paid to the effects produced by the operation units 401 and 405, the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, thereby enabling the dial operation unit It is possible to make the production using 401 (press operation unit 405) more diverse and less tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in games from being lowered.

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation axis of the dial drive motor 414 is apparently adjusted to the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. Direct dial drive motor 414 can be avoided and damage to dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can abut on the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 becomes the base member. It is possible to reliably prevent a drop from 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and load from the operation.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotating the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is driven. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite being driven by the rotation, even if the amount of heat generated due to excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated and radiated satisfactorily through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from being defective due to overheating. That can withstand high loads. Can be sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a press detection sensor 432c that detects the press of the press operation unit 405 are provided. The dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are provided. Rotation operation and pressing operation can be detected, so that it is possible to produce an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal, and it is more effective for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide an experience with a bodily sensation, and to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained. In addition, a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 for decorating the operation parts 401 and 405 are provided, and the operation parts 401 and 405 can be decorated with light emission, so that the operation parts 401 and 405 emit light. Thus, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other, so that the player can press the pressing operation portion 405. When the dial is pressed, the dial operation unit 401 is vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined angle range by the dial drive motor 414, thereby allowing the dial operation unit 401 to contact the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 via the step 407a. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation with respect to the pressing operation 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, an effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls. Further, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 that the user thought would not move. It is possible to make it seem that there is something, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the operation unit 400 to the player, and the enjoyment of the game by reducing the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even when the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed also on the dial operation unit 401 side, and load resistance and impact resistance against the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed. Can be increased. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the axial center extending in the vertical direction. When the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can perform the dial operation in the operation unit 400. The role of each of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and the player can easily enjoy the performance using the operation unit 400, and is guided to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The “PUSH” characters that have been played can be easily read from the player side without turning or tilting greatly, It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner tube portion 401a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller diameter than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a is formed at the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible. It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 as much as possible, and the inside of the operation unit 400 through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dust to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate due to the entry of foreign matter, and it is difficult to press the pressing operation unit 405. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, which part of the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 is selected. Since the contact can be made even at a position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position that is biased toward the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), the dial operation unit 401 is reliably contacted. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are annularly contacted, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side. Impact resistance can be further increased.

  Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed radially outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the load is prevented from being concentrated. The loadability and impact resistance can be reliably increased, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward / reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, or forward / reverse. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is high in order to store a large number of game balls. Thus, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a smashing of the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily entertain using the operation unit 400.

[1-2H. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as seen from behind. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A fixed and cylindrical handle base 502 whose front end bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, an annular rotary handle main body rear 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a rotary handle A rotating handle body front 506 fixed to the front surface of the rear body 504 and integrally rotatable with the rotating handle body rear 504, and disposed on the front surface of the rotating handle body front 506 and fixed to the handle base 502. Rotating handle body front 506 and rotation in cooperation A front cover 508 for rotatably supporting the bundle body after 504, and a.

  Further, the handle device 500 includes a shaft member 510 that is mounted and fixed at the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle body so as to protrude from the front side to the rear side and has a non-circular bearing portion 510a at the rear end, and a bearing portion of the shaft member 510. A rotation position detection sensor 512 that has a detection shaft portion 512a that can be rotated by being engaged with 510a and that is non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base 502, and the rotation position detection sensor 512 is sandwiched between the handle base 502 and the rotation position detection sensor 512. A sensor support member 514 having a through hole 514a that is fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 and through which the detection shaft 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 can pass, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear surface of the sensor support member 514, and a touch sensor 516 is a firing stop switch 518 mounted at a different position on the rear surface of the sensor support member 514, and a sensor support A single button 520 that is pivotally supported with respect to the member 514 and activates the firing stop switch 518, and a rotation handle body front 506 and a rotation handle body rear 504 that are arranged so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member 510 are initially rotated ( And a handle return spring 522 that urges it to return to a counterclockwise rotation end when viewed from the front.

  As shown in the drawing, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example has a hemispherical round shape that expands to the front side on the front end side, and a cylindrical shape with the rear end open on the rear end side. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on a cylindrical outer periphery on the rear end side. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 have one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Has been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tube portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a is fitted to the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arcuate slit 506a arranged concentrically with the rotation shaft is formed on the front surface 506 of the rotary handle, and three mounting bosses 508a protruding rearward are formed on the front end cover 508. These mounting bosses 508a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through a slit 506a in the front 506 of the rotary handle. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 506a in the front 506 of the rotating handle main body abuts on the mounting boss 508a of the front end cover 508 so that the rotation range of the rotating handle main bodies 504 and 506 is restricted.

  Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 506b protruding rearward is formed on the rotary handle main body front 506, and one end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 506b. And the other end side (rear end side) of the handle return spring 522 is locked to the sensor support member 514, and the rotary handle body 504 is held by the handle return spring 522. , 506 are biased to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 is inclined so that its mounting surface faces the outside (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above. The device 500 is also tilted outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). 5 to be fixedly attached. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grasp the handle device 500, and there is no sense of incongruity in the rotation operation, and it is easy to perform the rotation operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the rotational handle main bodies 504 and 506 (the handle device 500) are rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is detected via the shaft member 510. The shaft portion 512a rotates. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball hitting device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Thus, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 and the front end cover 508 are conductively plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects contact when the player touches the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 and the like. It is like that. When the touch sensor 516 detects the player's contact, when the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 rotate, the rotation drive of the launch solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball Can be typed in. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven, It is possible to reduce a load (burden) related to the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed by preventing the player from playing a game different from the original game.

  Further, when the player presses the single button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 stops the rotational driving of the firing solenoid 654. It is like that. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle apparatus 500, while launching of a game ball can be stopped temporarily, before operating the single button 520 by operating the single button 520 release operation. A game ball can be launched with a driving strength.

  In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotational operation of the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 is electrically detected by the rotational position detection sensor 512, and then the emission control is performed based on the detection of the rotational position from the rotational position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational driving strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the unit 4120, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 as in a conventional pachinko machine, It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the door frames 5 are linked to each other when the door frame 5 is closed and the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration relating to the pachinko machine 1 is simplified. It is possible to eliminate the occurrence of defects in the joint unit, and the player's interest is reduced due to a gaming ball driving defect. And it is capable to suppress.

[1-2I. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the back. FIG. 54 is a front view showing the foul cover unit with the front cover removed.

  A foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to a rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 to be described later, or a ball hitting device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of game ball passages therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first sphere inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front end of the cover base 542 that communicates with the first sphere inlet. A first sphere passage 542b that expands to the right as viewed from the front, a second sphere inlet 542c that is arranged outside the first sphere inlet 542a (on the right in the rear view) and is larger than the first sphere inlet 542a, and a second A second ball inlet 542c that communicates with the ball passage 542d and extends downward and slopes downward toward the lower right corner when viewed from the front is provided. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the drawing, the second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 has a height of a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end, which is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. An accommodation space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can be guided to the upper part in the vicinity of the downstream of the foul ball inlet 542e and the foul ball inlet 542e, which is disposed at a substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e. A foul ball passage 542f. The cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, and is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first spherical passage 542b of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first sphere outlet 544a and the second sphere outlet 544b that is disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second sphere passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310 c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the rear end of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet 544b through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 of the present example passes the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b. 544a can be supplied to the upper plate 101 through the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d. From 544b, it can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply bowl 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 will be described in detail later, but when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supply) the game balls received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and can swing by a game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. A swing member 548 pivotally supported by the shaft, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that biases the swing member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550. 552. As shown in FIG. 54, the swinging member 548 is pivotally supported at the lower end with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end is rotated to the left in the front view. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where the swinging member 548 is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by a full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the back. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance caused by circulation of game balls.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. Even if the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the game ball stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, the game ball flows to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79). From the full tank outlet 776 to the second bulb inlet 542c, the second bulb passage 542d, and the second bulb outlet 544 of the foul cover unit 540. It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  When the inside of the lower plate 302 of the tray unit 300 is filled with game balls, the game balls can no longer come out from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and are stuck in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and more game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 stops the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700, and also provides the player with a dish unit. Notification is made to prompt the player to discharge the game balls in 300 to the outside.

  When the game ball in the storage space 546 (the lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 is returned to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the full detection sensor 550 detects the detection piece 548a. The non-detection is made, and the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is resumed.

[1-2J. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 57. FIG. 55 is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 56 is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear after removing the rear case. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower dish 302 by operating the upper dish ball removal button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 that has a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 581a and is opened at the rear, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. A rear cover 582 having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the rear cover 582 and the front cover. A partition 58 that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. a ball-extracting member 583 having a, and game balls on the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-extracting member 583 are sent one by one to the hitting supply port 582a of the rear cover and extend vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. A ball feeding member 584 supported so as to be rotatable around the axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in front view, and the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. Has been placed.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 583c of a ball punching member 583, which will be described later, extends from 581c to the front. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. When the front cover 581 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guide channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344 is assembled. Is formed to close.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a and a partition portion 583a which are separated from the entrance port 581a and the ball exit port 581b below the entrance port 581a and whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feed member 584. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and bends from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 583b that is pivotally supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 583c that projects forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 583b, and a side surface of the pivot collar 583b below the actuation collar 583c. And a weight portion 583d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 583a. An operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 55), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110 The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300 is in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583. A sphere holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end to the rotation axis side, and a rod-like flange portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 584b are provided. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b in the ball feeding member 54 are formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball. The ball feed member 584 rotates about the rotation axis when the flange 584c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585. ing.

  In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It rotates between the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650 and enters the partition portion 583a from the advance port 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a and stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the flange portion 584c side closes the hitting ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Further, the ball feed unit 580 is moved back and forth by the ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and the movement of the tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 which is swung vertically. And a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and the side of the engagement portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operation rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is supported between a front cover 581 and a rear cover 582 so as to be pivotable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a ball feed member 584 extending upward from the shaft 587b. And a transmission portion 587c engaged with a rod-shaped flange portion 584c (see FIG. 57) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center. In this example, a flapper solenoid in which a ball feeding solenoid 585 and a ball feeding operating rod 586 are integrally formed is used.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586 that swings by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves forward and backward by the ball feed actuating rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587. 584 can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the tip of the swing is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 that is pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is configured to apply a moment that rotates counterclockwise by the weight portion 583c. The operation rod 583c protruding forward comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300, so that its rotation is restricted. In a normal state, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 partitions the entrance 581a and the ball removal port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball removal port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, the ball removal member 583 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the ball outlet 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet passage 344c of the upper dish ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. Then, it is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 against which the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 abuts is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. It is possible to prevent the partition portion 583a from bouncing back.

  As described above, according to the present example, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 301 and the game ball is supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, and then the player holds the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the ball hitting device 650 by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580, and the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting device 650, thereby playing the game window 101 of the door frame 5. A game is played in the game area 1100 that can be viewed via the player, so that the player can be entertained, and a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or ball feed solenoid 585 is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a discharge mechanism (ball removal member 583) are disposed, so that only the ball feed member 584 and the ball removal member 583 are provided. The ball feeding member 584 and the ball hitting device 650 are also brought as close as possible, and when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, it remains on the ball feeding member 584 side. It is possible to reduce the number of game balls as much as possible, and to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 provided with the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball can be thrown in. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early or the game balls in the upper plate 301 from being filled up early due to the operation. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of annoyance and suppress the interest, and the dish unit 300 can be downsized while maintaining the capacity of the upper dish 301, so that the game The area 1100 can be enlarged (widened) to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, the ball feed member 580 is simply attached to the ball feed member 580 as compared with the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 separately. 584 and the ball punching member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in the assembly can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a defect occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball punching member 583. Even so, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feeding unit 580.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the ball feeding unit 580 provided on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340) that transmits the operation of the removal button 341 to the ball removal member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 that can be opened and closed. The configuration related to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (when the door frame 5 is opened, as compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side). By shutting off the upper bowl removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism will be consumed at an early stage, causing malfunction or damage, and reliability for the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580, etc. And durability can be increased.

  Further, since the upper plate ball removal button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 or the upper plate 301 by simply pressing the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward. Can be stopped, and the player can easily perform the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

  The partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction in accordance with the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 341, and the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is moved. At the same time, the partition portion 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the partition portion 583a can be made as small as possible. The unit 580 can be reduced in size, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is urged upward, and the partition portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a when the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously comes into contact with the partition portion 583a, the impact can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removal member) 583) can be improved. Further, since the impact applied to the partition portion 583a can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper dish ball removal slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult to repel even when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing problems.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, compared to the case where the partition portion 583a is slid, it relates to the movement of the partition portion 583a when a load of a game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a. The friction loss can be reduced, and the operability can be improved by lightening the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341, and the moving range of the partitioning portion 583a can be reduced in the planar projection. The effect of this can be achieved.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other, the partition portion Rotating due to its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (input device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it will be discharged to the player side without being played, the player can be made aware that there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 and moved to a pachinko machine 1 with no problems. It can suppress that it falls.

  Further, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated via the rotating hook part 583b bent, the rotating hook part bent when the game ball collides with the divider 583a. It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft by dispersing it by 583b or by absorbing it by bending of the rotating collar portion 583b, and to improve the durability of the ball removing member 583. Can be increased.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged, the right and left of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 are Directional movement can be minimized, and the game ball can be discharged well by improving the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can serve as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, the ball feeding unit 580 can be prevented from being unnecessarily enlarged.

[1-2K. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 is demonstrated mainly with reference to FIG.22 and FIG.23. This glass unit 590 has an opening of approximately the same size as the gaming window 101 and has an annular, vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592. And a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 106). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes four pieces 592a that are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction at the left and right ends and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate that extends in the horizontal direction along the lower end and extends downward. Shaped locking piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end to engage with the vertical bent protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. After that, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. It is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIGS. 23, 28, etc.).

  As described above, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing game balls arranged vertically below the gaming window 101 having a vertically long elliptical shape, For driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed on the rear side of the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. A handle device 500 is arranged. The door frame 5 includes a right side decoration unit 200, a left side decoration unit 2200, and an upper decoration unit 280 so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the gaming window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the gaming window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is disposed so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220 with the side speaker cover 290 interposed therebetween, and the appearance of each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 is rounded. Appearance with continuous integration.

  Further, the door frame 5 emits the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 and the like provided in the respective units 200, 220, 280, 300, thereby causing the gaming window 101 to emit light. In addition, light emission decoration can be performed with an arbitrary light emission color so as to surround the opening 328a of the lower plate cover 328. Of the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, on the rear side of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. By turning on and off the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256 that are arranged, the mode of the light-emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101 can be changed.

  Specifically, the light emission modes of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a in the side lenses 210, 250 and the light emission of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b. If the modes are the same emission mode (the emission color and the emission pattern are the same), the overall illumination pattern can be made substantially uniform. If it is, it can be set as the light emission decoration which was interrupted in the circumferential direction. It can be made into a light-emitting decoration, and can attract a player's interest strongly.

  In the door frame 5, the base member 420 that supports the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is made of aluminum alloy by die-casting, and the base member 420 is attached to the plate unit 300 by the cover body 426. Since the operation unit mounting portion 314c is suspended, when the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is hit, the cover body 426 is elastically deformed to bend and the base member 420 is lowered. The contact with the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c through the cover 424 can alleviate the impact on the dial operation unit 401, the pressing operation unit 405, and the like, and can prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged. It can be done.

  Furthermore, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 405 is inserted into the annular dial operation unit 401, and the dial operation unit 401 is included together even if a player or the like tries to strike the pressing operation unit 405 strongly Therefore, the impact hit by the dial operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the impact can be prevented from being concentrated to be hard to break. In addition, the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 that rotatably supports the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 420a of the metal base member 420 so as to slightly protrude from the upper surface from below. When the impact hitting the portion 401 is transmitted to the operation portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) via the driven gear 410 and the operation portion holding member 416 is bent downward, the lower surface of the driven gear 410 is the outer periphery of the metal opening 420a. Since the base member 420 can contact the upper surface and receive the impact, it is possible to reduce the load on the operation portion holding member 416 and to prevent the gear rail 416a from being crushed by the impact. The durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is attached to the plate unit 300 from the upper side, even if the operation unit 400 is damaged, the operation unit 400 can be easily replaced. It is possible to prevent the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 from being lowered by replacing the unit 400.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Next, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of the LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. FIG. 60 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, and 300 is provided with a decoration board 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, and 322 on which LEDs are mounted. The outer periphery can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of peripherals in the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion of the gaming center 101 in the left-right direction center. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other. The peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 are surrounded by side decorative frames 202 and 242 that are opaque (in this example, have a plating layer on the surface). Is surrounded.

  Side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged on the rear side of these side lenses 210 and 250, and the body inner portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged with respect to the rear surfaces of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. The plate-shaped light guides 212b and 252b are formed so as to extend as far as possible to the rear surfaces of the radiation lens units 210b and 250b. Has been. Although not shown in detail in the main body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, a plurality of fine prisms are formed on the surfaces thereof, and the decorative substrates 214, 216 and 254 arranged on the rear side. , 256 can diffuse light.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b are provided. In this example, LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b are white LEDs (upper decorations). Normal luminance lower than that of the LED 286b of the upper decorative board 286 in the unit 280). In addition, the two LEDs 214c arranged above and below corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 in the upper decorative board 214 on the right side are red LEDs.

  In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the lights from the player side are reflected by the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating in appearance, and by reflecting the light from each of the LEDs 210a and 210b that emit light to the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly decorated.

  Next, as described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the upper side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction. The upper center of the gaming window 101 is decorated. The upper decoration unit 280 includes a large central lens 282 formed in a jewel shape in the center, side lenses 284 formed in a wing shape on the diagonally upper left and right sides of the central lens 282, and lower left and right sides of the central lens 282. And a lower lens 289 arranged. The central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a blue-tinged transparent member, and the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are formed of a white (milky white) member having translucency. . Thereby, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 can be visually recognized from the player side.

  The inner lens 283 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of fine lenses (including prisms) formed on the surface, and can diffuse and refract light, so that the light passes through the transparent central lens 282. When the inner lens 283 is viewed, the central lens 282 appears to be deep, and the central lens 282 itself appears to shine. Further, the upper decorative substrate 286 disposed on the rear side of the inner lens 283 is not visible from the player side.

  The upper decorative board 286 in the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of (six in this example) LEDs 286 a corresponding to the central lens 282 and disposed behind the inner lens 283, and the rear lenses 284 and the lower lens 289. A plurality of LEDs 286b (in this example, two for the side lens 284 and one for the lower lens 289, respectively) on the left and right sides. In this example, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 is a full color LED, and the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 is a high-intensity white LED. Further, the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 286 is also white, so that the same operational effects as described above can be achieved.

  Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, a plurality of jewel-like light guides 318 a in the upper dish upper lens 318 are formed along the front end of the upper dish 301 so as to connect the lower ends of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240. The front decoration member 316 is lined up so as to be exposed through the opening 316a. When viewed from the front, the upper side front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper lens 318 allow the outer side of the lower side of the gaming window 101 to be shown in the figure. (Lower) is designed to decorate. Below the upper dish upper lens 318, an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a projection corresponding to each light guide 318a is disposed. The upper dish upper lens 318 of the dish unit 300 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the upper dish upper inner lens 319 is formed of a transparent member.

  The upper dish upper inner lens 319 of the dish unit 300 has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface (upper surface) corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318, and diffuses and refracts light. In the same way as the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280, the light guide 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 is given a deep and sparkling brightness to guide it. The light part 318a looks like a jewel. In addition, the upper dish upper decorative substrate 320 and the upper dish left decorative substrate 322 are not seen from the player side through the light guide 318a by the upper dish upper inner lens 319.

  On the upper surface of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 in the plate unit 300, a plurality of (six in this example) are provided so as to correspond to the light guide portions 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318. LEDs 320a and 322a are provided. In this example, the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper pan right decorative substrate 320 and the upper pan left decorative substrate 322 are full-color LEDs. Moreover, the surface (upper surface) of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 is also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a ring-shaped dial operation unit 401 having translucency and a columnar pressing operation unit having translucency disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, the door frame 5 of this example corresponds to the peripheral lens portions 210 a and 250 a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are a first annular group 102 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) close to the gaming window 101, and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (In the range of the cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light appropriately, so as to surround the gaming window 101, and are substantially concentric. A plurality (two in this example) of light emission can be decorated. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are caused to emit light, the hatched area near the gaming window 101 is decorated in a ring shape, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are activated. When all the lights are emitted, the cross hatch area away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 214 b, 216 b, 254 b, 256 b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210 b, 250 b of the side lenses 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are the first annular group 102 and the first ring group 102. A radial group 104 (within the shaded area in FIGS. 59 and 60) that extends radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the bicyclic group 103 in the circumferential direction. ing. The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 can appropriately emit light so that the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission in addition to the annular shape of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The light emitting decoration can be decorated so as to be divided in the circumferential direction. Further, the LEDs 214c corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the upper right side in the right side decoration unit 200 are set as the upper right side group 105. The portion (side sub-lens 228) can be decorated with light emission.

  In the door frame 5, the LED 286 a corresponding to the central lens 282 in the upper decorative unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101 emits light at the upper center of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. Group 106 is designated. The LED 286a of the upper central group 106 can appropriately emit light so that the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission, and the reference point of the annular light emitting decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It is possible to make such a luminous decoration. The LED 286 b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper central side group 107 that decorates the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. The LED 286b of the upper central side group 107 is appropriately lit to decorate the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106, or above the gaming window 101 (including the upper part). It is possible to decorate the light emission in a V shape.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 320 a corresponding to the light guide 318 a of the upper dish upper lens 318 fitted in the plurality of openings 316 a of the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300 decorating the lower side of the gaming window 101. , 322 a is a lower group 108 that illuminates and decorates the outer periphery of the lower side of the gaming window 101 so as to connect the left and right lower ends of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 320a and 322a of the lower group 108, the lower side of the gaming window 101 and the front edge of the upper plate 301 can be decorated with light emission, and the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 , 216a, 254a, and 256a, the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can be illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the lower center of the gaming window 101 and in the upper center of the dish unit 300 An operation unit group 109 for decorating light emission is used. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be changed. The player can be informed.

  The light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which they belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250, respectively. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. It has been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into 8 systems 104a to 104h for each of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. Also, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the upper right side group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the six LEDs 286a belonging to the upper center group 106 are divided into three systems, a lower portion 106a, an upper right portion 106b, and an upper left portion 106c. The six LEDs 286b belonging to the upper central side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the twelve LEDs 320a and 322a belonging to the lower group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d, three by three from the right side when viewed from the front. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and a pair of left and right 109a and front and rear 109b. The two LEDs, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

  Meanwhile, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, and 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 432d belongs are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit full color, and 3 in actual light emission control. It has doubled 84 systems. The LEDs 286b and 430b are high-intensity white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 107b, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 286b and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high luminance. Two systems are connected to each other. In actual light emission control, the number of systems is doubled to 8 systems.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal luminance, and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a red LED and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting / flashing and the like are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, a rich light-emitting effect can be achieved.

  As the lighting effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color) to spread outwardly around the gaming window 101. Light emission effect, or conversely, light emission effect that converges from the outside toward the gaming window 101 by emitting light sequentially from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color), Alternatively, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can emit light at the same time, so that a light-emitting effect or the like can be performed so that the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 emits light widely.

  In addition, by coordinating with the LEDs (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the front surface of the game board 4 and the front unit 2000, the LEDs of the game board 4 and the LEDs of the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101 are provided. With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102, it becomes possible to provide a more expressive light-emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly, It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by delighting the player.

  Moreover, in the 1st cyclic | annular group 102, the 2nd cyclic | annular group 103, and the lower group 108, light circulates the outer periphery of the game window 101 by light-emitting each system | strain 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 108a-108d suitably. Such as a light emission effect, or light moving toward the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, or light from the central lens 282 along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. It is possible to produce a light emission effect that moves. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light circulates around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101.

  Further, by emitting light only from the radial group 104, a light emission effect is produced in which the light is emitted radially around the gaming window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. To produce a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or to cause the radial group 104 to emit light (light on / flash) while the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 emits light. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration. Further, by emitting light individually from each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104, it is possible to produce a light emission effect such that the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b circulate.

  Further, the central lens 282 as a whole emits light by simultaneously emitting light from the respective systems 106a to 106c of the upper central group 106, and light is rotated in the central lens 282 by sequentially emitting light from each of the systems 106a to 106c. Light emission effects can be performed. Further, the upper center side group 105 emits light so that the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are illuminated and decorated with high brightness, and the player has an opportunity and a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probable game) State, short-time gaming state, short-time gaming state when probability change, etc.) can be performed. The lower lens 289 is arranged so as to irradiate light from the player's head toward the player, so that the player can easily notice the light emission of the high-brightness LED 286b. .

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 can emit light by decorating the front edge of the upper plate 301 by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108 a to 108 d of the lower group 108 or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109. Or a light-emitting effect that prompts the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405. In addition, the system 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 is appropriately caused to emit light so as to prompt the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guide the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to produce a lighting effect with different gradations such as emission color and brightness for each 109 or for each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, 109c. A rich lighting effect can be performed.

  Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a are the first close to the gaming window 101. Since the ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 far from the game window 101 outside the first ring group 102 can be made to emit light, a plurality of outsides of the game window 101 (game area 1100) are arranged. The pachinko machine can be decorated in a substantially concentric circle shape, and the light surrounding the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can produce a light emitting effect that is not available in conventional pachinko machines, and attracts the player's attention strongly. 1 can be set.

  In addition, one peripheral lens portion 210a, 250a is provided with two systems of LEDs arranged in a substantially concentric circle, and even if the appearance looks like one, each LED of the two systems can emit light. Since the light emission decoration can be made substantially concentrically, it is difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emission decoration from the appearance, and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a (the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit) by the light emission decoration can be made. 240) can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention strongly by increasing the impact of the light emitting decoration can be obtained.

  Furthermore, LEDs 214b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 that are divided in the circumferential direction by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b and arranged substantially concentrically. Therefore, it is possible to decorate the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in a plurality of annular shapes by causing the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light according to the gaming state. And I have never seen it on a pachinko machine so far It is possible to show the cormorants Do not light-emitting decoration to the player, can be a pachinko machine 1 attracted is strong interest in the player.

  Further, the annular first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 constituted by the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 in the door frame 5 are arranged substantially concentrically (FIG. 60). So that the light converges toward the gaming window 101, that is, the gaming area 1100 by emitting light in the order of the second annular group 103 and the first annular group 102 from the outside to the inside. And can make the player's interest to the gaming area 1100, and can make it seem that there is something good in the gaming area 1100, which increases the expectation of the game. It can suppress that interest falls. Furthermore, by emitting light in the order of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 from the inside to the outside, it is possible to perform a light-emitting effect that spreads outward from the game window 101, that is, the game area 1100. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that there is something good for the light-emitting effect spreading to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Furthermore, since the above-described light-emitting effects can be performed outside the game window 101 (game area 1100), not only a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 but also the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The player in the game hall can also show the above-mentioned light-emitting effects, attract the interest of other players, and make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play. Can do.

  In addition, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 that are radially arranged so as to divide the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 that extend in the circumferential direction in the circumferential direction. Since it is possible to divide the annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction by causing these radial groups 104 to emit light, it is possible to add an accent to the luminous decoration, The player's interest can be strongly attracted by changes in the light-emitting decoration. Further, the radial groups 104 arranged in a radial direction cause the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to correspond to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 in the circumferential direction. Since the LEDs 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j are divided, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the respective peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a are caused to emit light independently for each of the systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j. Thus, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in which light moves in the circumferential direction, and it is possible to obtain a pachinko machine 1 that is hard to get tired of by providing more various light emission effects.

  Further, the side lenses 210 and 250 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a corresponding to the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a and 256a, and radiation lens portions 210b and 250b corresponding to the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b. Compared with the case where the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b are included in the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and integrated, the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be changed, so that Even when the lighting decoration is not performed, the design of the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained. Even if the side lenses 210 and 250 are divided into the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b, the annularly arranged LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a and the radially arranged LEDs 214b and 216b are arranged. , 254b, and 256b in the same light emission mode, it is possible to make an illusion that the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b are integrated, and the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 is integrated Thus, the light emitting decoration can be performed in a ring shape, and the above-described effects can be sufficiently achieved.

  Further, the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 that are partitioned in the circumferential direction by LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged radially on one peripheral lens portion 210a and 250a in the side lenses 210 and 250. , 216a, 254a, 256a are made to correspond to each other, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light even if the appearance looks like one. Therefore, it is possible to make the light emission decoration substantially concentrically, so that it is difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emission decoration from the appearance, the change of the side lenses 210 and 250 due to the light emission decoration can be increased, and the light emission Increase the impact of decoration and attract players' attention It can be pachinko machine 1 to be kicked.

  Furthermore, the side inner lenses 212, 250 irradiate the side lenses 210, 250 by diffusing light from the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 between the side lenses 210, 250 and the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256. 252 is provided, so that unevenness in the light emitting decoration of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be suppressed, the appearance of the light emitting decoration can be improved, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, Even if 254a and 256a are used, the side lenses 210 and 250 can be decorated with light emission in a planar shape, so that a light emitting body that emits light in a linear shape (for example, a cold cathode tube (fluorescent tube), a neon tube, an organic EL, etc.) As compared with the case where the LED is used, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a are individually made to emit light, thereby allowing the first annular group 1 to emit light. 2 and the second annular group 103 can also change the light emission in the circumferential direction, can present more various light emission effects, and suppress the decrease in the interest of the player due to difficulty in getting bored. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's interest.

  Further, since the light can be diffused by the side inner lenses 212 and 252, even if the transparency of the side lenses 210 and 250 is increased, the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 is caused by random refraction in the side inner lenses 212 and 252. The decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 placed on the board can be hard to see, and the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, etc. can be seen directly from the player side and prevent the appearance from deteriorating. Can do.

  Furthermore, the light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b is guided by the light guide portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 to irradiate the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. The light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b can be reliably guided to the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b to be decorated with light emission, so that the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects can be realized. Further, the light guide portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 ensure the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 even if the distance between the side lenses 210 and 250 and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b is long. Since the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 irradiate the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 widely with the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, sufficient space between the side lenses 210 and 250 is sufficient. The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged radially can be mounted on the same substrate as the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a that secure the space, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

  Further, the side decorative frames 202 and 242 surround the outer periphery of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250, so that the light from the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a is emitted from the radiating lens. It is possible to reduce as much as possible that the light from the portions 210b and 250b or the light from the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b affects the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a, and the light emitting decorations interfere with each other. It is possible to prevent the appearance of the light emission.

[1-3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the outer frame 2 and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can hold the game board 4 detachably from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction to have a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base An upper shaft bracket 630 and a lower shaft bracket 640 that are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end portion of the front view 600 and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the main body frame base 600. A ball hitting device 650 for driving a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4 and a game ball delivered to the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. Open the ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except the game board 4, a power supply board 851, and the like. Are combined into a unit board unit 800, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and the outer shape of the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 and is approximately in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a certain depth D (see FIG. 65). Accordingly, when the main body frame base 600 is faced down when attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the depth D of the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and workability relating to the assembly of the main body frame 3 is improved. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a gaming board holding port through which the entire range of about 3/4 penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction from the upper part to the lower part so that the outer periphery of the gaming board 4 can be fitted and held. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a recess from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear, and the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. Door frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the frame, the upper bent protruding piece 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside protruding rearward of the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the bent protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spread in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like that.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and a game board placement part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placement part 606. A game board of the game board 4 that is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and a positioning projection 607 that protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can come into contact with the upper end of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be fitted into the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. Yes. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 when viewed from the front will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is mounted with a bracket for mounting the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 on the rear surface of the free end portion (upper left and right end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. Part 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the bracket mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and attaches the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through-hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and is formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through-hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits the positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 that is formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front are accommodated. A solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, The ball striking device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the ball hitting device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall 604, as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, A foul space 626 extending downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  The main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in a front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides of the front view. A through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like). The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a front wall on the front side.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the front upper end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616 and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 when viewed from the front and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis that is pivotally supported by the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise when viewed from the front). The game board fixing tool 690 is pivotally supported on the fixing tool support 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixing tool 690 in the clockwise direction in front view. Then, the fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, the game board fixing tool 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is regulated by contacting the stopper 617. It has become.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the lower rear surface from the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressure is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 includes three pieces penetrating vertically in the front-rear direction on the inner side (axial support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 in front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and is arranged in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in the approximate center in the vertical direction. The upper and center door hook holes 620 and the lock engagement holes 621 are engaged with and engaged with engagement protrusions 1004 provided at both upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000, and the front end frame portion 602 is engaged. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 descends slowly and obliquely downward from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the rear view, and then the lower rear wall 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction. Is provided with a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 that allows the game ball to circulate from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly above. The main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed at the rear side by a substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and will be described in detail later. A game ball that has circulated through the ball extraction passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 is provided. It comes to circulate.

  A plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the back, and the back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supports the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 obliquely upper left in the front view of the opening 614, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 in front view. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, the main body frame base 600 has mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, etc. as appropriate. Is formed.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the metal mounting portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. Thus, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper shaft support metal 630 is attached to the upper metal attachment part 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment part 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment part 631. A front extending portion 632, a shaft supporting pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 632, and a shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side in front of the shaft supporting pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63 and the like) penetrating in the vertical direction is inserted, and the door frame 5 is pivoted downward from the left end of the front extension portion 632 when viewed from the front. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 107) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. A main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft bracket 642 in the lower shaft bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a. A plate-like front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extending portion And a stopper 642d that is erected upward from the left end of the front view 642a and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support 642 is integrally formed with a mounting portion 642a, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends from the bottom of the attachment portion 644a in a plate-like attachment portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. The main body frame shaft support 644 is also integrally formed with an attachment portion 644a and a front extension portion 644b formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support 640 of this example is in a state in which the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction. The front extension 642b of the shaft support 642 and the front extension 644b of the main body frame support 644 are attached to the lower metal attachment 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance therebetween in the vertical direction. It is like that.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640 Are positioned on the same axis, and the body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is placed on the outer frame 2. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by being inserted into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640. The metal fitting 642c is coaxially positioned, and the door is such that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal 642 in the lower shaft support metal 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, Once the door shaft 5 is slid downward and the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launcher 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. The hitting ball launching device 650 can drive the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the ball hitting device 650 of the present embodiment, a metal plate launch base 652 attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652 are projected. The launching solenoid 654, the hitting ball 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and the movement locus of the tip 658. The tip of the hitting ball 656 between the firing rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left in front view and is attached to the front surface of the firing base 652 and the firing rail 660 at the upper base end of the firing rail 660. The ball stop that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball cannot pass at the same time as the ball 658 can pass. The ball 66 槌 (tip 658) is prevented from rotating toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 can be hit by the piece 662 and the ball stopper piece 662. A stopper 664.

  The firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is not shown in detail, but the drive shaft 654a is reciprocally rotated at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the ball striking ball 656 of the ball striking device 650 includes a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A collar portion 656b that faces the normal direction and has a collar portion 656b fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side with respect to the collar portion 656b and can be brought into contact with the stopper 664c. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball basket 656 is in contact with the stopper 664, the tip of the tip 658 is rotated to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Being regulated.

  In addition, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 has a loose arc shape that is recessed downward so as to be substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98) and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center is shaped like a V-shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  Further, the hitting ball launcher 650 includes a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of the stopper 664 that can restrict the rotation end of the hitting ball 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting ball position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, so that it can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts and suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. Be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, the hit ball launching device 650 of the present example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the lower side of the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601) is located outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 of this example hits the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by firing the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the front view from the launch rail 660. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 A game ball that has not been driven into a foul ball falls into the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  In addition, the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the firing control unit 4120 with a driving strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It is made to drive in synchronism with the drive. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hit ball launcher 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven from this state. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side, so that the ball launching solenoid 654 of the ball feed unit 580 is driven almost simultaneously. By turning on (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting ball cage 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. 72 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as seen from the exploded position. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a sphere circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. Is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 which is attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receives and stores game balls supplied from the island facility side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 The payout device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction, and the game ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit, and the game ball to be paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding bracket for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the winning ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The award ball passage cover 780 in the award ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a when viewed from the back. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape so that the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 are along the front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are arranged on the upper side. In addition, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a reverse L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600 as shown in the figure. And is integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 has a peripheral wall portion 710a that extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and a predetermined width that extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a and is disposed in a substantially identical plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall 710 a is formed to extend backward from a position that is one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The award ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space that can accommodate the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

  The prize ball base 710 includes a tank attachment part 711 for attaching the prize ball tank 720 to the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 710a, and the side of the tank attachment part 711 (right side in the rear view). External terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the rear end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b A prize ball apparatus mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball apparatus 740, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding a game ball paid out from the prize ball apparatus 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball apparatus attachment portion 714, and a rear wall. An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 to the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for letting out a payout motor 744 and the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and the like. And a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Further, although detailed explanation is omitted on the prize ball base 710, an attachment hole, an attachment boss, etc. for attaching the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, etc., or to the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top opened, and is a bottom wall portion that is substantially rectangular in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and has only a right rear portion (open side rear portion) that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape in plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion A discharge port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side in 722 and a plate-like shape from the left side (axial support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720 , A rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left side in plan view of the flange portion 724, a baseball tank formed near the proximal end of the shaft portion 725 and at both front ends of the outer peripheral wall 722. 720 in the prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. The prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the spherical leveling member 727 is supported at one end side by a shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, so that game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. In addition, the collar portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that the game ball can be prevented from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lowered toward the right side in plan view, The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) in plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game ball can be made smooth, and the occurrence of the ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game balls can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth opened upward, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two lines in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so as to be low. The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at a substantially center in the front-rear direction, and a front end lower surface And a plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 74) that protrude downward and are locked to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 from above.

  The tank rail 731 has an end on the right side (open side) when viewed from the front, which is positioned immediately below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720. The game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 After receiving, it rolls to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the winning ball base 710 by locking the locking protrusion 731 c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the winning ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 when viewed from the front. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stop piece that can be moved forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a grounding plate 736 that is disposed in the tank rail 731 and can be brought into contact with the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731 b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 includes an attachment portion 734a to which a ball stop piece 735 is attached at an upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and into which the protruding piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported on the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball presser plate 734. The game balls discharged from the outlet 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. Further, the ball presser plate 734 is for forcibly making the game balls that have not been made one level by the ball leveling member 727, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As shown in the drawing, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by a half pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game balls that have flowed down the tank rail 731 flow down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls aligned in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. To the device 740.

  A narrow groove penetrating vertically is formed at the bottom of the tank rail 731 so that foreign matters such as dust rolling along with the game ball in the tank rail 731 fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not shown in detail, but is grounded to the outside via the grounding metal fitting 782 and the grounding connector of the power supply board 851. In addition, when the game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the attachment portion 734a of the ball retainer plate 734, and the protrusion 735a of the ball stop piece 735 passes through the slit 734a in the tank rail 730. , The two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the protruding piece 735a, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. Yes.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of a game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Is. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is provided on the rear surface side with a supply passage that opens to the upper end and extends to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b that communicates with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and has a space of a predetermined width, and communicates with a lower left side (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b and bends substantially in a letter shape when viewed from the rear. A prize ball passage 741c that opens to the left side surface and a ball extraction passage 741d that communicates with the lower right side (axial support side) bottom of the distribution space 741b and extends downward and open to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 that is shorter in the vertical direction than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742. A plate 743, a discharge motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotation shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and a rotation shaft 744a of the discharge motor 744 are integrated. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and meshes with the second gear 746. A third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and a payout circuit that rotates together with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741. The body 748 and the payout rotating body 748 are fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 749.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the rotation angle, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 that is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 by relaying the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110. I have.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749). ), And a gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply passage ground that can contact a game ball that circulates in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741 The metal fitting 757, the screw 744 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and the back cover 742 are detachably supported with respect to the unit base 741. A detachable button 759.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example has a rear cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are opened at the rear end. Is supposed to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be reduced. It can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially cut out at one side (left side in the rear view) of the lower side of the supply passage 741a from the position bulged rearward and outside the position where the supply passage 741a is cut out. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a front and rear direction penetrating below the prize ball passage 741a. A motor insertion hole 741g that is formed and into which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball break switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the playing ball, the presence or absence of the playing ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the cut ball switch 741e. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball break switch 741e (out of ball state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and it is determined that the ball is out of the player or the hall. It is notified to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotary body 748), and between the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. An earth metal fitting attaching portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth metal fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j for supporting an attaching / detaching button 759 for attaching / detaching and supporting the back cover 742 arranged on the upper portion of the unit base 741. I have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 to the ground metal fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply path grounding metal fitting 757 is in contact with the rear surface of the lower end of the U-shaped earthing metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game balls flowing through the supply path 741 a is removed via the supply path grounding metal fitting 757. Can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape, and its upper end bulges backward. At the top of the back cover 742, a button insertion hole 742a for inserting the attaching / detaching button 759, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and relay board mounting The sensor board attaching part 742c which is arrange | positioned under the part 742b for attaching the sensor board 753, and the through-hole 742d which the paying-off | rotation rotation body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal mounting portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  In addition, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and comes into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, and generates heat generated by the payout motor 744. It is possible to facilitate heat dissipation.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three recesses 748a each having a size that can accommodate one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are stored one by one in the recess 748a and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. The three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotate integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the spaces between the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

  The award ball apparatus 740 of this example has a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 4100, a loan command from the CR unit 6 or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or the ball removal switch 860b is operated. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744a rotates, and at the same time, the second gear 746 engaged with the first gear 745 rotates, and further the second gear 746. Is rotated. The third gear 747 has a payout rotator 748 on the front side and a rotation detection board 749 on the rear side so as to be able to rotate integrally therewith. It is designed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the prize ball device 740, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotator 748 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball removal passage 741d. The game balls paid out to the side of the ball extraction passage 741d are discharged from the lower end of the ball extraction passage 741d into a ball extraction passage 778 of a full tank sorting unit 770 described later, a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and a substrate unit. It can be discharged to the outside outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 at 800.

  Note that the unit base 741 in the prize ball apparatus 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled in the main body frame 3, the award is given from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75, and 79. The full tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710 and guides the game ball paid out to the prize ball path 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. In addition, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game ball can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to be paid out.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the rear surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the latching part 770a latched to the attachment latching part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially upper center in the front-rear direction. Fixing portion 770b. The full tank branching unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at a substantially horizontal center in the upper part of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving a game ball flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710 and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball from directly under the prize ball receiving port 771 to the front side in the branch space 772, and a game ball that has circulated through the normal passage 773 forward and the front end of the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 that opens at the right end of the view, and a full passage 775 that guides the game ball from the position away from the right side of the back view of the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 toward the front side (see FIG. 79). A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper part when viewed from the front and receives the game ball flowing down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball received at the opening 777 to the front side, and a game ball flowing through the ball extraction passage 778 is discharged forward, and a normal ball outlet 774 and And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position behind the full tank outlet 776.

  When the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are respectively the first foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and communicates with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. The ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side of the main body frame base ball outlet passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 so that the game ball released from the ball outlet 779 is released from the main body frame base 600. It is delivered to the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is configured such that a game ball delivered to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 is received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball that has flowed into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and passes from the first ball outlet 544a to the top of the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is full of game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540 is provided. The game balls that can no longer come out from the 544a toward the upper plate 301 stagnate in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 and eventually fill up the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, starts to move laterally in the branch space 772, and moves laterally. A game ball enters into the full tank passage 775 and passes from the full tank exit 776 to the bottom of the dish unit 300 through the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  The full tank branch unit 770 of the present example is formed entirely of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and debris that has entered the full tank branch unit 770, the occurrence of clogging, etc. can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example automatically plays the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 until the game balls are full. Since the upper plate is full like the conventional pachinko machine, the game ball is not supplied to the ball hitting device by operating the ball pulling button on the upper plate. It is possible to avoid interruption of game ball driving, and it is possible to eliminate the annoyance during the game and suppress the interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example branches the path of the game ball to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear part of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game ball staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 is paid out to the upper plate 301, the game ball in the upper plate 301 and the game ball in the normal passage 773 are used as a ball hitting device. A game ball that can be directly struck by 650, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as in the conventional case are stored in the upper plate 301. Can do. Accordingly, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be obtained. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player, and the player can be entertained by the wide game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank ball outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right sides, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray (the first inlet) Even when there is only one ball inlet 542a and second ball inlet 542c), the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be able to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball (full tank branching unit 770) in the main body frame 3. And it can suppress that the cost concerning the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 from which the number of storage dishes differs is increased.

  In addition, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be handled without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 is achieved. Thus, various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, a game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray. Even if it is exchanged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to a lack of game balls for driving, and to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. .

  In addition, as long as the upper plate 301 is not full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible to devote the player to a game ball driving operation and the like, and to suppress the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  Even if the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first sphere The position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage plates. It becomes possible to avoid the depth becoming shallower, the storage tray can be deepened to secure a sufficient amount of game balls, and the game can be played without frequently worrying about the amount of storage for the player. Can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the like increases. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Even if the game ball can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball exit 774 to the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. The amount of substantial game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In addition, in the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray becomes full of game balls and the game balls can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 773 or the full tank exit 776, Since the position where the full tank path 775 branches from the normal path 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are provided not only in the normal path 773 but also in the full tank path 775. Can be stored, and the substantial amount of game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be increased to a limit and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

  In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are wide enough to allow game balls to circulate in a plurality of rows, and the stopping amount (reserved amount) of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 is Since it can be increased, even if the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 from decreasing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that can correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3 can be obtained.

  Moreover, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with transparent resin, the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. In this case, it is possible to easily find the place where the ball is clogged from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem at an early stage and increase the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to an attachment portion 624 formed in the vicinity of the upper left end of the main body frame base 600 in the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 moves to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of game balls.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 slidably held by the shutter base 791, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the up-down direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 ascending through the opening / closing crank 793. And an open / close spring 794 for urging.

  The shutter base 791 of the bulb outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a pair of slide grooves 791a extending in the vertical direction for holding the open / close shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates between the pair of slide grooves 791a in the front-rear direction, and a crank that is disposed in front of the left end portion in front view and supports the open / close crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b in front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view.

  The opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. , And a horizontally elongated drive hole 792b that is disposed at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  Furthermore, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a that is supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a right-side outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a. From the front end of the opening 791b and projecting rearward from the front end of the driving lever 793b and slidably inserted into the driving hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. A driving pin 793c, a contact portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery on the lower side in front view of the shaft portion 793a, and a spherical shape at the tip, and the other end (lower end) of the open / close spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the driving rod 793b. And a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

  In this example, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is configured such that the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are disposed on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792 even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised. The normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 in the full tank branching unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in an up-down direction in an arc shape by rotating the opening / closing crank 793 around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, the driving pin 793c. The open / close shutter 792 is slid in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b in which the is inserted. In the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 contacts the opening / closing operation piece 542 g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 with the contact portion 793 d of the opening / closing crank 793. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal bulb outlet 774 and the full bulb exit 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. Be able to.

  As described above, in response to opening / closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically switches the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball is prevented from spilling from the normal ball exit 774 and the full tank exit 776. Can be done.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the exploded position. FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. 88A is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88B is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. FIG. 89 (A) is a front view of the launch power supply board box, and FIG.

  The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the rear left side of the board unit base 810, and a board unit base. Of the power supply board box 830 attached to the rear face of the right end of the front view 810, the power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the fired power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear face and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear face of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end portion of the front view of 860, and a main-side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 attached to the front face of the board unit base 810. I have.

  As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of the present example is configured to extend in the left-right direction, and the substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped downward and gradually tilted upward as it goes to the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front surface, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above the position of the shielding wall portion 811 that is one step lower in the center in the left-right direction, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the lower side of the shielding wall portion 811 And a board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, which is formed on the front surface in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 when viewed from the front. A plurality of vertically long slits penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the penetrating cylindrical duct portion 814 and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  The substrate unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is along the lower side of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The game ball can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the board unit base 810 can be increased. Further, the board base unit 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. Be able to.

  The board unit base 810 has a board mounting portion 813 for attaching the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In the state where the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are located on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It comes to face. Further, the board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side satisfactorily by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is disposed on the rear side. The box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 are formed. Thus, a housing recess for housing the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is literally provided with a speaker 821 attached facing the front side. The speaker box 820 has a horizontally elongated opening 822 formed on the left side of the speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound behind the speaker 821 and moving forward. The bass reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting a heavy bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. Note that the duct portion 814 in the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well forward. ing.

  The launch power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with the rear opened, and includes a launch power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 accommodates various electronic components attached to the launching power supply board 831, and heat from the electronic parts etc. through slits 830a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

  This launching power supply board box 830 is detached from above into an accommodation recess opened upward by a box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box accommodation part 844 of a power supply board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as possible. Thereby, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the launch power supply board box 830, the launch power supply board box 830 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. (See FIG. 63).

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the launch power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 and driven. This launching power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat radiation holes on its upper and lower surfaces in order to release heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the launching power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

  In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the launch power supply board box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed has a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, the launching power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom surface to the end opening edge. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 and the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 is closed, the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Two spaces, an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, and an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are formed. , Functioning as a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting the housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a.

  The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface communicating the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being discharged to the outside via 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is a heat radiation hole formed in the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d with the outside air, respectively. As a result, the released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current that flows to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 are not provided on the power board 851, but are fired separately from the power board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the launch power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, it becomes easy to handle by reducing the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 and the replacement work of the launch power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, which contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement operation, the launch power supply board box 830 can be exchanged in a state where the launch power supply board 831 remains attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830, that is, the launch power supply board box 830.

  Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the driving firing by the launching solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to launch and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the launching power supply board 831 is not performed. By being able to do easily, the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 very easily, and it is possible to eliminate the interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing at an early stage and resume the game, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of life due to repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time driving firing by the firing solenoid 654 is performed. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. Compared with the launch power supply substrate 831, its lifetime is extremely long. In other words, the fired power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration associated with charging / discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to secular change. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851. Thus, electronic components accompanying long-term aging can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component accompanying a long-life change over time from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, it has a capacity for changing the driving characteristics. Even if an attempt is made to change the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to a different one, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to remove the launch power board 831 and it is difficult to replace the launch power board 831. It is possible to prevent fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the driving strength of the launch power supply substrate 831 that has been tampered with and optimized, and to make fraud difficult. A pachinko machine 1 that can prevent a player who has been frustrated from developing into a fraud such as a fraudulent act can be provided.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 can be exchanged so as to be removable, even if an unauthorized operation is performed on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launch power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 can be replaced immediately and the unauthorized use can be made. It can be eliminated, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game of the player.

  Furthermore, the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch controller 4120 that controls the hitting ball launcher 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced due to a model change or the like, the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, so it matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. Replacing the launching power supply board 831 equipped with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a capable of realizing the driving characteristics makes it possible to change the driving characteristics of the hitting ball launcher 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 to a new game. It can be matched to board 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the driving characteristics of the game ball with the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model of the game board 4 can be fully enjoyed, and the interest of the player is reduced. can do.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply board 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 for island facilities such as a game hall, It is possible to simplify the time and labor required for exchange, and it is possible to exchange in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side. Further, since the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) can be exchanged so as to be removable, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire launch control unit 4120 (dispensing control board 4110) is exchanged. Cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hall side or the like can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 can be used as they are. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launching power supply board 831 deteriorates, as described above, the launching power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side. The problem can be resolved, the game interruption period can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to quickly eliminate irritation and disappointment due to the game interruption. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the launch power board 831 is held in the game board holding port 601 for detachment. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing an illegal act enters the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the illegal tool reaches the launch power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being cheated on the fired power supply substrate 831 and also having a high defense against fraud.

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position where the launch power supply board box 830 is supported is more rearward than the front surface of the main body frame 3. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power board box 830 and exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided in the firing power supply board 831. Since the firing power supply board 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is likely to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, and the malfunction can be solved at an early stage to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives a game ball that is opened upward and discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the lower left side of the left and right center in front view. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game balls received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and the front side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) The front box housing portion 843 that is open forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the launch power board box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power board box holder 840 are formed so as to be recessed forward. A rear box accommodating portion 844 that can be accommodated.

  In the power supply board box holder 840, the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a desired position to the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the substrate unit base 810 passes through the opening 812 of the substrate base unit 810 through the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The game ball that has flowed down and the game ball that has been discharged from the out-ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841, which will be described in detail later, pass through the discharge passage 842 to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be discharged.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box accommodation part 816 and the front box accommodation part 843 accommodate the emission power supply board box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front open, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. As shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

  The power supply board box 850 is a standing wall that protrudes rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 in the power supply board 851 faces the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. A wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece to be locked with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. And the connector terminal 855 is prevented from being detached from the power supply terminal 853.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the power board box 850 has a standing wall 850b slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851. It is formed so as to protrude. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is turned from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be hooked to the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. A terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, when the connector terminal with the wiring cord extended is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board, and then the wiring cord is pulled to the board side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension from the wiring cord. Since it is in a state of being pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the front end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed around the connector terminal 855 so as to turn (turn back) from the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force from pressing the terminal 855 toward the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 is drawn from the standing wall portion 850b. Since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d, a series of operations are continuously performed. This can be performed, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, and then the connector is connected by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is connected to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. The connector terminal 855 can be prevented from being disconnected by the wiring cord 854 and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851 can be prevented. Can be easily removed, and maintenance such as substrate replacement can be easily performed.

  In addition, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where there is no standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a failure.

  Further, a standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the standing wall portion 850b is positioned adjacent to the power supply terminal 853. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a force from acting and to prevent problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, dust and dirt that cause a failure can be prevented from adhering to the power supply board 851 and mounted on the power supply board 851. It is possible to make it difficult to touch or replace electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) and to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  In addition, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 in the power supply board 851 is substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-rear direction), and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or removing the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853. Can be prevented from being energized and causing a failure of energization or the power supply terminal 853 being detached from the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 that is less prone to malfunction can be obtained.

  Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means using the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b so that the wiring cord 854 is Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. Connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization.

  Further, since the projections 850c projecting rearward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the projection 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall 850b. The pachinko machine 1 that reliably prevents the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b is moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 is not easily detached from the standing wall portion 850b. In addition, the above-described effects can be surely achieved, and the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost.

  Also, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and opened rearward, and a thin box-shaped cover that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened forward. 862 and a dispensing control board 4110 (see FIG. 168) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in the rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862, and are provided at one location of the plurality of separation cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 must be cut so that the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In this example, the dispensing control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  The payout control board box 860 is configured such that an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through a cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). The payout control board box 860 has various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like facing rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and includes a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side in the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in the rear view. The board base 871 is provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 is attached to the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a is attached to the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871 A connection terminal plate cover 873 having an opening portion 873b that is attached from the rear side and extends in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening portion 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. CR unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connected terminal plate cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and from the outside, the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal inside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a defect such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator or the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side is displayed. The displayed status display sticker 876 is pasted.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 in the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with the rear end opened. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a and a fixing piece (not shown) for fixing the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and is formed on the inner lower portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  The substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape in which the substrate cover mounting portion 871b is opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is set such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b and a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side in the rear view in the left-right direction, and contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided on the left outer side in back view of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b. The protrusion 871e on the substrate base 871 is in a state in which the amount of backward protrusion is slightly less than that of the outer piece 871c, and as much as possible on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in the figure. It is arrange | positioned so that it may become a position near.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear right side rear surface of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b so as to be vertically separated from each other, and a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875, and a left end in the rear view. And a rectangular tube-shaped locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a for closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner periphery of the opening portion 873b An inner wall portion 873d extending forward (from the substrate base 871) from 873a, and the upper and lower outer wall portions holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

  Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and an approximately vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is opened on the left side when viewed from the back side, and extends outward (rightward) from the right side end when viewed from the back side of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing hole 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the back and can be locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. A pawl piece 873i. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the inner wall part 873d extended ahead also in the upper and lower sides of the inner periphery in the center opening part 873f provided with the protection part 873g is formed.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by an outer wall portion 873c and a rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is configured to restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving forward, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. It has become. Further, the connecting terminal plate cover 873 is inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871 after the fixing piece 873h is inserted, and then the locking claw piece 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front side (rear side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. Yes.

  Further, the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side, and is disposed on the right side surface as viewed from the rear side. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, penetrating in the front-rear direction, and forward from both left and right ends of the through-hole 875b And a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 so that it can be opened and closed by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a on the bearing part 871g of the board base 871. Yes. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length in which a wall 875c on the side close to the shaft portion 875a (side supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and a wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective barrier walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like that.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example has an outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and a board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the assembled state. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece 871c of the connecting terminal plate cover 874 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874 are the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875. Since the barrier wall 875c on the side exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is to be inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and to reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit attached as a CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed between the connection terminal plate 874 and the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, illegal acts can be prevented. It is like that.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through-hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a to the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. A barrier wall 875c having a length in between is provided, and the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier wall 875c. Therefore, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed. It can be made expensive.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 of this example is configured so that the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, an illegal act of inserting a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b that is a two-piece connector. However, the protection part 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b.

  Thus, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are attached from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through a gap between the front and back of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal plate 874 even if the distal end of the unauthorized tool is inserted. It is possible to prevent illegal acts against the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 with certainty.

  When the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the substrate of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are arranged in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the barrier wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. In an analogy, an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility tries to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary). However, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and it is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 has a CR The pachinko machine 1 that can reliably prevent an illegal act on the unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b can be obtained.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the substrate as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and illegal acts can be surely prevented.

  Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be opened and closed, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873 is opened. And a board box cover 875 having a plate-like barrier wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the pivotally supported side of the through-hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, an unauthorized tool is connected to the connection terminal by the barrier 875c. Reaching to the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side can be prevented, and illegal acts can be prevented. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the connection box board cover 873 after opening the board box cover 875, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 is formed. Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent a gap from being formed, and it is possible to make it difficult to perform fraud and to have high deterrence.

  Furthermore, even if an unauthorized act of inserting the needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attempted, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective part 873g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 The needle-like electrode cannot be inserted from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed on the terminals of the connected wiring cord. Can be.

  In addition, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with a substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side from the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even when a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform an illegal act, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves rearward together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Whether an unauthorized tool is inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 accommodated therein, or the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 itself is not replaced with an unauthorized one. Or, it is possible to easily check whether electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 have been replaced with unauthorized ones. , It can make it easier to detect fraud, and it also makes it easier to find fraud. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 5 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, When the main body frame 5 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 are directed to the worker side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 include a peripheral control unit 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, etc. 5 for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connection to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 30).

  Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining loan display portion 363, and a rotational position detection sensor of the handle device 500 in the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the connection of the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side is relayed. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to each decoration unit 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each decoration board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This relay relays the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b, and 432c and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90A is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 90B is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 has a plate-like main body portion 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body portion 902, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of juxtaposed vertical rows, projecting downward and pivotally supported by the back cover pivotal support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper left and lower sides of the main body 902 when viewed from the front. An engagement piece 908 that engages with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780 respectively, and the back cover 900 is placed in the vicinity of the lower engagement piece 908. 3 is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable / closable manner.

  The fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the left in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body 902 of the back cover 900, as shown in FIGS. 921, a vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a strip 923a on one end side and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and inserted into the slot 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 on the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 Includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. Note that the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked in a loosely fitted state with respect to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can be slid in the left-right direction and is not dropped from the long hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, the fastening mechanism 920 has a fastening member 924 that protrudes forward through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover shaft supporting portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engagement pieces 908 with the main body frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the engagement pieces 908 can be closed. Note that when the back cover 900 is in a closed state, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male thread portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked to the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. A state of being positioned on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924 from this state, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screwed). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. It should be noted that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example allows the fastening member 924 to be fastened even when the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is inclined with respect to the main body portion 902 when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily moved to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by a single fastening mechanism 920, so that it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating one fastening member 924. The maintenance work can be improved by simplifying the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900.

  The back cover 900 includes a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 when viewed from the front, and a confirmation opening that passes through the connection notch 910 in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 912 and a notch portion 914 for confirmation cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body portion 902 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, through the connection cutout portion 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4, the test terminal 4100f, and the like. Comes to the rear. Further, the back cover 900 has a confirmation opening portion 912 through which a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the notch part 914. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100.

  Further, the back cover 900 has a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated through the main body 902 and the side portion 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is generated in the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged outside the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 are provided at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and extend long in the up-down direction at a position slightly to the left in front view from the center. These through holes 918 are in a state where the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is accommodated and held in the main body frame 3, and the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. It is located on the rear side of the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the apparatus so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be exhausted satisfactorily. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Accordingly, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is fixed to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 and maintenance of the rear side of the game board 4 is performed. Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 remains the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 from being attached to the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from dropping from the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released in a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. Further, it can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900. The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is reliably in a correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be securely fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, since the holding member 925 that holds the fastening member 924 in a freely movable manner with respect to the guide member 923 in cooperation with the head of the fastening member 924 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming out of the elongated hole 923 b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap and the long hole 923b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating a holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When the fastening hole 780b is fastened, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. Thus, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. Can improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion and is screw-coupled to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is fastened only by pulling compared with engagement by a simple claw. Can not be released and the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 relative to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is easily positioned at a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male screw portion 924 is easily moved straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  In addition, in the state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900, the locking port Since it is elastically locked to 922, the shaft extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 on the distal end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably mounted It can be moved so as to rotate around the center, and the locking piece 923 a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the distal end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be easily performed.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 to be engaged, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is described. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using only one fastening part using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. Can increase the sex. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closed range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 (the rear side of the game board 4) can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

  Further, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). Therefore, by simply rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction and closing the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily aligned, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 can be opened even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like. It is possible to keep the cover 900 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side security board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 that is extruded in a shallow U shape in plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed to the top and bottom near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. A positioning member 956 that is fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  A main body 952 of the side security plate 950 includes a side plate piece 952a having a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600 and extending in the vertical direction and having a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a right side when viewed from the front end of the side plate piece 952a. A front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c that is disposed so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and has a smaller protruding amount than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the right direction of view (see FIG. 106). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 is interposed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. A left side portion in front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 106).

  The side security plate 950 of this example is configured such that the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. When the side security plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is connected to the shaft side of the shaft side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped projecting piece 166 and to prevent the insertion of a tool for performing an illegal act between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side when viewed from the front. (See FIG. 106). The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, and has a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a middle piece 952c arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, so that the overall strength of the main body frame 3 can be increased to favorably support the game board 4, the door frame 5, and the like. It has become.

  Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed with the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is interposed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side face plate 950. The rear side piece of the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is inserted into the pivot-side U-shape. Therefore, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protrusion 166 on the pivotal side of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoted U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3 and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. And can be used to perform illegal acts such as opening the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. The body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance in the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the security side plate 950 on the side that supports the door frame 5 (the shaft support side) is formed of metal. Compared with the case where the entire body frame 3 is made of metal, the cost associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one location between the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041, the open side is illegal such as a bar. Even if the tool is scooped by an easy tool, it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from being spread well, and to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

  Further, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is extended rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the side piece 952a is increased. Since the bending rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the security side plate 950 as a whole can be further increased, and it is possible to prevent the crime prevention side plate 950 from being forcibly bent and being cheated. .

  Further, since the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by a metal extrusion mold material, the security side plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily obtained. It can be formed, and even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and defects such as a decrease in strength that occur during processing are compared with the case where the metal plate is bent. The security side plate 950 can be reduced as much as possible and has high durability and high strength.

[1-3I. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. 93A is a left side view of the locking device in the main body frame, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the locking device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 94A is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 94B is a glass door slide rod and a body frame slide rod provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows these, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device as seen after disassembling, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the glass door sliding rod and the main body frame sliding rod in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the tamper-proof member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the front side right side (open side) side of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600 and a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600 A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally slid. Fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and includes a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050. Are slidably arranged. Note that the U-shaped base 1001 has an extremely thin lateral width as compared to a conventional locking device integrated into a base having an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased. 1100 wide game board 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is attached in a state in which the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600. The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are formed on the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate vertically on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002, a screw fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper part and middle of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw fixing part 1003 protrudes forward from the open side (front side) upper and middle portions of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the projections 1003 are provided, and the lower end portions of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The locking protrusion 1004 is provided.

  Screw fixing portions 1003 and locking protrusions 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking protrusions 1004 are attached to the door hook holes 620 of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 1003 is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attaching portion 625 is also fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower portion of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three locations on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are connected to the upper and lower door hook holes 620 and the locking locking holes. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame base 600 with a very simple structure. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing of the front side and the rear side of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure projects from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 to the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared to the case where the side surface 1001b is dense.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating left and right in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted inside the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the body frame sliding rod 1050 stored. Can be slidably mounted in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portions of long holes 1055 and 1061 for rivets formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 respectively for the body frame sliding rod 1050. The door frame sliding rod 1040 can be moved upward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 protrudes from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the open-side main body frame base 600 and protrudes laterally. Then, a lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described later in detail, but the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is advanced and retracted. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. Projecting from the front end to the side, the lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two locations on the top and bottom. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the screw and a screw stopper 1003 drilled to mount the lower part of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 that forms a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034; It has.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for fixing to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. At the same time, an engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

  The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted through a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and attachment holes 1013 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

  The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base body 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key, but fraudulently for the main body frame with a piano wire, a wire, etc. It is for preventing lowering. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034 as shown in FIG. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be swingable about the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is positioned together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. A lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006 are attached.

  In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 opens vertically in the plate-like surface at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the projection piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The raised engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely on the outer front side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging protruding piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97 (B).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from an obliquely lower lower side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. A regulation protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that pass through the front side of the regulation protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded and engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 of the main body frame slide rod 1050 when the main body frame slide rod 1050 is locked. Thus, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the restricting protruding piece 1031 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 abuts on the second fraud preventing member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud preventing member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). The movement can be restricted.

  Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 in a pivotable manner by a connecting pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be relatively rotatable by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base body 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutting portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member. The door sliding rod 1040 includes door frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 in a state where the door sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the cover. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the figure, and thereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  Also, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed in the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces, and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, below the uppermost rivet slot 1042, and for the door frame. A guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided at the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040. In the rivet slot 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040, a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame sliding rod. It is formed in a vertically long shape so as not to interfere with the upward movement of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted such that the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, the sliding movement between the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding is performed by the spring 1048. The collar 1040 is biased downward, and the main body frame sliding collar 1050 is biased mutually upward. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is stamped from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be prevented from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like that.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is provided at the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. This constitutes a space in which the part can move. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the rising engagement hole 1045 and rotated, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016. It is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is notched larger in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 at the lower rear of the vertical side. This escape notch 1049 is obstructed by the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is securely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding part is notched so as not to become.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, It has. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not formed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a long rivet hole 1055 penetrating in a horizontal direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 that passes through the rivet long hole 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward.

  Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 has penetrated the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055 so that the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The upper hook member 1051 has a protruding piece moving hole 1056 into which the guide protruding piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. The mutual movement with 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connection hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted with the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053 bent. Further, the abutting portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and in the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051. There is no backlash and it can slide smoothly.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is for the rivet penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion. A long hole 1061, a downward engagement hole 1062 arranged below the long hole 1061 for rivets, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a lower part of the free hole 1063 A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 drilled in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. A joint notch 1066 and a contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward. The rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1061 has a rivet. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotates, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. It is for engaging. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 has a second engagement protrusion 1018 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It is possible to form a space in which the distal end portion of the can move. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding plate are inserted. The mutual movement with the palpit 1050 can be guided.

  The lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be smoothly slid without play.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. To assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by a connecting wire rod 1053, and the guide projection of the door frame sliding rod 1040 in that state is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame slide are inserted. After inserting the pallet 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, 1042. When the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 and attach the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are coupled by the coupling pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is coupled to the pin hole. It is necessary to insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after it is fixed at 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the distal end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While being inserted, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is provided. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that contacts the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the front locking structure contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to be loose.

  Next, the operation of the locking device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. Further, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to depress the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and is connected thereto. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24, 25 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since it contacts the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again, thereby sliding the main body frame. The hook 1050 is raised and returned to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook state 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined part of the hook part 1041 for the door frame is hooked to the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised upward, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The pail 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the inside. The act cannot be performed.

  Thus, the locking device 1000 of the door frame 3 of this embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. The door frame 5 can be unlocked with respect to the main body frame 3 by rotating. Further, the locking device 1000 of this example performs an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and lowering it without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 are in contact. It has become a state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is intrusion prevention notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. As a result, even if the piano frame or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is properly unlocked by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and also moves so as to be retracted from the tamper-proof notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. Can be done.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the internal The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the housing are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, and are completely covered. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 Since the intruder is prevented from entering the closed space, the structure is such that it is not possible to easily perform the illegal act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame in the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 whose width is extremely thin as compared with the conventional lock device concentrated on the L-shaped base. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided and the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 is attached to the U-shaped base 1001 at a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be attached firmly.

  Moreover, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is impossible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. The structure is such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. With this structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the locking device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 with screws. Although the structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole penetrated through the piece 1008 and the cylinder lock penetration hole 611 up and down. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 at the rear of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly on the back surface of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (tablet substrate) and the first side wall 540. It is good also as a structure which accommodates 1050, and there can exist an effect similar to the locking device 1000 mentioned above.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710 The prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is aligned with the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 to align the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base. A transparent tank rail unit 730 mounted on the rear side, and a game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 is discharged to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, and the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base 710 A part of the award ball device 740 that is attached to the rear side and a side portion 904 that extends to the rear end of the main body frame base 600 and the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 and the award ball device 740 are rear. And a transparent back cover 900 arranged substantially in the same plane as that of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. A pachinko machine that can visually check the rear side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. 1 can be used.

  Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When the game board 4 is removed from the front side to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, remove them. It can be easily detected from the image, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of any malfunction due to the residue.

  Further, as described above, since the rear surface and rear side surface of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, unauthorized devices and tools for performing illegal acts are attached to the rear side and side surfaces of the game board 4. Even if it is done, it can be easily discovered, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed, and it is also possible to easily find unauthorized devices attached to the game board 4 from the outside, The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent behavior can be provided, which can be used to prevent unauthorized installation of devices.

  Also, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as dust and dust from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position about twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described effects are surely achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to obtain a flat shape. Further, it is possible to facilitate the attaching operation of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made into a substantially flat surface, and it can be caught or brought into contact with other members in the island facility to be installed by eliminating protrusions on the rear side. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, it is possible to use a buffer material with a simple shape and to increase the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency). The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

  In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through-holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 can be further easily seen, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 and the like of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and the control of the game is unstable due to the heat, and the occurrence of problems due to deformation of members such as synthetic resin is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 are sized so that the game ball cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, it passes through the slit 916 or the like. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring due to the game ball entering.

[1-4. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 102 (A) is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state attached to the pachinko machine, and FIG. 102 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the game panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like, as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of a board. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 according to the present embodiment has a front configuration in which an outer periphery of the game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven by a player operating the handle device 500 is substantially rectangular in shape. A member 1110, a plate-like game panel 1150 that is arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defines the rear end of the game area 1100, a board holder 1160 that is arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a board holder 1160 A main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that controls the game content that is attached to the rear surface of the game ball 1100 and controls the game content that is performed by driving the game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined signal based on a control signal from the main control board 4100 A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying the game status and attached to a predetermined position of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible to the player. To have. The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. It is further provided (see FIGS. 108 to 114).

  The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component member 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. A detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170. Here, a basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and a detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component member 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1110 has an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction in the front view. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view so as to smoothly continue from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111 , The inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, which can be contacted with the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111. Is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 at the boundary of the outer area, and is supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to be rotatable, and closes between the outer rail 1111. In this way, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where the outer rail 1111 is opened by rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. And a backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 as shown in FIG. It is positioned on the extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and the game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the hit ball launcher 650 is Then, it jumps over the space and is driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is used. The player can enter the game area 1100 by rotating it toward the open position against the urging force.

  In addition, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the game ball coming into contact with the stop 1114, and the game ball rolls continuously from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. Note that even if a game ball that has entered (or has been driven into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, when the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is not received in a starting port 2101, 2102, a winning port 2103, 2104, 2201, etc., which will be described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, it is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and discharged from the out port 1151 downward to the rear side of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball launched from the hitting ball launcher 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 A foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is opened from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. It falls and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  Note that the outer rail 1111 in the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball is enhanced, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the stopper 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin on the surface, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. The game ball can be repelled inward.

  Further, the front component member 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention projection 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially center in the vertical direction along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-port guide surface 1115. And a groove-shaped rail crime prevention groove 1118 that is recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security protrusion 1117 in the front structural member 1110 overlaps with the rear end protrusion piece 183 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the unauthorized tool can reach the game area 1100. Can not be.

  Further, when the front structural member 1110 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the post-crime protruding piece 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. The post-crime protruding piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 1100). Even in the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the post-crime projection piece 182, unauthorized equipment such as a piano wire that has entered from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

  Further, the front component member 1110 is spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left end in the front view and is recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end, and is spaced in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side of the front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward, and has an arc shape on the upper side and is recessed from the front side. In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage cutout portion 1122 that is cut out in a rectangular shape extending long in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning concave portion 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted to a positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the gaming board 4 inserted into the gaming board holding port 601 is viewed from the front side. However, it is possible to restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By being locked by the locking portion 608, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a front view of the game board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixture 690. It is like that. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is connected to the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notches 1122 and 1152 for the ball passage.

  Further, the front component member 1110 has a horizontally long through-hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end of the front end at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the through-hole 1123 to the left side of the front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate sticking portion 1125 disposed on the left side of the through hole 1123 as viewed from the front is attached. Although the detailed illustration of the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 is omitted, when the game board is attached to the conventional main body frame, a predetermined fastening band is attached to the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame. By wrapping and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4 and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

  Further, in the front component member 1110, a display unit 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the outer right side of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. The front component member 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fitted into an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 to fix the inner rail 1112 at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This gaming panel 1150 is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side in front view of the lower end in front view and the out-port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-out guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. , And is opened downward and has a spherical passage cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110, and a rearward projecting portion of the function display unit 1180 that penetrates the lower right corner when viewed from the front. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

  Further, in the gaming panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 and the positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed near the lower left and right ends. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and whose lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 101). And a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 of this example can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110, and although not shown, A plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a corresponding range, and a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the gaming panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is positioned at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100 in the front component member 1110 when assembled to the gaming board 4. The game ball guided rearward by the out port guide surface 1115 thus made enters the out port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front. The substrate holder 1160 has an out sphere discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is an out sphere. A game ball that is formed so as to become lower toward the discharge unit 1161, is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and is supplied (discharged) to the bottom upper surface of the substrate holder 1160. The ball is discharged from the out ball discharge unit 1161 downward. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the board pass through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800 and are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 that protrude forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520 and then fitted to the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. In a state of being fitted to the boss 1126, a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, so that the substrate holder 1160 is attached to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the substrate holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 in which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side to the left end portion of the rear surface of the rear surface in the rear surface, and a fixing portion. And a locking portion 1164 that is disposed so as to face 1163 and that can lock the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from the rear. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of the board holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 includes a thin horizontal box-shaped board base 1171 with the rear side opened, and a thin horizontal box shape with the front side opened to cover the rear surface of the board base 1171 and is fitted into the board base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be combined, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components and terminals mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1171 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left side end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the back and is fitted to the fixing part 1163 of the board holder 1160 and from the right side of the board cover 1172 when viewed from the right side. And an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the right end of the back view two times up and down across the elastic fixing piece 1175 and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) pasted between the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the hermetic seal A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation cutting part 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and caulking is fixed in any one of the four sealing parts 1176. Has been. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulking-fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the main control board box 1170 remains open and closed. It has become. Thus, it can be clearly determined from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

  In this example, four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided, so that the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. In addition, the main control board box 1170 of this example has a hermetic seal applied across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. When the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It is necessary to peel off or peel off, and even in this hermetic seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such illegal acts from being performed.

  The main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. The main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170 by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing the rear surface of the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-described sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are cleverly crafted, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than visually, and the pachinko machine 1 having high crime prevention performance is obtained. Be able to.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. The display unit 1181 is disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. A rear projecting portion 1182 projecting rearward from the rear surface.

  In the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 102 (A), the game state that changes depending on the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end of the front view. A game status indicator 1183 consisting of a single LED to display the number of suspensions related to the acceptance of a game ball to the first start port 2101 consisting of two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 1st special symbol memory display 1184 for the first special symbol memory 1184 and the first special symbol result that is placed on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and drawn by receiving a game ball to the first start port 2101 The first special symbol display 1185 made up of one 7-segment LED for display as the first special symbol display 1185 and the second start opening 210 A second special symbol display 1186 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls as a second special symbol, and the right side of the second special symbol display 1186 And a second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reserves related to the acceptance of game balls to the second start port 2102.

  In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of reservations related to the passage of the gate unit 2107 by the game balls that are arranged in a circular arc substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186. A normal symbol memory display 1188 made up of four LEDs for display, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball passing through the gate portion 2107 arranged below the normal symbol memory display is displayed as a normal symbol. The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of a single LED and the normal symbol memory display 1188 are arranged side by side on the diagonal upper right side to detect illegal games (for example, illegal detection using a magnet or the like by the magnetic detection sensor 3523). And a fraud detection indicator 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying for notification to the outside when a game is detected).

  The game status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange. Various game states (for example, a probability variation state, a time shortening state, a probability variation short state, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc.) can be displayed by the combination.

  Also, the first special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the first start port 2101 when the first special symbol display 1185 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the first special symbols on which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory indicator 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b made of predetermined LEDs, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b when the number of holdings is two. When the number of holdings is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a flashes and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the second start port 2102 when the second special symbol display 1186 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the second special symbol that is suspended (stored) is displayed (stored). The second special symbol memory indicator 1187 includes a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b made of predetermined LEDs, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory display lamps 1187a, When the number of holdings is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. Both are now flashing. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are selected by the first special lottery that is drawn by receiving the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed. The 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first 7-segment LED light emission pattern (special symbol) is stopped. The player can recognize the special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  Further, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and a combination of the emitted emission color and lighting / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2107. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, like the special symbol.

  In addition, the normal symbol memory display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 holds the start of the variable display when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2107 when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in the normal symbol display 1189. The number of stored ordinary symbols (stored) is displayed. The normal symbol storage indicator 1188 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from below, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holds. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In this example, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  Further, the fraud detection indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes fraud detection display lamps 1190a and 1190b made up of predetermined LEDs, and displays that an illegal game has been detected by lighting each lamp simultaneously. Be able to.

  The function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1 as shown in FIG. It has become. In addition, the game status indicator 1183, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the normal symbol memory of the function display unit 1180. The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the fraud detection display 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 168). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, the function display unit 1180 has functions as compared with the case in which the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that is embodied by the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. The store clerk in the hall can recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without being confused. To have.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 configured by 7 segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are each constituted by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory indicator 1188 is constituted by two LEDs.

  The function display unit 1180 can achieve the same effects as described above, and the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are configured by eight LED groups. As compared with the case where the segment LED is used, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the content displayed on the function display unit 1180 is difficult to understand, it is possible to suppress the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming concerned about the display during the game, and it is possible to suppress difficulty in concentrating on the game. The game can be more enjoyed by devoting itself to movable effects and effects images.

[1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a gaming panel 1200 having a form different from the gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configuration as described above, and a detailed description thereof is omitted here. The gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the gaming panel 1150 described above, and has a plate shape that can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 that is partitioned by the front component member 1110 from the outer shape of the front component member 1110. The panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-like panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

  The gaming panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, glass, metal, etc. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The thickness of the panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary that can be sufficiently held even if a failure nail (not shown) is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. The thickness is 8 to 10 mm. In this example, panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed of round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, a long hole 1212 disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction, It has. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100 in the same manner as the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214.

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel board 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is substantially the same thickness as the gaming panel 1150 made of the above-described wood board (in this example, about 20 mm) of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 includes a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. It mainly includes a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

  The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface of a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engagement claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engagement step portion 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward the end and is elastically engaged with the engaging step 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is positioned between the front surface of the holding step 1221. It is configured such that a predetermined amount is extended toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 in a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the attachment boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave the lower center and the outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. The mounting support portion 1227 causes the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (depth is about 2.5 mm in this example) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 3001b (see FIG. 164, etc.) of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 1227. It is desirable to be between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3001a from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding port 601.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in a predetermined arrangement in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw. ing. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. This positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (illustrated) protruding forward from a fixing portion 3001a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3001 in the back box 3001. Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, the inner diameter of the hole is mixed with a large diameter and a small diameter so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size or weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 1230 that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the thinned portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these thinning portions 1230 are not formed in the predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 disposed on the front surface becomes a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball hitting device 650 However, it is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a thinned portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and supports the panel holder 1220 and maintains the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-like rib is formed.

  The panel holder 1220 is formed with a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front. The ball passage cutout portion 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 and the rear protrusion portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front lower right corner portion when viewed from the front are inserted. An insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out sphere discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) which is depressed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and whose lower end side is opened downward. A notch portion 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in a front view. The panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The out-ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed in the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600) when the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. The game board 4 is moved relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction when the out-ball discharge groove 1235 is fitted with the positioning protrusion 607. Being regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224, the engagement piece 1225, and the engagement step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel holder 1220 can hold the panel board 1210, and the front side of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. Even if the installation device is not modified, it is possible to set the panel plate 1210 to the conventional obstacle nail planting device with the panel holder 1220 held, and to suppress the cost for planting the failure nail. Can be done.

  In addition, although not shown in the drawing, the gaming panel 1200 of this example has a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. At the same time, a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thereby, since the thin panel plate 1210 supports only the front unit, it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel board 1210 is a transparent board, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the gaming panel 1200 as a whole. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the board 1210 can be realized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  In addition, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position such as an obstacle nail or a winning opening changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 4 that can be used for various models can be obtained by replacing only the panel plate 1210.

  Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the rear unit 3000 that are mounted and fixed on the rear side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. Even if the positions are different, the panel holder 1220 can be made a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It has become.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Next, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 107 is a perspective view seen from the rear side in a state where the game board is accommodated.

  First, as shown in FIG. 106, the crime prevention structure on the pivot support side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a side surface on the pivot support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of the synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. The metal crime prevention side plate 950 attached to the door frame 5 and the metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of the synthetic resin in the door frame 5 are configured.

  As described above, the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extrusion mold material made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component member 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 are combined. This side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction, extends in the front-rear direction, and forms a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end extending from the front end of the side piece 952a to the inner side (open side) in a substantially right angle direction. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending along the front end piece 952b from the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b, and extending inward from the rear end of the side piece 952a in a substantially perpendicular direction. And a rear end piece 952d. Thus, the front end of the security side plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

  Further, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) has the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. The strength of the main body frame 3 is increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported.

  On the other hand, the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed in a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, or the like, as described above. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft support side is provided with a shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened outward (the shaft support side). In the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side face plate 950 are provided. A rear piece of a pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952a is pivotally supported. The side U-shaped projecting piece 166 is sandwiched. Accordingly, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. Since the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 can be prevented from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3, the closed door frame 5 can be prevented from being opened, and the main body frame can be prevented. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to 3.

  In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. Since the strength and rigidity of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance can be improved.

  Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the security side plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is assumed. Even if the player is destroyed, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire cannot be entered from the rear end of the side piece 952a into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150). Can be surely prevented. In addition, as shown in FIG. 106, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the security side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It can be fully countered against the destruction of the. In general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed within the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it is almost impossible to allow an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further improved.

  Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 107, a prize ball base 710, a tank rail 731 and a prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 for housing the game board 4 are provided. Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the game board 4 is connected to the rear side or the side of the game board 4 accommodated in the main body frame 3. Even if it is not removed from the main body frame 3 or the back cover 900 is not opened, it can be viewed from the rear side of the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily discovered and illegal acts can be prevented. Further, since it is possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach an unauthorized device, and it is possible to increase deterrence against unauthorized acts. ing.

  In addition, since the rear side and the side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. When the game board 4 is attached to or detached from the board 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, remove them. Therefore, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring, and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the diagonally left front, FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the diagonally right front, and FIG. FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from the left rear, FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main component and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a frame-shaped front component member 1110 that defines and forms the outer periphery of a game area 1100 into which game balls are to be driven. A gaming panel 1200 arranged to close the gaming area 1100 on the rear side of the front component member 1110, and an upper side of the out port 1151 at a substantially horizontal center in the gaming area 1100 on the front surface of the gaming panel 1200. Arranged at a substantially central portion of the gaming area 1100, a supported winning apparatus unit 2100, a side decoration unit 2300 disposed along the outer periphery of the gaming area 1100 on the left side of the winning apparatus unit 2100 and supported on the front surface of the gaming panel 1200. A frame-shaped center accessory 2400 supported by the gaming panel 1200 and the gaming panel 1200 A liquid crystal display device 1900 as an effect display means that is attached to the back unit 3000 and the player panel through the frame of the game panel 1200 and the center accessory 2400 so as to be visible from the player side and can display a predetermined effect image and notification information. And mainly. Here, the game panel 1200 corresponds to the game board of the present invention, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponds to the effect display means of the present invention. Hereinafter, the configuration of each device mounted on the game panel 1200 will be described in detail.

[2-1. Winning equipment unit]
First, the winning device unit 2100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 127. FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming panel and the members attached thereto, as seen from an oblique front, FIG. 115 is a front view of the winning device unit, and FIG. 116 is an oblique view of the winning device unit. FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the winning device unit as viewed obliquely from behind, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the winning device unit as viewed from obliquely before, FIG. FIG. 120 is a front view of the base member in the winning device unit, FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the mechanism portion in the winning device unit as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 121 is the main configuration of the mechanism portion of the winning device unit. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of each member as seen from an oblique front, FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the second start-up opening / closing drive mechanism as seen from an oblique front, and FIG. Opening and closing drive for opening and closing prize winning device FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the opening / closing drive mechanism as viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 124 is a cross-sectional perspective view of the opening / closing drive mechanism as viewed from the diagonally front direction. FIG. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the second opening / closing prize winning device disassembled and viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 127 is a perspective view of the lower portion of the second opening / closing prize winning device from an oblique front. It is a perspective view.

  As shown in FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, the winning device unit 2100 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1200 e formed at the lower portion in the center in the left-right direction of the gaming panel 1200, and then the gaming panel 1200. It is fixed on the front. This winning device unit 2100 includes a plurality of receiving ports (winning ports) through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 1100 can be received. As the plurality of receiving ports, a first start port 2101 disposed substantially in the center in the left-right direction, a second start port 2102 disposed on the right side of the first start port 2101, and a position directly below the first start port 2101 The first opening / closing prize winning device 2103, the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 arranged immediately below the second starting port 2102, and the left side of the first starting port 2101 and the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 are arranged side by side in a stepped manner. There are three general winning ports 2105, a general winning port 2106 disposed right above the second start port 2102, and a gate portion 2107 disposed on the right side of the general winning port 2106.

  As shown in FIGS. 114 to 117, the winning device unit 2100 includes a base member 2110 fixed to the front surface of the gaming panel 1200. A first open / close winning device 2103, a second open / close winning device 2104, general winning ports 2105 and 2106, and a gate portion 2107 are provided. As shown in FIG. 118, a light-transmissive main lens portion 2112 and a right lens portion 2113 are disposed on the rear side of the base member 2110, and a cover member 2114 is disposed on the rear side of the main lens portion 2112. It is installed.

  As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the base member 2110 has a thin plate-like plate-like portion 2111 disposed along the front surface of the game panel 1200. The plate-like portion 2111 includes a first start port 2101, The general winning ports 2105 and 2106 and the gate portion 2107 are integrally formed. The first starting port 2101 and the general winning ports 2105 and 2106 have a box-like shape that protrudes to the front game area 1100 (see FIG. 109) and has an open upper surface, and can always accept game balls. It has become. The first start port 2101 and the general winning ports 2105 and 2106 have rear end portions extending beyond the plate-like portion 2111 to guide the winning game balls. The gate portion 2107 has a gate-like shape through which a game ball can always pass, and an arc-shaped guide portion 2110h that guides the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2107 downward and diagonally to the left is provided at the lower right side of the gate portion 2107. It is molded integrally with the portion 2107.

  The base member 2110 has a plurality of openings that penetrate the plate-like portion 2111 in the front-rear direction. Specifically, a first opening 2110a that is positioned below the general winning opening 2106 and through which a game ball that has won the second starting opening 2102 passes, and a first opening / closing winning apparatus 2103 that is positioned below the first starting opening 2101. A second opening 2110b through which a game ball that has won a prize passes, and a horizontally-long rectangular third opening that is located below the first opening 2110a and communicates with a large winning opening 2153 (described later) of the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 2110c, and a fourth opening 2110e through which the obstacle nail K (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 115) located between the gate 2107 and the third opening 2110c and planted in the game panel 1200 is inserted. Is formed. The plate-like portion 2111 has a reflection surface formed on the entire surface by plating, but the light irradiated through the main lens portion 2112 and the cover member 2114 disposed on the rear side of the base member 2110. Has a plurality of windows so as to be projected to the player side. Specifically, a plurality of polygonal large window portions 2110f having a relatively large opening area and a plurality of circular small window portions 2110g having an opening area smaller than that of the large window portion 2110f are formed.

  Further, in the plate-like portion 2111, a notch 2110d is formed between a portion where the first start port 2101 and the second opening 2110b are formed and a portion where the first opening 2110a and the third opening 2110c are formed. The obstacle nail K (see FIG. 115) implanted in the game panel 1200 is inserted through the notch 2110d. In addition, on the front surface of the plate-like portion 2111 between the second opening portion 2110b and the third opening portion 2110c, a dividing line 2011i made of a vertical groove is provided so as to divide the gaming area 1100 into the left and right.

  As shown in FIG. 118, a front decoration 2121 with a seal member 2120 attached is attached to the front surface of the first start port 2101, and a seal member 2170 is attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2105. A front decoration 2171 is attached, and a seal member 2170 is attached to the front face of the general winning opening 2106. In addition, the gate unit 2107 is provided with a gate sensor 2176 that detects a passing game ball.

  The second start port 2102 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 115, the second start port 2102 is disposed below the general winning port 2106, and a game ball can enter through the first opening 2110a (see FIG. 119) of the base member 2110. It has become. The second starting port 2102 includes a pair of blades 2125 that can be expanded with the general winning port 2106. In a state where the pair of blades 2125 rise substantially vertically (the state shown in FIG. 115), The game ball cannot be received into the second starting port 2102 by the winning opening 2106 and the pair of blades 2125, whereas the second blade 2125 is expanded in the left-right direction by the opening / closing drive mechanism 2126 described later. A game ball can be received at the start port 2102. That is, the second starting port 2102 is a variable winning port by the pair of blades 2125. Note that the pair of blades 2125 are opened and closed based on detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate sensor 2176 (see FIG. 118). In addition, as shown in FIG. 118, the pair of blades 2125 are arranged on the left and right sides of the first opening 2110a (see FIG. 119) formed in the plate-like portion 2111, and the front entrance is closed. The lower side is covered with 2124, and the game ball won in the second start port 2102 is guided by the ball entrance 2124 and sent to the first opening 2110a. A through-hole 2125a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the lower end portion of the blade 2125, and a rotating shaft portion 2124a provided in the ball-entry portion 2124 is connected to the plate-like portion 2111 through the through-hole 2125a. Is supported so as to be rotatable about the rotating shaft 2124a.

  The opening / closing drive mechanism 2126 of the blade 2125 is disposed on the rear side of the base member 2110. As shown in FIGS. 121 and 122, the box-shaped holder 2127 whose front is opened, and the accommodating portion 2127a of the holder 2127. And a link member 2130 that is connected to the plunger 2129 of the solenoid 2128 and converts the movement of the plunger 2129 in the front-rear direction into the rotation (opening and closing) movement of the pair of blades 2125. . The link member 2130 protrudes inward from the left and right sides of the holder 2127 and is inserted into bearing holes 2127b provided on the left and right sides of the holder 2127 from the inside. A pair of locking portions 2130b to be locked to the plunger 2129, and formed on both the left and right sides, arcuate, and engageable with an eccentric claw 2125b protruding rearward from the rear surface of the blade 2125 (see FIG. 118) A pair of engaging portions 2130c. That is, when the plunger 2129 is retracted by energizing the solenoid 2128, the link member 2130 is rotated so that the engaging portion 2130c is lifted around the rotation shaft portion 2130a, so that the pair of blades 2125 are in a vertical state (game balls cannot be received) The state is changed from a state in which the game ball is expanded (a state in which a game ball can be received).

  Next, the first open / close winning device 2103 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 115, the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 is disposed below the first start port 2101 and allows a game ball to enter through the second opening 2110b (see FIG. 119) of the base member 2110. It is possible. As shown in FIG. 118, the first open / close winning device 2103 has a ball-entry portion 2135 that protrudes from the plate-like portion 2111 of the base member 2110 to the front game area 1100 and through which a game ball can pass, and a rear side of the base member 2110. An opening / closing drive mechanism 2136 that allows a game ball that is arranged and passed through the ball-entry portion 2135 to be received in the second opening 2110b, and a winning sensor 2137 that detects the received game ball (see FIG. 123). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the entrance part 2135 is formed in a gate shape through which a game ball can pass in the up and down direction, and a game ball that rolls in the game area 1100 is placed on the upper surface on both the left and right sides. A pair of guide portions 2135a for guiding into 2135 is formed.

  As shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, the opening / closing drive mechanism 2136 includes a front base member 2139 and a rear base member 2140, a solenoid 2141 disposed in the rear base member 2140, a tongue-shaped protrusion / contraction piece 2142, and a link And a member 2144. The front base member 2139 has a support hole 2139a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and supports the tongue-shaped protruding and retracting piece 2142 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and the front end of the support hole 2139a is the second opening 2110b (FIG. 119). To the rear surface of the plate-like portion 2111. The rear base member 2140 is connected to the rear side of the front base member 2139, and includes a housing portion 2140a communicating with the support hole 2139a and a support portion 2140e that slidably supports the rear side of the bellows-shaped protruding and recessed piece 2142. I have. In addition, a lower part of the rear base member 2140 has a sensor attachment part 2140b into which the winning sensor 2137 is inserted from the front. A circular notch 2140d is formed. In addition, a notch-shaped bearing portion 2140c whose front surface is open is formed on the left and right walls of the rear base member 2140.

  The solenoid 2141 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2140a of the rear base member 2140 with the plunger 2143 facing forward. The tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 includes a rectangular frame-shaped frame portion 2142a that is elongated in the front-rear direction, a ball receiving portion 2142b that is formed at the tip portion of the frame portion 2142a and has a downward slope toward the rear, and a frame The rear guide part 2142c formed on the rear side of the part 2142a and slidably supported by the support part 2140e of the rear base member 2140, and disposed between the frame part 2142a and the rear guide part 2142c from the left and right sides. And a pair of groove portions 2142d formed in a groove shape. The link member 2144 is connected to the plunger 2143 of the solenoid 2141 and converts the movement of the plunger 2143 in the front-rear direction into the linear movement of the tongue-shaped protrusion / contraction piece 2142. A pair of rotating shaft portions 2144a that are fitted and inserted into the bearing portion 2140c provided on the base member 2140 from the front side, and a pair that is formed to extend inward from the left and right sides of the upper surface and that is locked to the plunger 2143 of the solenoid 2141. The locking part 2144b and the latching part 2144c which protrudes inward from the right and left both sides of a lower end, and are latched by a pair of groove part 2142d in the bell-shaped intrusion piece 2142 are provided. That is, when the plunger 2143 is retracted by energizing the solenoid 2141, the link member 2144 rotates around the rotation shaft portion 2144 a, and the tongue-shaped protrusion / contraction piece 2142 is moved from the retracted position (the state shown in FIG. 124) to the protruding position (FIG. 125). To the state shown).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 124, when the tongue-shaped protrusion / contraction piece 2142 is in the retracted position, the ball receiving portion 2142b of the tongue-shaped protrusion / contraction piece 2142 is received in the support hole 2139a of the front base member 2139. The game ball that has entered the ball entry portion 2135 (see FIG. 118) passes through without being received by the velo-shaped projecting piece 2142. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 125, when the bello-shaped projecting piece 2142 moves to the projecting position, the ball receiving portion 2142 b of the bello-shaped projecting piece 2142 projects from the support hole 2139 a of the front base member 2139 to the front game area 1100, It becomes possible to receive a game ball that has entered the ball entrance unit 2135. Then, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 2142b of the tongue-shaped protruding and retracting piece 2142 is guided rearward according to the gradient of the ball receiving portion 2142b and falls from the frame portion 2142a. Note that a winning sensor 2137 is disposed below the rear base member 2140 so that a falling game ball can be detected.

  Although the details will be described later, the tongue-shaped protruding and retracting piece 2142 is housed in the retracted position in the normal gaming state, and a game ball is received at the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 (start winning prize is given). ) To move to the protruding position in accordance with the special lottery result drawn (when the special lottery result is “small hit”).

  Next, the second open / close winning device 2104 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 115, the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 is disposed below the second start port 2102 and allows a game ball to enter through the third opening 2110c (see FIG. 119) of the base member 2110. It is possible. As shown in FIGS. 121 and 126, the second open / close winning device 2104 includes a case unit 2152 comprising an upper case 2150 and a lower case 2151 having a large winning opening 2153 in the front and a passage for a game ball formed therein. The prize winning opening 2153 is arranged so as to face the horizontally elongated third opening 2110c formed in the base member 2110. The large winning opening 2153 can be opened and closed by a horizontally-long rectangular winning door 2154 (see FIG. 118) whose opening can be closed. In the winning door 2154, door shafts 2154a formed at the lower portions of the left and right ends are pivotally supported by a pair of bearing portions 2150c formed on the left and right sides of the front surface of the upper case 2150. And a substantially vertical state in which the game ball cannot be received (the state shown in FIG. 115), and a tilted state in which the upper side is tilted forward to open the special winning opening 2153 and the game ball can be received. It is possible to rotate between the two. Although details will be described later, the winning door 2154 is in a state in which the big winning opening 2153 is closed in a normal gaming state, and a game ball is received in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 ( It is opened according to the special lottery result drawn by winning the start (when the special lottery result is “big hit”).

  The second open / close winning device 2104 will be described in more detail. The upper case 2150 has a game ball passage inside (lower side), and a sensor accommodation portion 2150b in which the second start port sensor 2166 is accommodated is formed on the upper surface. Has been. Further, on the upper surface side of the lower case 2151, there are formed a passage 2151 a for guiding a game ball won in the big winning opening 2153 and a mechanism accommodating portion 2151 c for accommodating an opening / closing drive mechanism 2155 for opening and closing the winning door 2154. On the lower surface side of the lower case 2151, a sensor housing portion 2151 b for housing a count sensor 2160 that detects a winning game ball is formed. A light emitting substrate 2162 for irradiating and decorating the vicinity of the special winning opening 2153 is disposed below the lower case 2151.

  The opening / closing drive mechanism 2155 includes a solenoid 2156 provided horizontally so that the plunger 2157 faces the right side, and a link member 2158 that converts the linear motion of the plunger 2157 in the left-right direction into the rotational motion of the winning door 2154. The link member 2158 sandwiches the rotary shaft portion 2158a inserted into the bearing hole 2150d formed on the right front surface of the upper case 2150 and the claw portion 2154b protruding rearward from the right end side of the winning door 2154 (see FIG. 118). A pair of latching portions 2158b and 2158c that are latched to each other, and a latching portion 2158d that is latched to the plunger 2157 of the solenoid 2156. That is, when the plunger 2157 moves to the left by energizing the solenoid 2156, the link member 2158 rotates clockwise around the rotation shaft portion 2158a, and the claw portion 2154b of the winning door 2154 is pushed up by the latching portion 2158b. Thus, the winning door 2154 can be changed from the closed state to the open state. When energization of the solenoid 2156 is stopped, the plunger 2157 is moved to the right by the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the link member 2158 is rotated counterclockwise around the rotation shaft portion 2158a. The claw portion 2154b of the winning door 2154 can be pushed down by the latching portion 2158c to change the winning door 2154 from the open state to the closed state.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the winning device unit 2100 is provided with a cover member 2168 that covers the second open / close winning device 2104. The cover member 2168 is substantially U-shaped in a side view, and is formed on the first mounting portion 2168a formed on the left side of the upper stage, to which the opening / closing drive mechanism 2126 of the second start port 2102 is attached, and on the extended part of the lower stage. It has a second mounting portion 2168b on which the two open / close winning device 2104 is placed, and a third mounting portion 2168c that is erected from the upper right side and supports the rear end portion of the gate sensor 2176. A relay board 2164 is attached to the rear surface of the cover member 2168, and is attached to the opening / closing drive mechanism 2126 of the second start port 2102, the opening / closing drive mechanism 2136 of the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103, and the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104. Drive signals to the solenoids 2128, 2141, 2156 provided respectively, and detection signals from the open / close drive mechanism 2136, the second open / close winning device 2104, and the sensors 2137, 2160, 2166, 2176 provided in the gate unit 2107, respectively. Are relayed by a common board. That is, a harness (not shown) connected to the solenoids 2128, 2141, 2156 and a harness (not shown) connected to the sensors 2137, 2160, 2166, 2176 are arranged behind the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104. Collected on the relay board 2164 and electrically connected to the control board disposed outside via the relay board 2164.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the main lens portion 2112 disposed on the rear side of the base member 2110 is formed of a transparent resin, and is formed on the plate-like portion 2111 of the base member 2110 on the front surface. The large window portion 2110f (see FIG. 119) and the small window portion 2110g are respectively formed with a plurality of large fitting portions 2112f and a plurality of small fitting portions 2112g that protrude from the rear side. Further, the rear cover member 2114 disposed on the rear side of the main lens portion 2112 has light transmittance, and is a light emitting substrate 3503, 3506, 3507 (in detail, provided independently of the winning device unit 2100). It is possible to transmit light emitted from (described later based on FIG. 162). However, as shown in FIG. 117, the back surface of the rear cover member 2114 has a portion facing the small window portion 2110g of the base member 2110 (that is, a portion matching the small fitting portion 2112g of the main lens portion 2112), and 2114g. The remaining portion (including the portion facing the large window portion 2110f) 2114f has a different light transmittance. Specifically, the portion 2114g facing the small window portion 2110g is transparent, but the remaining portion 2114f has an irregular reflection surface formed by unevenness.

  As described above, according to the prize winning device unit 2100 of this example, the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 and the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 are attached to the common base member 2110 and configured as one prize winning device unit 2100. Therefore, it is possible to assemble the winning device unit 2100 together with the game panel 1200, and as a result, it is possible to facilitate the assembling work, and to reduce the working time and labor of the assembling. Become.

  In addition, since all the harnesses are gathered on one relay board 2164, the harnesses can be wired together, and the number of harnesses drawn from the entire winning device unit 2100 (ie, drawn from the relay board 2164 to the outside). The number of harnesses) can be reduced, and wiring work can be facilitated.

  The first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 and the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 are different in configuration from each other, and the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 is long in the front-rear direction, that is, the reception opening for the game ball is relatively small. The second open / close winning device 2104 is long in the left-right direction, that is, the large winning opening 2153 is formed to be relatively large. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2153 is opened, a larger amount of games than the first opening / closing winning device 2103 is achieved. The player can be given an impression that the ball can be won, and the player's expectation for the big prize opening 2153 can be enhanced. Further, since the relay board 2164 is attached to the rear side of the horizontally long second open / close winning device 2104, it is easy to pull out the harness toward the rear of the winning device unit 2100. In addition, since the relay board 2164 is arranged using the space behind the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 generated by the depth difference between the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 and the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104, the prize winning device unit 2100. The layout space of the relay board 2164 can be secured without increasing the size.

  By the way, the opening / closing control of the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 and the opening / closing control of the second opening / closing winning prize device 2104 are executed as giving different profits, respectively, but the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 and the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 are executed. When the device 2104 is attached to the common base member 2110, the two open / close prize-winning devices 2103 and 2104 have a sense of unity, as if two types of profits are given by using one open / close prize-winning device. May be recognized. In other words, despite having two types of open / close winning devices 2103 and 2104, there is no significant difference from changing the opening time and the number of times of opening / closing a single winning device based on the lottery result, which may reduce interest. There is.

  On the other hand, in this example, a notch 2110d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed between the first opening / closing prize-winning device 2103 and the second opening / closing prize-winning device 2104. It becomes possible to give the player the recognition that the device is an open / close winning device. In other words, although the first open / close prize winning device 2103 and the second open / close prize winning device 2104 are combined into one unit, each of the open / close prize winning devices 2103 and 2104 can be controlled by suppressing the visually recognized unity. The presence can be increased, and consequently, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In particular, since a plurality of obstacle nails K implanted in the game panel 1200 are arranged through the notch 2110d, the rolling direction of the game ball is changed between the first open / close prize device 2103 and the second open / close prize device 2104. The behavior of the game ball can be noticed by changing. Therefore, the recognition that the first open / close winning device 2103 and the second open / close winning device 2104 are separate open / close winning devices can be further increased.

  Further, the game area 1100 below the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 and the game area 1100 below the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 are separated by a dividing line 2110i formed on the front surface of the base member 2110. The two open / close winning devices 2103 and 2104 can be visually separated including the surrounding game area 1100, and the first open / close winning device 2103 and the second open / close winning device 2104 are separate open / close winning devices. Can be further enhanced.

  In addition, since the base member 2110 has a reflective surface on the entire front surface, the entire front surface is shining, increasing the gorgeousness of the lower part of the gaming panel 1200 and making the overall winning device unit 2100 conspicuous. The operations of the winning device 2103 and the second open / close winning device 2104 can be noted.

  The winning device unit 2100 includes a main lens portion 2112 and a cover member 2114 that transmit light emitted from the rear light emitting substrates 3503, 3506, and 3507, and a large window portion 2110 f and a small window formed on the base member 2110. It is possible to project light to the player side through the window 2110g. For this reason, the large window portion 2110f and the small window portion 2110g can be decorated with light emission, and the glare of the base member 2110 can be further enhanced. Further, since the light emitting substrates 3503, 3506, and 3507 are arranged separately from the winning device unit 2100, the number of harnesses drawn from the winning device unit 2100 can be reduced to the minimum necessary number. A decrease in workability when the unit 2100 is assembled can be suppressed.

  By the way, since the main lens portion 2112 is transparent, when the light is emitted from the light emitting substrates 3503, 3506, and 3507, the contents disposed behind the winning device unit 2100 are the large window portion 2110f and the small window portion 2110g. May be visually recognized through this, and this may impair the appearance. In addition, if a diffuse reflection surface is formed on the cover member 2114 disposed on the rear side of the main lens portion 2112, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the contents, but according to this, the amount of light passing through the main lens portion 2112 is reduced. In particular, in the small window portion 2110g, it becomes difficult to shine brightly and become inconspicuous.

  On the other hand, in the present example, a diffuse reflection portion is formed in the portion 2114f of the rear surface of the cover member 2114 that is transmitted toward the large window portion 2110f, but the portion 2114g that is transmitted toward the small window portion 2110g is provided in the portion 2114g. The irregular reflection part is not formed and is transparent. For this reason, the large window portion 2110f is made difficult to see the contents behind the winning device unit 2100 by transmitting the light irradiated from the light emitting substrates 3503, 3506, and 3507 while irregularly reflecting the light. By transmitting the light irradiated from the light emitting substrates 3503, 3506, and 3507 without irregular reflection to the window 2110g, it is possible to send sufficient light to the small window 2110g to make it brightly shine. Since the small window portion 2110g has a small opening area, even if the main lens portion 2112 and the cover member 2114 are transparent, it is difficult to see the contents, and even if it is visible, it is extremely difficult to grasp the appearance of the contents. It becomes. Therefore, even the small window portion 2110g does not impair the appearance.

  Further, since the base member 2110 of the winning device unit 2100 is further provided with a first starting port 2101, compared to the first starting port 2101 that is assembled as a separate component from the winning device unit 2100, The work time and labor required when assembling the game panel 1200 can be reduced. In addition, since the first start opening 2101 can be disposed close to the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103, the first opening opening 2101 maintains the closed state of the first opening / closing winning prize device 2103 by the first start opening 2101. And the first open / close winning device 2103 can be associated with each other. In particular, since the first start port 2101 is formed integrally with the base member 2110, the work of assembling the first start port 2101 with respect to the base member 2110 becomes unnecessary, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In addition, since the base member 2110 of the winning device unit 2100 is further provided with a second starting port 2102, compared to a case where the second starting port 2102 is assembled as a separate component from the winning device unit 2100. The work time and labor required when assembling the game panel 1200 can be reduced. Further, the second start port 2102 can be arranged close to the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104.

  Further, the base member 2110 of the winning device unit 2100 is further provided with a gate portion 2107 and a gate sensor 2176. The work time and labor required when assembling the game panel 1200 can be reduced. Further, the harness connected to the gate sensor 2176 and the harnesses of the two open / close prize winning devices 2103 and 2104 can be collectively passed through one opening portion 1200e, and the layout and wiring work of the harness becomes complicated. Can be suppressed. In addition, since the gate portion 2107 is formed integrally with the base member 2110, the work of assembling the gate portion 2107 with respect to the base member 2110 becomes unnecessary, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the base member 2110 is formed with a guide portion 2110h for guiding the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2107 to the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 side, when the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 is opened, the gate portion The game ball that has passed 2107 can easily be awarded in the big prize opening 2153. Therefore, expectation other than the lottery can be generated for the passage through the gate portion 2107. Further, since the guide portion 2110h is formed integrally with the base member 2110, the assembling work of the guide portion 2110h with respect to the base member 2110 becomes unnecessary, and the configuration of the guide portion 2110h becomes simple.

  The base member 2110 has a fourth opening 2110e formed between the gate 2107 and the second open / close winning device 2104, and the obstacle nail K planted in the game panel 1200 is arranged through the fourth opening 2110e. Therefore, it is possible to change the rolling direction of the game ball from the gate portion 2107 toward the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104, and to pay attention to the behavior of the game ball.

  Furthermore, since the base member 2110 is provided with the general winning ports 2105 and 2106, the base panel 2110 has a game panel 1200 compared to the case where the general winning ports 2105 and 2106 are assembled as separate components from the winning device unit 2100. Work time and labor when assembling can be reduced. In particular, since the general winning ports 2105 and 2106 are formed integrally with the base member 2110, the assembly work of the general winning ports 2105 and 2106 with respect to the base member 2110 becomes unnecessary, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

[2-2. Side decoration unit]
The side decoration unit 2300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 128. FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the side decoration unit as seen from diagonally front. The side decoration unit 2300 is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening portion 1200e formed on the left side of the opening portion 1200e into which the prize winning device unit 2100 is inserted and fixed at the lower left side from the center in the left-right direction of the gaming panel 1200. Above, it is fixed to the front surface of the gaming panel 1200. The side decoration unit 2300 includes a base member 2301 that is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front and is fixed to the game panel 1200, and a lens body 2304 that is disposed on the rear side of the base member 2301 and is accommodated in the back cover 2305. I have. A display sheet 2302 and a diffusion sheet 2303 are interposed between the base member 2301 and the lens body 2304.

  More specifically, the base member 2301 includes a substantially triangular effect display portion 2301a that protrudes into the game area 1100, and a thin plate-like decoration portion 2301b that extends to the upper side of the effect display portion 2301a. The effect display unit 2301a has a window portion 2301c penetrating in the front-rear direction, a housing portion 2301d is formed therein, and a game ball that rolls the game area 1100 is placed on the top surface of the effect display unit 2301a. A guide rolling surface 2301e for guiding toward the 2100 side is formed. The decorative portion 2301b has two openings 2301f and two notches 2301g, through which the lens body 2304 can be visually recognized.

  On the other hand, the lens body 2304 is formed of a transparent resin and is fitted into the housing portion 2301d of the base member 2301 from the rear side, and holds a display sheet 2302 and a diffusion sheet 2303, and a decorative portion 2301b. An upper lens portion 2304b disposed on the rear side, and on the front surface of the upper lens portion 2304b, a lower transmission portion 2304c fitted into the lower opening 2301f of the base member 2301 from the rear side, and an upper side An upper transmission portion 2304d that is fitted into the opening 2301f from the rear side and protrudes rearward, and a planar light emitting surface portion 2304e that is fitted from the rear side into the cutout portion 2301g of the base member 2301 are formed.

  The back cover 2305 is formed of a light-transmitting member, and includes a lower housing portion 2305a that houses the sheet pressing portion 2304a of the lens body 2304, and an upper housing portion 2305b that houses the upper lens portion 2304b of the lens body 2304. Have. Further, a cylindrical insertion portion 2305c is formed in the upper housing portion 2305b, and a portion protruding rearward of the upper transmission portion 2304d is fitted. A reflector 2306 is provided between the lower transmissive portion 2304c of the lens body 2304 and the back cover 2305 for efficiently illuminating the lower transmissive portion 2304c with the light applied to the rear surface of the back cover 2305. Yes.

  Behind the back cover 2305, a light emitting substrate 3206 (see FIG. 147) that irradiates light from behind to the lower housing portion 2305a and a light emitting substrate 3205 (see FIG. 147) that irradiates light from the rear to the upper housing portion 2305b. Reference) is provided, and it is possible to irradiate light separately. In particular, the light emitting substrate 3206 irradiates the display sheet 2302 with light, and can project light of a plurality of colors including at least one of the three primary colors and red, which is the other primary color. Full color LED.

  The display sheet 2302 is made of a color filter and has a first transmission unit and a second transmission unit. The first transmission means displays the first pattern by passing only the first color (specifically, red) light projected from the light emitting substrate 3206, while the second transmission means Only the light of the second color (specifically, blue) projected from the light emitting substrate 3206 passes through, so that a second pattern different from the first pattern is displayed. By providing the display sheet 2302 in this manner, it is possible to change the picture visually recognized through the window 2301c of the base member 2301 as necessary, and to suppress the monotonous effect. In particular, since the pattern to be displayed can be changed only by changing the color of the light projected from the light emitting substrate 3206, it can be configured extremely simply. In addition, since the display panel 2302 includes the first transmission unit and the second transmission unit, and the light emitting substrate 3206, the size of the display unit is larger than that of a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. It can be downsized.

  In addition, by providing the diffusion sheet 2303, the light that has passed through the sheet pressing portion 2304a of the lens body 2304 can be evenly irradiated on the entire surface of the display sheet 2302, and the first pattern and the second pattern can be clearly recognized. Is possible.

[2-3. Center character]
Next, the configuration of the center accessory 2400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 and 129 to 134. FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the center accessory as seen from diagonally forward, FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the center feature as seen from diagonally forward, and FIG. 131 is a base frame of the center bonus. FIG. 132 (a) is an exploded perspective view of a member, a warp passage, a shelf board, and a rear shelf cover as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 132 (a) is an enlarged front view of a main part in which the upper left part of the game board is enlarged. b) is an enlarged front view of the main part in which the right center portion of the game board is enlarged, and FIG. 133 (a) is a cross-sectional perspective view of the AA cross section in FIG. 133 (b) is a cross-sectional perspective view of the B-B cross section in FIG. 132 (b) seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 134 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the base frame member and the game panel.

  As shown in FIG. 114, the center accessory 2400 is inserted from the front side into the opening 1200e that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1200, and then fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1200. It is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the game area 1100. As shown in FIGS. 129 and 131, the center accessory 2400 includes a frame-shaped base frame member 2401, a warp passage 2402 disposed on the left side of the base frame member 2401 and communicating with the outside and the inside of the base frame member 2401, A shelf 2403 having a stage 2403a that is arranged on the inner side of the lower edge of the base frame member 2401 and rolls in the right and left game balls taken in via the warp passage 2402, the back and top of the stage 2403a, and the warp passage And a shelf rear cover 2404 covering the rear side of 2402. Also, as shown in FIG. 129, a right protective member 2406 that covers the path of the game ball located on the right side of the base frame member 2401 from the front is disposed at the lower right side of the base frame member 2401. Further, as shown in FIG. 130, the center accessory 2400 is provided with a plurality of decorative bodies 2410 arranged along the inner edge of the opening window 2400a, thereby enhancing the decorative effect of the center accessory 2400, Impresses the concept of pachinko machine 1. Hereinafter, each configuration will be described in detail. Here, the base frame member 2401 corresponds to the center frame of the present invention.

  As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, the base frame member 2401 protrudes forward (player side) from the front of the game panel 1200, the insertion portion 2401a inserted into the opening 1200c, and the front of the game panel 1200. A partition wall 2401c that partitions the game area 1100 and the internal space of the base frame member 2401, and a partition wall 2401c that is formed at a right angle to the partition wall 2401c and protrudes radially outward from the insert 2401a. And a thin plate-like flange portion 2401b attached to the front surface. That is, the insertion portion 2401a supports the base frame member 2401 in a state where it is positioned with respect to the opening portion 1200a, and the partition wall portion 2401c partitions the internal space of the base frame member 2401 and the game area 1100, The entry of game balls is blocked.

  By the way, since the some decoration body 2410 provided in the center accessory 2400 is arrange | positioned inside the division wall part 2401c, the large-sized decoration body 2410 is arrange | positioned, so that the magnitude | size of the division wall part 2401c is large. Is possible. In other words, in order to make the decorative body 2410 appear larger, it is necessary to make the size of the partition wall 2401c in the radial direction, that is, the size of the opening window 2400a (see FIG. 129) relatively large. However, when the size of the base frame member 2401 is increased in order to enlarge the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400, the area of the game area 1100 in which the game ball rolls in the game panel 1200 becomes relatively narrow, and as a result There is a possibility that the behavior becomes monotonous or it becomes difficult to secure a space for allowing the game ball to pass therethrough.

  On the other hand, in this example, the base frame member 2401 is formed of a transparent resin member, and is provided with a game area expansion portion 2401d extending radially inward from the flange portion 2401b. That is, by disposing at least a part of the partition wall portion 2401c at a predetermined position radially inward from the inner edge of the opening portion 1200e in a front view, the expanded game area 1100a is made transparent in front of the opening portion 1200e. It is formed of members.

In order to describe in detail the configuration and operation of this game area expansion unit 2401d, for convenience, the following two pachinko machines are shown as comparative pachinko machines in FIGS. 134 (b) and (c). FIG. 134 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the upper left part of the game board 4 in this example (that is, the part corresponding to FIG. 132 (a)), and FIGS. 134 (b) and 134 (c) are comparative pachinko machines. It is sectional drawing which shows the part corresponded to the same area | region of a machine.
First comparative pachinko machine 5001: As shown in FIG. 134 (b), the size and arrangement position of the opening 5200a of the game panel 5200 and the flange portion 5401b of the base frame member 5401 are respectively (a). It is the same as this example shown in FIG. 1, and does not have a game area expansion unit.
Second comparative pachinko machine 6001: As shown in FIG. 134 (c), the size and arrangement position of the partition wall portion 6401c is the same as that of the present invention, and does not include a game area expansion portion.

  First, when the pachinko machine 1 of this example is compared with the first comparative pachinko machine 5001, in this example, the partition wall portion 2401c is radially inward of the inner edge of the opening portion 1200e by providing the game area expanding portion 2401d. (Lower side in FIG. 134). That is, a game area 1100a is formed in front of the opening 1200e, and the game area is wider than that of the first comparison pachinko machine 5001. By the way, according to this structure, the magnitude | size of the opening window 2400a enclosed by the partition wall part 2401c becomes smaller than the opening window 5400a of the 1st comparison pachinko machine 5001. However, in this example, since the partition wall portion 2401c and the game area expansion portion 2401d are formed of a light transmissive member, the size of the opening window 2400a is smaller than the opening window 5400a of the first comparison pachinko machine 5001. It can be made not to feel. That is, when the entire base frame member 2401 does not transmit light, the boundary between the base frame member 2401 that does not transmit light and the open window 2400a that is opened (that is, the portion that transmits light), that is, the inner edge of the partition wall 2401c The part is emphasized, and this part is recognized as the outer edge of the opening window 2400a, but the partition wall part 2401c and the game area extension part 2401d are formed of a light-transmitting member, so that the light transmitting part and the light are not transmitted. It becomes possible to make the boundary with the part the boundary between the flange part 2401b and the game area expansion part 2401d (that is, the inner edge part of the opening part 1200e formed in the game panel 1200), and the boundary part is made to stand out and the opening window It can be recognized as the outer edge of 2400a. Further, since light leaks from the partition wall portion 2401c and the game area expansion portion 2401d to the player side, the base frame member 2401 itself can be shown larger. Therefore, even if the size of the opening window 2400a is smaller than that of the first comparative pachinko machine 5001 by expanding the game area 1100, it is difficult to give a reduced impression.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 of this example is compared with the second comparison pachinko machine 6001 shown in FIG. 134 (c), in this example, the game area expanding part 2401d is provided, so that the flange part 2401b of the base frame member 2401 is provided. And the opening portion 1200e of the gaming panel 1200 is enlarged toward the radially outer side (upper side in FIG. 134) (compared with the flange portion 6401b of the base frame member 6401 and the opening portion 6200a of the gaming panel 6200 shown in FIG. 134C). if you did this). By the way, when the opening portion 1200e of this example becomes larger than the opening portion 6200a of the second comparative pachinko machine 6001, the gaming area 1100 on the gaming panel 1200 becomes relatively narrow, but in front of the opening portion 1200e. Since the game area 1100a is also formed on a certain game area expansion unit 2401d, an area equivalent to that of the second comparison pachinko machine 6001 can be secured as the entire game area. In this example, since the partition wall 2401c and the game area expansion 2401d are formed of a light-transmitting member, as described above, it is a boundary between a portion that transmits light and a portion that does not transmit light. The boundary between the flange portion 2401b and the game area expansion portion 2401d (that is, the inner edge portion of the opening portion 1200e formed in the game panel 1200) can be made to stand out and recognized as the outer edge of the opening window 2400a. Further, since light leaks from the partition wall portion 2401c and the game area expansion portion 2401d to the player side, the base frame member 2401 itself can be shown larger. Therefore, in this example, compared with the second comparison pachinko machine 6001, it is possible to make the opening window 2400a of the base frame member 2401 larger without narrowing the entire game area.

  Further, in the area shown in FIGS. 132 (a) and 133 (a) of this example, a light emitting board 3182 provided in an upper accessory unit 3100 described later is arranged behind the game area expansion unit 2401d. The light is irradiated toward the game area expansion unit 2401d. For this reason, the amount of light passing through the game area expansion part 2401d increases, and there is a difference in brightness between the flange part 2401b where light is blocked by the game panel 1200 and the game area expansion part 2401d irradiated with light through the opening 1200e. It becomes clear and can make those boundaries more noticeable. Further, since the base frame member 2401 including the game area expansion portion 2401d is formed of a transparent resin member, light can be transmitted through the entire game area expansion portion 2401d and the amount of light passing therethrough can be increased. Therefore, the boundary portion between the flange portion 2401b and the game area expanding portion 2401d is further emphasized and becomes conspicuous. In particular, the color of the transparent game area expanding portion 2401d is light purple, which is substantially the same color as the color (purple) of the game panel 1200 around the base frame member 2401. For this reason, the front-end | tip of the flange 2401b also becomes inconspicuous and the boundary part of the flange part 2401b and the game area expansion part 2401d can be made more conspicuous relatively.

  Note that the game area expansion portion 2401d may be formed over the entire circumference of the base frame member 2401, but in this example, the center accessory 2400 is required to change the rolling direction of the game ball in a complicated manner. The upper left game area 1100 (see FIGS. 132 (a) and 133 (a)) and the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2400 that needs to secure a rolling path for the game ball (FIG. 132 (b)) , (See FIG. 133 (b)), the game area expanding portion 2401d is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 131, the warp passage 2402 has a warp inlet 2402a that opens to the outside of the base frame member 2401 and a warp outlet 2402b that opens to the inside of the base frame member 2401, and has a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front. Presents. That is, it is possible to take a game ball rolling in the game area 1100 on the left side of the base frame member 2401 from the warp inlet 2402a and guide it to the warp outlet 2402b.

  By the way, since the warp passage 2402 is provided in the base frame member 2401, when the partition wall portion 2401c and the game area expansion portion 2401d are formed of a light transmissive member as described above, the presence of the warp passage 2402 exists. Remarkably, it gives the impression that the warp passage 2402 protrudes greatly toward the inside of the opening window. That is, the open window 2400a may be felt small. On the other hand, in this example, since the warp passage 2402 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin, the outline of the warp passage 2402 becomes inconspicuous, and it can be suppressed that the opening window 2400a feels small. Although details will be described later, the warp passage 2402 is decorated with light emitted from the rear side.

  The shelf board 2403 has a substantially arc-shaped stage 2403a that rolls the game ball that has flowed into the base frame member 2401 through the warp passage 2402 in the left-right direction. In the stage 2403a, the rolled game ball Can flow out to the game area 1100 above the first start port 2101 from the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2403a or in the vicinity thereof. In particular, a groove-like chance inlet 2403b formed in a downward slope toward the rear is formed at the center of the stage 2403a, and a chance outlet 2403c penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed below the chance inlet 2403b. Has been. That is, when the momentum of the game ball passing in the left-right direction is weakened, the game ball rolls backward along the chance entrance 2403b and is sent to the chance passage 2404d formed in the rear shelf cover 2404, and further the chance passage It is possible to discharge from the chance outlet 2403c through 2404d.

  The rear shelf cover 2404 includes a rear wall portion 2404a that covers the back side of the stage 2403a, an upper wall portion 2404b that covers the upper side of the stage 2403, and a warp wall portion 2404c that closes the rear surface of the warp passage 2402. The rear wall 2404a is formed with a chance passage 2404d that communicates the chance entrance 2403b and the chance exit 2403c of the shelf 2403.

  By the way, since the shelf 2403 and the shelf rear cover 2404 are arranged inside the lower edge of the game area expansion portion 2401d, when the base frame member 2401 is formed of a transparent resin as described above, Presence of the 2403 and the rear shelf cover 2404 stands out, giving the impression that they are protruding greatly toward the inside of the opening window 2400a. That is, the open window 2400a may be felt small. On the other hand, in this example, since the shelf 2403 and the rear shelf cover 2404 are formed of a colorless and transparent resin, the outline of the shelf 2403 and the rear shelf cover 2404 becomes inconspicuous and the opening window 2400a feels small. Can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the right protective member 2406 rebounds to the player side when a game ball that rolls (falls) in the game area 1100 on the right side of the base frame member 2401 collides with the protrusion 2401 e. Are formed on the lower side of the rolling direction guide 2406b, the rolling direction guide 2406b extending from the lower end of the protection 2406a in the right-right direction and changing the rolling direction of the game ball. And an ornament mounting portion 2406c to which a lower right plated ornament 2447 is attached. The protrusions 2401e are formed on the right game area expansion part 2401d, project from the front game area 1100a, and are arranged side by side in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval. The momentum of the rolling game ball is suppressed by sequentially causing the rolling ball to collide with the protrusion 2401e.

  As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the center accessory 2400 decorates the upper left decoration unit 2411 arranged at the upper left of the base frame member 2401 and the warp passage 2402 arranged below the upper part as a plurality of decoration bodies 2410. A warp passage decoration unit 2412, an upper right decoration unit 2413 disposed at the upper right of the base frame member 2401, and a right decoration unit 2414 disposed below the upper right decoration unit 2414 are provided. The upper left decoration unit 2411 includes a light-transmitting logo front ornament 2420 that represents a predetermined character, a light diffusion sheet 2421 that is disposed behind the logo front ornament 2420 and diffuses light passing therethrough, and a light diffusion sheet 2421. A light transmissive sheet presser 2422 supported from the rear side is configured to be decorated with light emitted by light (details will be described later) irradiated from the rear side. This logo front ornament 2420 corresponds to a specific character portion of the present invention, and is arranged adjacent to the left side of a logo display unit 3400 described later, and is combined with a series of characters in the logo display unit 3400. One character language (a logo indicating the model name and title name of the pachinko machine 1) is formed (see FIG. 160a). A decorative lens 2423 is attached to the upper end portion of the logo front decoration 2420.

  The warp path decoration unit 2412 includes a colorless and transparent warp lens 2426 that is mounted so as to cover the upper part of the warp path 2402 from the front side, and a warp decoration 2425 that is mounted on the front side of the warp lens 2426. The warp decoration 2425 has a plurality of window portions 2425a in which a reflection surface is formed on the entire surface by plating and the warp lens 2426 is partially visible. The lower part of the warp passage 2402 is not covered with the warp decoration 2425 and is exposed. The light emission decoration of the warp passage decoration unit 2412 will be described later.

  The upper right decoration unit 2413 is disposed on a light-transmitting right base 2430 disposed over the entire right side of the base frame member 2401, and extends from an annular ornament body 2431a and its upper and lower portions. A decorative frame 2431 formed of an arc-shaped decoration 2431b, a logo lens 2432 that is inserted from the front side into the upper opening 2430a of the right base 2430 and has a predetermined character, and a right side that is disposed on the rear side of the base frame member 2401 A light emitting substrate 2433 that irradiates light to the base 2430 from behind, and light emitted from the upper side of the light emitting substrate 2433 is efficiently irradiated to the vicinity of the upper opening 2430a (that is, the portion corresponding to the interior of the decorative body 2431a of the decorative frame 2431). And a reflector 2434. In addition, a smoke ball-shaped decoration 2435 into which a plurality of protrusions 2430b formed on the right base 2430 are inserted is disposed above and obliquely below the right of the decoration frame 2431, respectively.

  The right decoration unit 2414 is externally fitted to a disk-shaped protrusion 2430c formed on the lower portion of the right base 2430 from the front side, and a plating ornament 2437 whose surface is plated, and a rear side in the protrusion 2430c. And a smoke-shaped ornament 2439 that is arranged and incorporated in the plated ornament 2437 and can produce an effect of rising smoke, and is irradiated from the light-emitting substrate 2433. The projection 2430c of the right base 2430 and the smoke-shaped decoration 2439 can be illuminated and decorated by the light.

  In addition, a 7-segment display 2441 is disposed at the lower left portion of the front surface of the right base 2430 so as to protrude to the left of the right base 2430. The 7-segment display 2441 includes a front ornament 2442 having a circular window portion 2442a, a half mirror 2443 that is accommodated in the front ornament 2442 and visible through the window portion 2442a, and light that is disposed behind and passes through the half mirror 2443. A sheet 2444 for diffusing light, a light emitted from the light emitting substrate 2433 is efficiently projected toward the diffusion sheet 2444, and a reflector 2445 having a slit 2445a corresponding to a number segment is disposed on the left side of the reflector 2445. And a red lens 2446 for projecting red light through the window of the 7-segment display 2441. That is, the LED corresponding to the two-digit number to be displayed is selected from the LEDs on the light emitting substrate 2433 arranged to be opposed to the 7-segment display 2441 so as to emit light, so that the diffusion sheet 2444 is passed through the predetermined slit 2445a. In addition, it is possible to project light onto the half mirror 2443 and project an image of the slit 2445a (that is, a numerical image) on the back surface of the half mirror 2443. Further, by providing the half mirror 2443, a portion that does not face the slit 2445a and a portion that faces the slit 2445a but is not irradiated with light serve as a reflection surface when viewed from the player side, and the inside of the 7-segment display 2441 The structure is hidden from the player.

[2-4. Back unit]
Next, the configuration of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 135 to 165. FIG. 135 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from an oblique front. FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit that is disassembled for each main component and is viewed from the oblique front. FIG. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view in which the upper accessory unit is viewed from obliquely in front by disassembling the upper accessory unit into a large unit portion and a small unit portion; FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view in which the large unit portion is disassembled for each of the main components and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view in which the rotary unit in the large unit portion is disassembled and viewed from the oblique front. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the large-side light-emitting rotating unit and the small-side light-emitting rotating unit in the rotating unit as exploded and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 142 (a) is a small-side light emitting rotating unit. And its drive part is cut longitudinally and viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 142 (b) is a perspective view of the small side cover member as viewed obliquely from below, and FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the small side light emitting rotating part and its drive as viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating decorative body in the small unit portion disassembled and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 145 is a cross-sectional perspective view of the rotating decorative body cut in the vertical direction and viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view in which the enclosure unit of the small unit portion is disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front.

  Further, FIG. 147 is a perspective view of the left hand side unit in the back unit as seen from an oblique front, FIG. 148 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the left hand side unit, and FIG. 149 shows the left side hand unit. FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view in which main components are disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view in which a main part of the left accessory unit is disassembled and viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the movable decorative body in the left handed object unit disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front.

  Further, FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the right side accessory unit in the back unit as seen from an oblique front, FIG. 153 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the right side accessory unit, and FIG. FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of each of the main components disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the movable decorative body in the right accessory unit viewed obliquely from the rear, and FIG. FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view in which the body is disassembled for each of the main components and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view in which the movable body in the movable decorative body is disassembled and viewed from the obliquely front. 158 is an exploded perspective view of the movable arm portion of the movable decorative body disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view of the drive mechanism in the right accessory unit disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front. .

  FIG. 160 (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory provided with the logo display unit in the back unit as viewed from the lower front side, (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a), and FIG. FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the logo display unit as seen from diagonally forward, FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the logo display unit as seen from diagonally forward, and FIG. 163 is an oblique view of the back shelf decoration unit in the back unit. FIG. 164 is an exploded perspective view in which the other components of the back unit are disassembled for each main component member and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 165 is an exploded view of the display unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from diagonally forward.

  As shown in FIGS. 112, 135, and 136, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200, and is mainly separated from the game panel 1200 to the rear side by a predetermined distance in the back box 3001. The liquid crystal display device 1900 supported in the position (omitted in FIGS. 135 and 136), the upper accessory unit 3100 disposed in the upper space of the back box 3001, and the left accessory disposed in the left space of the back box 3001. A unit 3200, a right accessory unit 3300 disposed in the right space of the back box 3001, a logo display unit 3400 disposed below the upper accessory unit 3100, and a back of the shelf disposed in the lower space of the back box 3001. And a decoration unit 3502.

  First, the back box 3001 will be described. As shown in FIG. 164, the back box 3001 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end. The game panel 1200 (see FIG. 114) is fixed to the rear side. Further, the back box 3001 has a rectangular opening 3001c formed substantially at the center of the rear wall 3001b, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side can be seen through the opening 3001c. . Further, the back box 3001 has an appropriate position for attaching the upper accessory unit 3100, the left accessory unit 3200, the right accessory unit 3300, the logo display unit 3400, the back shelf decoration unit 3502, and the like. Is formed.

  Next, the upper accessory unit 3100 will be described in detail. The upper accessory unit 3100 is disposed on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The length in the left-right direction is substantially equal to the horizontal width of the display screen 1900a of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player side (ie, the display screen 1900a). It is placed so as to protrude greatly forward).

  As shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, the upper accessory unit 3100 is roughly divided into a large unit portion 3101 and a small unit portion 3102. As shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, the large unit portion 3101 is disposed on the base member 3110, a thin box-like base member 3110 having an open upper surface, a base cover 3111 covering the upper surface of the base member 3110, and the base member 3110. Light is applied to the rotation unit 3112, the enclosure member 3113 that covers the rear half of the rotation unit 3112 from the rear side, the rear lens member 3114 disposed on the rear side of the enclosure member 3113, and the rear lens member 3114 from behind. A light emitting substrate 3115 and a lower decorative member 3116 that is fixed to the base member 3110 and arranged so as to cover the lower part of the rotating unit 3112 from the front side are provided.

  The rotation unit 3112 will be described in detail based on FIGS. 139 and 140. The rotation unit 3112 includes a large side light emission rotation unit 3120 that can change the light emission direction while emitting light, a small side light emission rotation unit 3121 that is smaller than the large side light emission rotation unit 3120, and a large side light emission rotation unit 3120. A large-side cover member 3122 that covers and rotates integrally with the large-side light-emitting rotating unit 3120, a small-side cover member 3123 that covers the small-side light-emitting rotating unit 3121 and rotates integrally with the small-side light-emitting rotating unit 3121, The large-side upper decorative member 3124 and the small-side upper decorative member 3125 attached to the tops of the side cover member 3122 and the small-side cover member 3123, respectively, and the large-side light emitting rotating unit 3120 and the small-side light emitting rotating unit 3121, respectively. A large-side drive unit 3126 and a small-side drive unit 3130 for applying a rotational force are provided. Here, the large side driving means 3126 and the small side driving means 3130 correspond to the driving means of the present invention.

  As shown in FIGS. 139 to 141, the large-side light emitting rotation unit 3120 is disposed in the large-side accommodating portion 3110 a of the base member 3110, and is a rectangular center disposed in the central substrate accommodating portion 3110 c of the base member 3110. A light emitting substrate 3135, an arc-shaped peripheral light emitting substrate 3136 disposed around the central light emitting substrate 3135, a lens 3137 attached to the base member 3110 so as to cover the central light emitting substrate 3135, and the large side of the base member 3110 A rotating ring 3138 supported rotatably around a cylindrical support cylinder 3110d protruding from the housing 3110a, and a reflector 3139 connected to the rotating ring 3138 and rotating integrally with the rotating ring 3138. , And a photo sensor 3140 for detecting a rotation position (origin position) of the rotation ring 3138. Here, the support tube portion 3110d corresponds to the support portion of the present invention, and the central light emitting substrate 3135 corresponds to the light emitting portion of the present invention.

  The rotation ring 3138 has a through hole 3138a fitted around the support cylinder 3110d of the base member 3110 as a center, and is disposed so as to surround the central light emitting substrate 3135 disposed in the central substrate housing 3110c. Further, on the upper surface of the rotating ring 3138, three columnar connecting portions 3138b for connecting the reflecting mirror 3139 are provided upright. Further, teeth 3138c are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating ring 3138 along the circumferential direction.

  The lens 3137 has a disk shape and is disposed on the upper side of the rotating ring 3138. The outer diameter of the lens 3137 is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the through hole 3138a of the rotating ring 3138. In addition, a plurality of protrusions 3137a are formed on the upper surface of the lens 3137 so that the light emitted from the central light emitting substrate 3135 can be converged and applied to the reflecting mirror 3139.

  The reflecting mirror 3139 has a spherical appearance with the front and bottom surfaces open, and the inner surface reflects light emitted from the central light emitting substrate 3135 via the lens 3137, that is, light emitted from below. Thus, it has a reflecting surface 3139a that projects in the horizontal direction (forward). In addition, the reflecting mirror 3139 includes three connected portions 3139b arranged at predetermined intervals along the outer periphery, and is connected to the connecting portion 3138b of the rotating ring 3138 with a screw (not shown). The rotating ring 3138 is integrally assembled. In addition, three columnar connection portions 3139c for connecting the large-side cover member 3122 are provided upright on the top portion and the rear surface side of the reflecting mirror 3139.

  On the other hand, the small-side light emitting rotation unit 3121 is disposed in the small-side accommodating portion 3110b of the base member 3110, and covers the light-emitting substrate 3142 disposed in the substrate accommodating portion 3110f of the base member 3110 and the light-emitting substrate 3142. A lens 3143 attached to the base member 3110; a rotating ring 3144 supported rotatably around the lens 3143; a reflecting mirror 3145 connected to the rotating ring 3144 and rotating integrally with the rotating ring 3144; And a photosensor 3146 that detects a rotation position (origin position) of the ring 3144. Here, the light emitting substrate 3142 corresponds to the light emitting portion of the present invention, and the lens 3143 corresponds to the support portion of the present invention.

  The rotating ring 3144 has a through-hole portion 3144a fitted around the outer peripheral surface 3143b of the lens 3143 as a center, and is disposed so as to surround the light emitting substrate 3142. In addition, a columnar connection portion 3144 b for connecting the reflecting mirror 3145 is provided upright on the upper surface of the rotating ring 3144. Further, teeth 3144c are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating ring 3144 along the circumferential direction.

  The lens 3143 has a disk shape, and a leg portion 3143c for attaching to the base member 3110 is suspended from the bottom surface. A plurality of protrusions 3143a are formed on the upper surface of the lens 3143 so that the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3142 can be converged and irradiated on the reflecting mirror 3145.

  The reflecting mirror 3145 has a spherical appearance with the front and bottom surfaces open, and the inner surface reflects light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3142 through the lens 3143, that is, light emitted from below. And a reflecting surface 3145a that projects in the horizontal direction (forward). The reflecting mirror 3145 includes two connected portions 3145b disposed at a predetermined interval along the outer periphery, and is connected to the connecting portion 3144b of the rotating ring 3144 by screws (not shown). The rotating ring 3144 is integrally assembled. Further, a connecting portion 3145c for connecting the small-side upper decorative member 3125 is formed on the top of the reflecting mirror 3145.

  As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the large-side cover member 3122 is formed of a hemispherical light-transmitting member, covers the large-side light-emitting rotating portion 3120 from the upper side, and is screwed onto the connection portion 3139c of the reflecting mirror 3139 ( (Not shown). Similarly to the large side cover member 3122, the small side cover member 3123 is formed of a hemispherical light-transmitting member, covers the small side light emitting rotating part 3121 from the upper side, and is screwed to the connection part 3145c of the reflecting mirror 3145 ( (Not shown).

  By the way, the conventionally well-known rotating lamp decoration body simply changes the light projection direction and cannot visually recognize the dynamic change like the movable decoration body. It was. For this reason, even if the rotating lamp decoration body is sufficient as a notification means, it is insufficient as a production device, and there is a possibility that the visual interest in production is reduced.

  On the other hand, in this example, since the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 are connected to the reflecting mirrors 3139 and 3145, respectively, the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 are connected to the reflecting mirrors 3139 and 3145. It can be rotated integrally. For this reason, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the rotation operation of the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 along with the change of the light projecting direction, and enhance the visual interest as the production device by the dynamic change. Is possible. Further, as the power for rotating the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123, the large side driving means 3126 and the small side driving means 3130 for turning the reflecting mirrors 3139 and 3145 are used. The large-side cover member 3122 and the small-side cover member 3123 can be rotated without providing any driving means, and can be configured simply and inexpensively. Further, since the reflecting mirrors 3139 and 3145 and the large cover member 3122 or the small cover member 3123 rotate integrally, light is projected from the inside of the large cover member 3122 or the small cover member 3123. Rather, the surface of the large side cover member 3122 or the small side cover member 3123 can appear to emit light, and the player's attention can be further attracted by a light emission effect different from the conventional one. Become.

  In addition, the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 are not exposed to the structure of the large side light emitting rotation unit 3120 and the small side light emission rotation unit 3121 through the light transmissive large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123. Thus, it has the turbidity means which suppresses transparency. Since the turbidity means of the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 have the same structure, the turbidity means of the small side cover member 3123 will be described below with reference to FIG. Description of the turbidity means is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 142, the turbidity means of the small cover member 3123 is formed by a first uneven portion 3150 and a second uneven portion 3151 formed on the outer surface and the inner surface of the small cover member 3123, respectively. For this reason, transparency can be suppressed with a relatively simple configuration, and light is dispersed by the concavo-convex shape, so that a relatively wide range on the surface of the small-side cover member 3123 can be illuminated.

  In particular, the small cover member 3123 has an irradiation region 3123a that is irradiated with light facing the inner surface (reflection surface 3145a) of the reflecting mirror 3145 and a non-irradiation region 3123b that is not irradiated with light facing the outer surface of the reflecting mirror 3145. The turbidity of the non-irradiation region 3123b is higher than the turbidity of the irradiation region 3123a. Specifically, the first uneven portion 3150 formed on the outer surface of the small side cover member 3123 has a predetermined pattern (for example, vertical unevenness due to a horizontal groove) over the entire outer surface of the small side cover member 3123. On the other hand, the second concavo-convex portion 3151 formed on the inner surface of the small cover member 3123 is formed only on the non-irradiation region 3123b and has a different pattern (for example, in the vertical direction) Horizontal unevenness due to grooves). In other words, in the irradiated region 3123a, vertical unevenness is formed by the first uneven portion 3150, and in the non-irradiated region 3123b, lattice-like unevenness is formed by both the first uneven portion 3150 on the outer surface and the second uneven portion 3151 on the inner surface. Is formed.

  For this reason, in the irradiation region 3123a, the small side cover member 3123 can be brightly lit by increasing the light transmittance. On the other hand, in the non-irradiation region 3123b, the internal structure can be reduced by reducing the light transmittance. It can be made difficult to visually recognize. Further, the turbidity means formed on the outer surface of the small cover member 3123 is only the first concavo-convex portion 3150 and is formed over the entire surface. It can obscure the boundary.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 140, a large-side upper decorative member 3124 is attached to the top of the large-side cover member 3122, and a small-side upper decorative member 3125 is attached to the top of the small-side cover member 3123. . These upper decorative members 3124 and 3125 are formed of a member that does not transmit light, and the surface thereof is plated. For this reason, the upper decorative member 3124, 3125 can be made to stand out and the decorativeness of the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 can be enhanced. Further, since the upper decorative members 3124 and 3125 are arranged at the tops of the large cover member 3122 and the small cover member 3123, that is, in the vicinity of the rotation axis, the light is not blocked to the player side. Even if the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 rotate, the fluctuation of the upper decoration members 3124 and 3125 is suppressed to be small, and the rotation of the upper decoration members 3124 and 3125 rotates the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123. It can be suppressed that the operation is too conspicuous, that is, the change in the light projection direction becomes relatively inconspicuous.

  As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the large-side driving means 3126 that applies a rotational force to the rotation ring 3138 of the large-side light emitting rotation unit 3120 includes a motor 3127 attached to the upper surface of the base cover 3111, and the base cover 3111. A motor gear 3128 housed in the motor 3127 and connected to the rotation shaft of the motor 3127, and a bearing 3110e of the base member 3110 and an inner tooth portion 3129a meshing with the motor gear 3128 and a tooth 3138c of the rotation ring 3138 ( 141) and a transmission gear 3129 having an outer tooth portion 3129b meshing therewith. That is, when the motor 3127 rotates in a predetermined direction, the rotational force is transmitted to the rotating ring 3138 through the motor gear 3128 and the transmission gear 3129, and the reflecting mirror 3139 and the large-side cover member 3122 rotate together with the rotating ring 3138. It has become.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the small driving means 3130 for applying a rotational force to the rotating ring 3144 of the small light emitting rotating unit 3121 is attached to the upper surface of the base cover 3111 (see FIG. 139). The motor 3131 includes a motor gear 3132 housed in the base cover 3111 and connected to the rotation shaft of the motor 3131, and the teeth of the motor gear 3132 are meshed with the teeth 3144 c of the rotating ring 3144. . That is, when the motor 3131 rotates in a predetermined direction, the rotational force is transmitted to the rotating ring 3144 via the motor gear 3132, and the reflecting mirror 3145 and the small cover member 3123 rotate together with the rotating ring 3144. .

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, the surrounding member 3113 is disposed so as to surround the rear half portion of the large-side cover member 3122 from the rear side, and the inner surface thereof is subjected to light-reflecting surface 3113 a by plating. Is formed. That is, when the projection direction of the light emitted from the large-side cover member 3122 faces the rear side (that is, the side opposite to the player), the light is reflected to the player side by the light reflecting surface 3113a of the surrounding member 3113. It is possible to make it. Therefore, even when the light emitted from the large side cover member 3122 faces the rear side, the light is reflected from the large side cover member 3122 by reflecting the light to the player side by the light reflecting surface 3113a of the surrounding member 3113. It makes it possible for the player to recognize that the light is shining and to further enhance the visual interest and decoration.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 139, the back lens member 3114 is disposed behind the enclosing member 3113, and can guide the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3115 to a predetermined part of the enclosing member 3113. ing. Specifically, the rear lens member 3114 protrudes forward from the front surface of the support portion 3114a that supports the enclosure member 3113 and the light emitting substrate 3115 and the support portion 3114a, and enters the through hole 3113c formed in the enclosure member 3113 from the rear side. And a rod-shaped light guiding portion 3114b to be inserted. By projecting light from the tip of the light guiding portion 3114b, the large-side cover member 3122 can be irradiated with light. For this reason, the large-side cover member 3122 can be lifted brightly, and the player's attention can be further attracted.

  By the way, since the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 rotate integrally with the reflecting mirrors 3139 and 3145, they are supported in a floating state so as not to cause sliding resistance. However, according to this, the base member 3110 and the rotating unit 3112 are exposed from the lower side of the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123, and there is a possibility that the appearance is impaired. On the other hand, in this example, a lower decorative member 3116 that covers the lower side of the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 is provided. The lower decorative member 3116 includes an attachment portion 3116a attached to the bottom surface of the base member 3110, and a decorative portion 3116b that covers the outer periphery of the lower ends of the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 from the front. For this reason, exposure of the base member 3110 or the rotation unit 3112 can be prevented, and the deterioration of appearance can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 138, the small unit portion 3102 includes a rotating body decorative body 3162 and an enclosure unit 3163 disposed on the rear side. As shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, the rotating body decorative body 3162 includes a thin box-like base member 3165 having an open upper surface, a base cover 3166 that covers the upper surface of the base member 3165 and has an opening 3166a, and a base And a light emission rotating portion 3167 disposed on the member 3165. The light emitting rotation unit 3167 is fitted on the lens 3168 and the light emitting substrate 3171 accommodated in the accommodating portion 3165a of the base member 3165, the lens 3168 attached to the base member 3165 so as to cover the light emitting substrate 3171 from above. A rotating ring 3169 that is rotatably supported by the rotating ring 3169, and a reflecting mirror 3170 that is connected to the upper surface of the rotating ring 3169 and has a reflecting surface 3170a that reflects light irradiated from below through the lens 3168 in the horizontal direction on the inner surface. Yes. The rotating body decorative body 3162 covers the lens 3168 and the reflecting mirror 3170 of the light emitting rotating unit 3167 from above, and is attached to the cover member 3172 connected to the connecting portion 3170b of the reflecting mirror 3170 and the top of the cover member 3172. An upper decorative member 3173, a lower decorative member 3174 that is attached to the bottom surface of the base member 3165 and covers the lower part of the light emitting rotating part 3167 from the front side, and a driving means 3175 that applies a rotational force to the light emitting rotating part 3167. And a photosensor 3178 for detecting the rotational position (origin position) of the rotating ring 3169. The driving means 3175 is arranged in a motor 3176 attached to the bottom surface of the base member 3165 from the lower side and a left housing portion 3165b of the base member 3165, and a motor gear 3177 connected to the rotation shaft of the motor 3176. It consists of and. The motor gear 3177 is meshed with teeth 3169a formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating ring 3169 so that the rotational force of the motor 3176 can be transmitted to the rotating ring 3169. Note that these configurations are the same as the configurations of the large unit portion 3101, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here. Here, the lens 3168 corresponds to the support portion of the present invention, and the light emitting substrate 3171 corresponds to the light emitting portion of the present invention.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 146, the enclosure unit 3163 includes an enclosure member 3180 and a back lens member 3181 and a light emitting substrate 3182 disposed on the rear side. The enclosing member 3180 includes a spherical left concave surface portion 3180a and a right concave surface portion that respectively cover the cover member 3172 (see FIG. 145) of the light emission rotation portion 3167 and the small side cover member 3123 of the small light emission rotation portion 3121 (see FIG. 139). 3180b, and a light reflecting surface is formed on the left concave surface portion 3180a and the right concave surface portion 3180b by plating. A plurality of through holes 3180c penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the left concave surface portion 3180a and the right concave surface portion 3180b. On the other hand, the back lens member 3181 is provided with a plurality of columnar light guiding portions 3181a that are inserted into the through-hole portions 3180c of the enclosure member 3180 from the rear side. In other words, the cover member 3172 and the small cover member 3123 can be irradiated with light by projecting the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3182 from the tip of the light guiding portion 3181a.

  As described above, in this example, by providing the plurality of cover members 3122, 3123, and 3172 having substantially the same external shape and different sizes, it is possible to perform a powerful performance, and the contents of the notification information It becomes possible to associate (for example, the height of expectation) and the size of the cover members 3122, 3123, 3172 to be rotated, and it is possible to further enhance the effect in the upper accessory unit 3100.

  The winning device unit 2100 of this example has stop control means for stopping the rotation at a predetermined position after rotating the cover members 3122, 3123, 3172, and the cover members 3122, 3123, 3172. The position where the irradiation area is directed to the player side (the position shown in FIG. 142 (a)) is stopped as the origin position. For this reason, even when the light emission operation is started simultaneously with the rotation operation of the cover members 3122, 3123, 3172 and the reflecting mirrors 3139, 3145, 3170, or when the light emission is started earlier than the rotation operation, light is projected toward the player. It is possible to start the production from the lighted state, that is, the state where the player feels the brightest, thereby increasing the stimulation to the player and increasing the impact.

  Next, the left accessory unit 3200 will be described. The left accessory unit 3200 includes a movable ornament body 3202, and as shown in FIG. 108 and FIG. 148 (a), at least most of the movable ornament body 3202 is shielded by the game panel 1200 and the center accessory 2400. As shown in FIGS. 166 and 148 (b), it is possible to move between the stand-by position and the effect position where at least the most part is visible through the opening window 2400 a of the center accessory 2400.

  As shown in FIGS. 147 and 149, the left accessory unit 3200 includes a base plate 3201, a movable decorative body 3202 supported so as to be movable with respect to the base plate 3201, and a movable decorative body 3202 attached to the base plate 3201. And a driving unit cover 3204 that covers the base plate 3201 from the front side. Note that two light emitting substrates 3205 and 3206 for irradiating light to the side decoration unit 2300 (see FIG. 128) described above are attached to the front surface of the drive unit cover 3204.

  As shown in FIGS. 150 and 151, the movable decorative body 3202 includes a movable part ornament 3210 whose upper side simulates the shape of a lamp and whose lower side simulates a pedestal, and a lens disposed on the rear side of the movable part ornament 3210. A member 3211, a light emitting substrate 3212 that irradiates the lens member 3211 with light from behind, a back cover 3213 that closes the rear surface in a state where the lens member 3211 and the light emitting substrate 3212 are accommodated between the movable portion ornament 3210, and a movable portion ornament A gear 3214 attached from the rear side is provided at the lower part of 3210.

  The movable part decoration 3210 has a through hole 3210a in the lower part that matches a center hole 3214a formed at the rotation center of the gear 3214, and includes one large window part 3210b and three small window parts 3210c into which the lens member 3211 is inserted. Are formed penetrating in the front-rear direction. The large window portion 3210b is arranged at the center portion of the lamp shape formed on the upper side, and the small window portion 3210c is arranged side by side on the right end portion of the pedestal shape formed on the lower side. A screw hole P is formed in the lower left portion of the movable part decoration 3210.

  The lens member 3211 is formed of a light-transmitting member, and includes a disk-shaped first light emitting part 3220 inserted into the large window part 3210b of the movable part decoration 3210, and three second parts inserted into the small window parts 3210c. A light emitting portion 3221. Further, the lens member 3211 is provided with a third light emitting unit 3222 at a position protruding from the tip of the lamp-shaped portion of the movable part decoration 3210 so that the lens member 3211 can be visually recognized in a state of protruding from the tip of the movable part decoration 3210. It has become.

  The light emitting substrate 3212 irradiates the lens member 3211 with light from behind, and is disposed at a position facing the first light emitting unit 3220, the second light emitting unit 3221, and the third light emitting unit 3222 of the lens member 3211. A plurality of light emitting diodes 3212a, 3212b, and 3212c are mounted.

  A through hole 3213a is formed in the back cover 3213 at a portion corresponding to the screw hole P of the movable part decoration 3210, and a bush 3215 is inserted from the rear. That is, as shown in FIG. 150, with the movable decorative body 3202 disposed on the front side of the base plate 3201, the bush 3215 is inserted into the arcuate guide hole 3201 a formed at the top of the base plate 3201 from the rear, The bush 3215 is attached to the back surface of the movable decorative body 3202 by bringing the bush 3215 into contact with the screw hole P through the through hole 3213a of the back cover 3213 and further fastening the bush 3215 with a screw (not shown). . Here, since the diameter of the flange 3215a of the bush 3215 is larger than the groove width of the guide hole 3201a, the moving direction of the movable decorative body 3202 is limited by the bush 3215, and it slides along the guide hole 3201a. Yes. In addition, the guide hole 3201a is formed along the circular arc centering on the bearing part 3201b mentioned later.

  The gear 3214 has a fan shape, and a center hole 3214a is externally fitted to an annular bearing portion 3201b formed in the base plate 3201. That is, it can be rotated around the bearing portion 3201b. Further, a tooth portion 3214 b is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the gear 3214 and meshes with the transmission gear 3232 of the drive mechanism 3203. The base plate 3201 is also formed with a pair of stoppers 3201g that limit the rotation range of the gear 3214 when the gear 3214 hits. Further, a detection piece 3214c for detecting the origin position of the gear 3214 by the photo sensor 3233 is formed at the outer peripheral end of the gear 3214.

  The drive mechanism 3203 includes a motor 3230 attached to the rear surface of the base plate 3201 and having the rotation shaft 3230a inserted through the through hole 3201d of the base plate 3201, and a motor gear 3231 connected to the rotation shaft 3230a from the front side of the base plate 3201. , And a transmission gear 3232 that is pivotally supported by a rotating shaft portion 3201c formed slightly lower left than the center portion of the base plate 3201 and meshed with a motor gear 3231 and a gear 3214. That is, when the motor 3230 is operated, the rotational force is transmitted to the gear 3214 via the motor gear 3231 and the transmission gear 3232, and the gear 3214 and the movable decorative body 3202 are rotated around the bearing portion 3201b.

  By the way, the movable decorative body 3202 of the left accessory unit 3200 is disposed behind the center accessory 2400 (see FIG. 108), particularly behind the warp passage 2402, when it is in the standby position, It becomes difficult to see. On the other hand, the details of the warp passage 2402 are as described above. However, since the general warp passage is hidden in the center accessory 2400, even if a game ball is taken into the warp passage, I couldn't notice that, and as a result, I couldn't draw attention to the warp passage. Therefore, if the warp passage is formed of a transparent member, the inside of the warp passage can be visually recognized, and it can be recognized whether or not a game ball is taken into the warp passage. Further, if the transparent warp passage is irradiated with light from the rear to emit light, the warp passage can be made conspicuous. That is, although it is formed of a transparent member, it is possible to produce decorativeness and presence in the warp passage.

  However, in order to employ the above-described configuration, the light emitting means must be provided behind the warp passage. According to this, the configuration around the warp passage becomes complicated and the manufacturing cost increases. Further, in a gaming machine including a movable accessory (for example, the left accessory unit 3200) in the back unit, the space behind the center accessory 2400 is used as an accommodation space for the accessory, so the arrangement space for the light emitting means is reduced. It may be difficult to ensure.

  In contrast, in this example, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), the movable decorative body 3202 at the standby position is disposed behind the warp passage 2402, and the first light emitting unit 3220 provided in the movable decorative body 3202 is provided. The second light emitting unit 3221 emits light not only when the movable decorative body 3202 is in the effect position (see FIG. 148 (b)) but also when in the standby position (see FIG. 148 (a)). For this reason, when the movable decorative body 3202 is in the standby position, the light emitted from the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 is irradiated to the rear surface of the warp passage 2402 and passes through the transparent warp passage 2402 to the player side. Lighted. That is, the warp passage 2402 can be decorated with light emitted from the light emitted from the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221. In this way, by using the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 at the standby position, the warp passage 2402 can be illuminated without providing a dedicated light emitting means, and the warp passage 2402 is simple and inexpensive. The decorativeness can be improved.

  In particular, in this example, since the warp passage 2402 is formed of a transparent member, a game ball passing through the warp passage 2402 can be visually recognized more clearly. Further, the light transmittance in the warp passage 2402 is increased, and the light intensity of the first light emitting part 3220 and the second light emitting part 3221 is compared even when the size of the first light emitting part 3220 and the second light emitting part 3221 is relatively small. Even when the temperature is low, the warp passage 2402 can be brightly illuminated by the light emitted from the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221.

  As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, a warp decoration 2425 that has at least one window 2425 a and does not transmit light is provided on the front side of the warp passage 2402 so as to cover a part of the warp passage 2402. It has been. That is, in the portion where the warp ornament 2425 is provided, the light that has passed through the warp passage 2402 is projected to the player side through the window 2425a. For this reason, the light emission decoration by the warp passage 2402 and the decoration by the warp decoration 2425 can be combined, and the decorativeness can be further enhanced. In addition, by providing the warp ornament 2425, a portion that can be visually recognized in the warp passage 2402 is limited, and thus it is difficult to grasp the appearance of the movable decorative body 3202. That is, it is possible to suppress the movable decorative body 3202 from being visually recognized as the background of the warp passage 2402. When the movable decorative body 3202 is in the standby position, the window 2425a of the warp decoration 2425 and the first light emitting portion 3220 of the movable decorative body 3202 overlap in the front-rear direction. For this reason, a part of the warp passage 2402 that can be visually recognized through the window portion 2425a can be efficiently illuminated.

  Further, three second light emitting portions 3221 are provided, and these are arranged so as to be aligned in a line along the warp passage 2402 when the movable decorative body 3202 is in the standby position (see FIG. 148 (a)). ). For this reason, even if the movable decorative body 3202 and the warp passage 2402 are disposed close to each other, the entire warp passage 2402 can be illuminated brightly and uniformly. In addition, since the light reflecting portion is formed on the front surface of the movable decorative body 3202, a portion other than the first light emitting portion 3220 and the second light emitting portion 3221, that is, a portion that does not emit light can be made to glitter. And the decorativeness of the warp passage 2402 can be further enhanced.

  Further, in this example, when the movable decorative body 3202 moves from the standby position to the effect position, or when moving from the effect position to the standby position, the light emission states of the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 are temporarily interrupted. In other words, it is controlled to turn off once. Therefore, the continuity between the light emission control at the standby position and the light emission control at the effect position is lost, and the first light emitting part 3220 and the second light emitting part 3221 of the movable decorative body 3202 are used as light emitting means for irradiating the warp passage 2402 with light. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that he / she is using. Therefore, it is possible to prevent arousing unnaturalness and arousing the suspicion that “the device does not move due to a failure” with respect to the fact that the movable decorative body 3202 emits light at the standby position.

  By the way, the movable decorative body 3202 has a constantly exposed portion that is visible through the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400 even in the standby position. Further, the third light emitting portion 3222 is also provided as a light emitting decoration portion in this constantly exposed portion, and it is possible to make the light emitting decoration during the production operation. However, in this example, there is a light emission restricting means, and when the movable decorative body 3202 is in the standby position, the light emission of the third light emitting unit 3222 arranged at the constantly exposed portion is prohibited. In other words, the third light emitting unit 3222 that is not located behind the warp passage 2402 and is directly visible from the player side in the standby position is kept off without being emitted. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the movable decorative body 3202 is used as the light emitting means for irradiating light to the warp passage 2402, and not to cause unnaturalness and suspicion. it can.

  Next, the right hand accessory unit 3300 will be described. The right accessory unit 3300 includes a movable ornament 3302, and as shown in FIGS. 108 and 153 (a), at least most of the movable ornament 3202 is shielded by the game panel 1200 and the center accessory 2400. As shown in FIGS. 167 and 153 (b), it is possible to move between the stand-by position and the effect position where at least most of the center role is visible through the opening window 2400 a of the center accessory 2400.

  As shown in FIGS. 152 and 154, the right accessory unit 3300 is disposed on the base member 3301 having a U-shape in front view, a movable decorative body 3302 supported so as to be movable with respect to the base member 3301, and the base member 3301. And a drive mechanism 3303 for operating the movable decorative body 3302. A gear cover 3304 that covers the drive mechanism 3303 from the front side is provided on the upper front surface of the base member 3301, and a lower cover 3305 and a light emitting substrate 3306 are provided on the lower front surface of the base member 3301.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the movable decorative body 3302 includes a movable part main body 3310 that imitates the character's torso and face, and a movable arm part 3311 that imitates the character's arm part. The movable arm portion 3311 can be rotated with respect to. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the movable part main body 3310 includes a light-transmitting character base 3320, a body part 3321 attached to the front side of the character base 3320, and a body part 3321. A face portion 3322 attached to the upper attachment portion 3321b from the front side, and a light emitting substrate 3323 arranged on the rear side of the character base 3320 to irradiate the character base 3320 with light from the rear, are provided. The portion 3322 can be decorated with light emission.

  A bearing portion 3320a that protrudes forward and is inserted into the opening 3321a of the trunk portion 3321 is provided on the front right side of the character base 3320, and a central bush 3326 is fitted into the bearing portion 3320a from the front side. An upper sliding portion 3320b having an L-shaped vertical cross section is formed at the upper end of the character base 3320, and the upper sliding portion 3320b is a guide formed on the back surface of an upper cover 3345 (see FIG. 159) described later. The protrusion 3320d protruding rearward from the upper sliding portion 3320b is inserted into a guide groove 3301e (see FIG. 159) formed in the upper portion of the base member 3301. Thus, the upper end of the character base 3320 is slidably supported along the guide groove 3301e. Note that a plate-like slide rib 3324 is attached to the rear surface of the upper sliding portion 3320b, and stable sliding is possible by contacting the wall surface 3301b around the guide groove 3301e.

  In addition, a lower sliding portion 3320c having an L-shaped cross section is formed at the lower end of the character base 3320, and is hooked by a guide portion (not shown) formed on the back surface of the lower cover 3305 (see FIG. 154). And a pair of bushes 3325 respectively connected to both ends of the rear surface of the lower sliding portion 3320c are inserted into two guide grooves 3301i and 3301h (see FIG. 159) formed in the lower portion of the base member 3301. The lower end of the character base 3320 is slidably supported along the guide grooves 3301i and 3301h. In the base member 3301, the partition wall 3301j forming the guide grooves 3301i and 3301h protrudes forward, and the panel presser 3327 attached to the central portion in the left-right direction of the lower sliding portion 3320c is the lower surface of the partition wall 3301j. Slidable contact with each other enables stable sliding.

  As shown in FIGS. 156 and 158, the movable arm portion 3311 includes an arm ornament 3330, a light-transmitting lens portion 3331 disposed on the rear side thereof, and a light emitting substrate 3332 that irradiates the lens portion 3331 with light from behind. It is composed of The arm ornament 3330 is provided with two window portions 3330a, and a light emitting portion 3331b formed on the lens portion 3331 is inserted from the rear side. Further, the rear surface of the lens portion 3331 corresponding to the bearing portion 3320a is formed with two protruding portions 3331b protruding rearward, and these protruding portions 3331b are stoppers disposed on the rear side of the movable portion main body 3310. The member 3313 is inserted into the through hole 3313 a and connected to the bush 3314. That is, as shown in FIG. 155, the movable arm portion 3311 is supported by the stop member 3313, and the two bushes 3314 protrude rearward from the back surface of the stop member 3313.

  As shown in FIGS. 154 and 159, the drive mechanism 3303 is provided on a rotating shaft 3340 a of a motor 3340 attached to the upper rear surface of the base member 3301 and a through hole 3301 f formed in the base member 3301. A motor gear 3341 connected from the front side of the base member 3301 and a movable link 3342 connected to a rotary shaft portion 3301g formed on the base member 3301 via a bush 3343 and supported so as to be rotatable about the rotary shaft portion 3301g. And a photosensor 3346 for detecting that the rotational position of the movable link 3342 has reached the origin position.

  The movable link 3342 extends from the center hole 3342b in the centrifugal direction, a center hole 3342b fitted around the bush 3343, a gear portion 3342c formed on an arc centered on the center hole 3342b and meshed with the motor gear 3341. In addition, an arm 3342a whose tip is curved downward, and a connecting portion 3342d connected to a pair of bushes 3314 (see FIG. 155) formed at the tip of the arm 3342a and protruding from the back surface of the movable arm 3311 are provided. .

  According to this, when the rotational force of the motor 3340 is transmitted to the movable link 3342 via the motor gear 3341, the movable link 3342 rotates around the center hole 3342b, and the state shown in FIG. The state changes to that shown in FIG. At this time, the pair of bushes 3314 slides in the linear guide groove 3342e formed in the connecting portion 3342d, and the inclination of the guide groove 3342e changes as the movable link 3342 rotates in the clockwise direction. For this reason, the movable arm portion 3311 rotates in the clockwise direction. On the other hand, the movable portion main body 3310 slides along the arc-shaped guide grooves 3301e on the upper end side and slides along the arc-shaped guide grooves 3301i and 3301h on the upper end side, so as shown in FIG. As the center of rotation is located below the accessory unit 3300, the upper unit varies greatly. For this reason, the movable decorative body 3302 performs the action of pushing the body forward while raising the fist to the height of the shoulder like a guts pose, greatly enhancing the character's dynamic feeling and presence, It can enhance interest. In particular, since such a movement is performed by one movable link 3342, the configuration of the drive mechanism 3303 can be simple and inexpensive.

  Note that a pair of stoppers 3345a are provided on the front surface of the upper cover 3345, and the rotation range of the movable link 3342 is restricted by contacting the arm 3342a of the movable link 3342. In addition, a spacer 3344 is provided on the rear side of the arm 3342a, and the interval between the arm 3342a and the base member 3301 is kept constant.

  Next, the logo display unit 3400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 160, the logo display unit 3400 is visible through the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400, and is disposed below the upper accessory unit 3100 (see FIG. 135). The logo display unit 3400 has a plurality of three-dimensionally shaped character parts (first character part 3400a to sixth character part 3400f), and a logo indicating the model name, title name, and the like is displayed. ing. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, the logo display unit 3400 includes a first character portion 3400a, a second character portion 3400b, a third character portion 3400c, a fourth character portion 3400d, and a fifth character in order from the left side. A horizontally long logo decoration portion 3401 having a portion 3400e and a sixth character portion 3400f is provided. The logo decoration part 3401 is arranged so as to protrude toward the player side, and as shown in FIG. 160 (a), by looking up the logo decoration part 3401 from below, the amount of protrusion of the logo decoration part 3401 can be grasped. Is possible. Here, the logo display unit 3400 corresponds to the character-shaped decorative body of the present invention, and the logo decorative portion 3401 corresponds to the character decorative portion of the present invention.

  By the way, it is difficult to give a three-dimensional impression even if it is configured so that the front surface protrudes to the player side in the case where the entire front surface is formed flat like a well-known character-shaped decorative body, As a result, it was not possible to make a big impact on the player. In addition, the character part displayed by the character decoration is designed like a logo, and when adjacent characters are close to each other, the separation between the character parts becomes unclear, It was difficult to accurately grasp the appearance of the characters.

  On the other hand, in the logo display unit 3400 of this example, the forward protrusion amount (projection amount) of the logo decoration portion 3401 is different for each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f. For this reason, the logo decoration part 3401 can be captured three-dimensionally for each of the character parts 3400a to 3400f, and the three-dimensional effect of the logo decoration part 3401 can be enhanced. Further, since the front face of the logo decoration portion 3401 is formed in a staircase shape, the separation of the character portions 3400a to 3400f becomes clear, and the appearance of each character portion 3400a to 3400f can be accurately grasped. It becomes. Furthermore, it is possible to arouse an image in which the character portion 3400a on the left end side starts at the head and the character portion pops out to the player side, and the impact given to the player by powerful decoration can be increased.

  In the logo decoration portion 3401, an overlapping portion 3400w (see FIG. 161) is provided between adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f, and a part of each character portion 3400a to 3400f overlaps in the front-rear direction. Yes. For this reason, the plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f are arranged in a lump shape, and the sense of unity can be enhanced. In the overlapping portion 3400w, the character portion with the larger protruding amount (the character portion on the left side) is extended, so which of the adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f protrudes toward the player side. Can be grasped from the front shapes of the respective character portions 3400a to 3400f.

  Further, the logo decoration portion 3401 has not only the forward protrusion amount but also the size (front surface area) of each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f, and the front surface gradually increases from the right end side to the left end side. It is formed to be large. That is, the size of the character increases as the character portion projects to the player side. For this reason, it is possible to generate a sense of perspective by the size of the character portions 3400a to 3400f, and to make the step between the adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f feel larger than actual, and to further enhance the three-dimensional impression. .

  Further, the protruding amount of the logo decoration portion 3401 is the smallest at the sixth character portion 3400f corresponding to the last character and the largest at the first character portion 3400a corresponding to the first character. In other words, among the plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f, the character portion that attracts the player's attention most, that is, the most prominent first character portion 3400a is the first character. Therefore, the player can naturally understand a character language (model name, title name, etc.) composed of a series of characters by visually checking each character portion 3400a-3400f in the order in which attention is drawn. Become.

  By the way, in the case where the logo display unit 3400 is arranged on the rear side of the center accessory 2400 as described above, the logo decoration portion 3401 is made visible through the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400. The overall size is the size that can be accommodated in the opening window 2400a when viewed from the player side. Therefore, even if the amount of protrusion is changed between the character portions 3400a to 3400f, there is a risk of lack of force because the protrusion to the player side is insufficient. In particular, when the number of character portions 3400a to 3400f included in the logo decoration portion 3401 is relatively large, the size of each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f is reduced, which is unsatisfactory.

  On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIG. 160, a logo front ornament 2420 (described above based on FIG. 130) is attached to the upper left side of the front surface of the center accessory 2400. It is disposed adjacent to the left end side of the portion 3401. A single character language (model name, title name, etc.) is formed by combining the logo front decoration 2420 and a series of character portions 3400a to 3400f in the logo decoration portion 3401. Therefore, it is possible to display the character language by protruding the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400, and it is possible to further enhance the stereoscopic effect and the force.

  As described above, the center accessory 2400 is provided with the upper right decorative unit 2413, and the right end side of the logo decorative portion 3401 is located behind the upper right decorative unit 2413. For this reason, the right end side of the logo decoration part 3401 can give the impression arrange | positioned more back, and, as a result, the extent of the logo front decoration 2420 can be shown relatively large. Here, the upper right decorative unit 2413 corresponds to the decorative member of the present invention.

  In particular, since the protruding amount of the upper right decorative unit 2413 is substantially equal to the protruding amount of the logo front ornament 2420, the portion having the smallest protruding amount between the sixth character portion 3400f on the one end side and the upper right decorative unit 2413. Therefore, the depth of the sixth character portion 3400f can be greatly increased by rapidly changing to a portion having the largest protrusion amount.

  Further, as described above, since the logo lens 2432 that imitates the character is also provided in the upper right decoration unit 2413, the plurality of character parts 3400a to 3400f in the logo decoration part 3401 are associated with the upper right decoration unit 2413. The impression that these are comprised with one unit can be given. Therefore, the step between the sixth character portion 3400f and the upper right decorative unit 2413 can be emphasized, and the overall stereoscopic effect can be further enhanced. Here, the logo lens 2432 corresponds to the decorative character portion of the present invention.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 110, an upper accessory unit 3100 that is visible through the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400 is provided on the upper side of the logo display unit 3400. Thus, a dynamic feeling can be given to the logo display unit 3400, and more powerful decoration can be performed. In addition, a three-dimensional effect can be generated in the upper accessory unit 3100 and its effect area by the three-dimensionally shaped logo decoration portion 3401. Here, the upper accessory unit 3100 corresponds to the movable decorative body of the present invention.

  In particular, the upper accessory unit 3100 includes a plurality of decorative parts having the same or similar appearance (specifically, a large-side light-emitting rotating part 3120, a small-side light-emitting rotating part 3121, and a rotating body decorative body shown in FIG. 137). 3162) is arranged along the direction in which the character portions 3400a to 3400f are arranged, it is possible to further enhance the sense of unity of the upper accessory unit 3100 and the logo display unit 3400 and to give a great impact. Further, the larger the protruding amount of the character portions 3400a to 3400f in the logo decoration portion 3401, the smaller the size of the upper decoration portion (large-side light emission rotation portion 3120, small-side light emission rotation portion 3121, rotation body decoration body 3162). Therefore, even if the sizes of the character portions 3400a to 3400f (the size of the front surface) are all equal, the first character portion 3400a on the left end side can be seen to be relatively large by being visually recognized together with these decorative portions. As a result, the step between the adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f can be felt larger than it actually is.

  By the way, when arranging a plurality of decorative parts (large side light emitting rotating part 3120, small side light emitting rotating part 3121, and rotating body decorative body 3162) having different sizes in this way, the respective centers are aligned in the left-right direction. In the case of the arrangement, the smaller the decorative portion (rotating body decorative body 3162), the smaller the forward protrusion amount. In other words, the amount of protrusion of the plurality of decorative portions gradually decreases from the right end side to the left end side, which is opposite to the shape of the logo decorative portion 3401 (that is, the shape in which the amount of forward protrusion gradually increases). It becomes the form. Therefore, according to this, the sense of unity between the logo display unit 3400 and the upper accessory unit 3100 may be lost.

  On the other hand, the decorative portions (large-side light emitting rotating portion 3120, small-side light emitting rotating portion 3121, and rotating body decorative body 3162) of this example are arranged so that the positions of the front ends in the front-rear direction are equal to each other, that is, aligned at the front ends. Therefore, there is no sense of incongruity between the logo display unit 3400 and the upper accessory unit 3100, and it can be recognized as an integral unit.

  Moreover, in each decoration part (large side light emission rotation part 3120, small side light emission rotation part 3121, rotary body decoration body 3162), as mentioned above, a cover member (specifically, the large side shown in FIG. 139 etc.) Since the cover member 3122, the small cover member 3123, and the cover member 3172) rotate, it is possible to make the depth of the logo display unit 3400 look very large. In particular, a cover member (large side cover member 3122, small side cover member 3123, cover member 3172) is provided behind the decorative body (large side light emitting rotating unit 3120, small side light emitting rotating unit 3121, rotating body decorative body 3162). Since the surrounding members 3113 and 3180 are disposed from the rear side, the space behind the decorative portion (large-side light emitting rotating portion 3120, small-side light emitting rotating portion 3121 and rotating body decorative body 3162) is visually recognized as a production space. As a result, the depth in the depth direction can be impressed on the logo decoration portion 3401 of the logo display unit 3400 arranged on the lower side.

  Furthermore, since the logo display unit 3400 of this example is disposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect image displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the three-dimensional logo decoration portion 3401 It is visually recognized by overlapping in the direction. Therefore, the logo decoration part 3401 can be made conspicuous, and the three-dimensional effect of the logo decoration part 3401 can be further enhanced.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 162, the logo display unit 3400 of this example is disposed behind the logo decoration unit 3401 with the light diffusion sheet 3403 disposed on the rear side of the logo decoration unit 3401 and the light diffusion sheet 3403 interposed therebetween. And a left light emitting substrate 3405 and a right light emitting substrate 3406 that irradiate light from behind to the light diffusion sheet 3403 through the sheet retainer 3404. In addition, a horizontally long rectangular upper window 3401b penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided on the upper right side of the logo decoration portion 3401, and a lens-shaped logo portion 3402 is fitted from the front. Here, the left side light emitting substrate 3405 and the right side light emitting substrate 3406 correspond to the light emitting means of the present invention.

  Further, the sheet presser 3404 includes a character frame portion 3404a corresponding to the logo decoration portion 3401, a window frame shape portion 3404b corresponding to the upper window 3401b, and a support portion 3404c corresponding to the upper left decoration unit 2411 (see FIG. 130). The light emitted from the left side light emitting substrate 3405 and the right side light emitting substrate 3406 is efficiently applied to the rear surface of the light diffusion sheet 3403, the lens-shaped logo portion 3402, and the light diffusion sheet 2421 (see FIG. 130). It has become so. As described above, the logo decoration unit 3401 is decorated with light emitted from the left light emitting substrate 3405 and the right light emitting substrate 3406, so that the logo display unit 3400 can be made more conspicuous. In particular, since light is diffused by the light diffusing sheet 3403, each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f can be shined without any spots, and although it is a flat surface, it appears that there is a step due to the brightness of the light. It can prevent that the level | step difference between adjacent character part 3400a-3400f will become relatively inconspicuous.

  In particular, in the left light emitting substrate 3405 and the right light emitting substrate 3406, a plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f can be caused to emit light separately by controlling a plurality of light emitting sources (LEDs) separately. For this reason, the division of each character part 3400a-3400f becomes clearer, and it becomes possible to attract a player's attention. In particular, the respective character portions 3400a to 3400f can be lit in order from the first character portion 3400a on the left end side toward the sixth character portion 3400f on the right end side. According to this, each character portion 3400a to 3400f can be lit. The order in which 3400f should be grasped (that is, the order of reading) is further clarified, and the player can be surely impressed with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the like.

  Next, the back shelf decoration unit 3502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 163, the back shelf decoration unit 3502 is arranged behind the transparent rear shelf cover 2404 in the center accessory 2400 (see FIG. 129), and can be visually recognized through the rear shelf cover 2404. Yes. The shelf interior decoration unit 3502 includes a base member 3530, an annular large frame portion 3531a attached to the central opening 3530a of the base member 3530, and left and right recessed portions 3530b of the base member 3530 extending outward from the left and right sides. , 3530c, and a decorative frame 3531 composed of a small frame connecting portion 3531b. Further, the back of the shelf decoration unit 3502 is fitted into the jewel-shaped decoration portion 3532 fitted into the large frame portion 3531a from the rear side of the decoration frame 3531 and the small frame connecting portion 3531b, and performs display according to the number of times the big hit lottery is held. The left retaining lens 3534 and the right retaining lens 3535, the diffusion lens 3533 disposed on the rear side of the jewel-shaped decoration portion 3532, and the rear surface of the base member 3530. A light emitting substrate 3536 for irradiating light to the lens 3534 and the right holding lens 3535 is provided. Note that a reflector 3537 is disposed between the light emitting substrate 3536 and the recess 3530b of the base member 3530, so that light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3536 can be efficiently irradiated to the left holding lens 3534. ing.

  The upper accessory unit 3100, the left accessory unit 3200, the right accessory unit 3300, the logo display unit 3400, and the back shelf decoration unit 3502 housed in the back box 3001 have been described in detail above. FIG. As described above, a ball guiding unit 3501 is further accommodated in the lower part of the back box 3001, and a left relay board 3508 is accommodated on the upper left side of the back box 3001. A display unit 3511 including a lower relay substrate 3509, a right relay substrate 3510, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 is disposed on the rear surface of the back box 3001. Hereinafter, these configurations will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 164, the ball guiding unit 3501 includes a left winning portion 3520 and a right guiding portion 3521 for guiding a winning game ball to the general winning holes 2105 and 2106 (see FIG. 115), the first starting opening 2101 and the like. Have. The left guiding unit 3520 and the right guiding unit 3521 include a general winning port sensor 3522 for detecting a game ball won in the general winning ports 2105 and 2106 and a first detecting ball for the first starting port 2101. A start port sensor 3524 is provided. In addition, a magnetic detection sensor 3523 is also provided in the left guide portion 3520 and the right guide portion 3521, and an illegal game using a magnet or the like can be detected.

  As shown in FIG. 164, around the sphere guiding unit 3501, three light emitting substrates, that is, a left light emitting substrate 3503, a lower light emitting substrate 3506, and a right light emitting substrate 3507 are arranged. These light-emitting substrates 3503, 3506, and 3507 irradiate the winning device unit 2100 (FIG. 115) disposed in the front with light so that the large window portion 2110f and the small window portion 2110g of the base member 2110 (FIG. 119) are illuminated. It is something to be made. Although details will be described later, the left relay board 3508, the right relay board 3510, and the lower relay board 3509 relay a drive signal of a motor or the like provided in the back unit 3000.

  As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the display unit 3511 has a liquid crystal display device 1900 that can be seen through the opening 3001 c of the back box 3001, and a protective plate 3540 is provided on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Yes. In addition, attachment members 3542 are provided on the left and right side surfaces of the liquid crystal display device 1900, are detachably attached to the back surface of the back box 3001, and are fixed by a lock member 3512. In addition, a liquid crystal back cover 3544 having a liquid crystal power supply substrate 3545 is disposed on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a peripheral control substrate 4010 accommodated in the substrate cover 3547 is disposed on the rear side of the liquid crystal back cover 3544. A control board set plate 3546 is mounted. A harness cover 3549 is also attached to the substrate cover 3547.

[3. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the logo display unit 3400 has three character portions 3400a to 3400f three-dimensionally because the forward protrusion amounts of the character portions 3400a to 3400f are different from each other. The three-dimensional effect of the logo decoration portion 3401 can be enhanced. Further, since the front face of the logo decoration portion 3401 is formed in a staircase shape, the separation of the respective character portions 3400a to 3400f becomes clear, and the appearance of each character portion 3400a to 3400f can be accurately grasped. . Furthermore, it is possible to arouse an image in which the character portion 3400a on the left end side starts at the head and the character portion pops out to the player side, and the impact given to the player by powerful decoration can be increased.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the overlapping portion 3400w is provided between the adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f in the logo decoration portion 3401, a plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f are arranged in series. I can strongly impress that it represents the logo. Moreover, in the overlapping part 3400w, since the character part with the larger protrusion amount is extended and formed, which of the adjacent character parts 3400a to 3400f is protruding to the player side, respectively. Can be grasped from the front shape of the character portions 3400a to 3400f.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the logo decoration unit 3401 has a larger character size as the character portion is pushed out to the player side. Therefore, depending on the size of the character portions 3400a to 3400f. A sense of perspective can be generated, and the step between the adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f can be made larger than it actually is. Therefore, the three-dimensional impression of the logo decoration portion 3401 can be further enhanced.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the character portion that attracts the player's attention most among the plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f, that is, the first character portion 3400a that is most projected is the first character. Therefore, the player can naturally grasp a logo composed of a series of characters by visually recognizing each character portion 3400a to 3400f in the order in which attention is drawn.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the logo front ornament 2420 disposed on the upper left side of the front surface of the center accessory 2400 and the series of character portions 3400a to 3400f in the logo decoration portion 3401 are combined. Since two logos are formed, the logo can be displayed by protruding from the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400, and the stereoscopic effect and the force can be further enhanced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by placing the right end side of the logo decoration portion 3401 behind the upper right decoration unit 2413, an impression that the right end side of the logo decoration portion 3401 is arranged more rearward is obtained. As a result, the degree of protrusion of the logo front decoration 2420 can be made relatively large. In particular, since the protruding amount of the upper right decorative unit 2413 is substantially equal to the protruding amount of the logo front ornament 2420, the portion having the smallest protruding amount between the sixth character portion 3400f on the one end side and the upper right decorative unit 2413. Therefore, the depth of the sixth character portion 3400f can be greatly increased by rapidly changing to a portion having the largest protrusion amount. In addition, since the logo lens 2432 that imitates the character is also provided in the upper right decoration unit 2413, the plurality of character parts 3400a to 3400f in the logo decoration part 3401 are associated with the upper right decoration unit 2413, and these are one unit. The impression that it is comprised can be given. Therefore, the step between the sixth character portion 3400f and the upper right decorative unit 2413 can be emphasized, and the overall stereoscopic effect can be further enhanced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper accessory unit 3100 that is visible through the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400 is provided on the upper side of the logo display unit 3400. By making it visually recognized, it is possible to give a dynamic feeling to the logo display unit 3400 and to perform a more powerful decoration. In addition, a three-dimensional effect can be generated in the upper accessory unit 3100 and its effect area by the three-dimensionally shaped logo decoration portion 3401. In the upper accessory unit 3100, a plurality of decorative portions (large-side light emitting rotating portion 3120, small-side light emitting rotating portion 3121, and rotating body decorative body 3162) having the same or similar appearance are arranged in the character portions 3400a to 3400f. Since they are arranged along the direction, it is possible to further enhance the sense of unity of the upper accessory unit 3100 and the logo display unit 3400 and to give a great impact. Further, the larger the protruding amount of the character portions 3400a to 3400f in the logo decoration portion 3401, the smaller the size of the decoration portion on the upper side, so even if the sizes of the character portions 3400a to 3400f are all equal, By visually recognizing with the decoration part, it becomes possible to make the first character part 3400a on the left end side relatively large, and as a result, the step between the adjacent character parts 3400a to 3400f can be felt larger than the actual one.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the cover member (the large side cover member 3122, the small side light emitting rotating unit 3120, the small side light emitting rotating unit 3121, the rotating body decorative body 3162) is small in each decoration unit. Since the side cover member 3123 and the cover member 3172) rotate, the depth of the logo display unit 3400 can be seen to be extremely large. In particular, a cover member (large side cover member 3122, small side cover member 3123, cover member 3172) is provided behind the decorative body (large side light emitting rotating unit 3120, small side light emitting rotating unit 3121, rotating body decorative body 3162). Since the surrounding members 3113 and 3180 are disposed from the rear side, the space behind the decoration portion can be visually recognized as a production space, and the logo decoration portion of the logo display unit 3400 disposed below the decoration portion. 3401 can be impressed by the depth in the depth direction.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the logo display unit 3400 is disposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and therefore, an effect image displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a three-dimensional image. The logo decoration portion 3401 is visually recognized in the front-rear direction, making the logo decoration portion 3401 stand out, and further enhancing the stereoscopic effect of the logo decoration portion 3401.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the logo decoration unit 3401 is decorated with light emitted from the left light emitting substrate 3405 and the right light emitting substrate 3406, so that the logo display unit 3400 can be made more conspicuous. it can. In particular, since the light is diffused by the light diffusing sheet 3403, each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f can be shined without any spots. Therefore, it can be prevented that a step appears due to the brightness of light, that is, the step between adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f becomes relatively inconspicuous.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f are caused to emit light separately, the separation of the character portions 3400a to 3400f becomes clearer and attracts the player's attention. Can be attached. In particular, since the respective character portions 3400a to 3400f are turned on in order from the first character portion 3400a on the left end side toward the sixth character portion 3400f on the right end side, the order in which the character portions 3400a to 3400f should be grasped (that is, (Reading order) becomes clearer, and the concept of the pachinko machine 1 can be surely impressed.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the logo display unit 3400 is provided with the left light emitting substrate 3405 and the right light emitting substrate 3406 and the logo decoration portion 3401 is decorated with light emission. However, the logo display unit 3400 includes only the logo decoration portion 3401 and does not emit light. It may be.

  In the above embodiment, a plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f are arranged in the horizontal direction (that is, a horizontally written logo) as the logo decoration portion 3401. However, the plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f are arranged in the vertical direction. You may do it. In this case, since the character portion arranged at the top is the first character, it is preferable to arrange the character portion so as to protrude most to the player side.

[4. Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls game operations (game progress) and a payout control board 4110 that controls payout of game balls and the like. The peripheral control board 4010 group includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of the effect image.

[4-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 168, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g, and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”). . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100d”) and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and to prevent fraud. These functions are also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes a first start port sensor 3524 for detecting a game ball received in the first start port 2101 and a second start port sensor for detecting a game ball received in the second start port 2102. 2166, and detection signals from some of the general winning opening sensors 3522 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, or attached to the gate sensor 2176, the general winning opening sensor 3522, the count sensor 2160, and the back unit 3000, respectively. The detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 3523 is input via the panel relay board 3012 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, so that each solenoid 2128, 2141, 2156 via the panel relay board 3012. A first special symbol display 1185, a second special symbol display 1186, and a first special symbol memory via the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3012, and the function display board 1191. A drive signal is output to the display 1184, the second special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, and the fraud detection display 1190.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3524, the second start port sensor 2166, the gate sensor 2176, and the count sensor 2160 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. The general winning opening sensor 3522 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2107, so the first start port sensor 3524, the second start port sensor 2166, and The detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2176 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 3524, the second start port sensor 2166, and the gate sensor 2176. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the winning ball opening 2153 is opened and game balls frequently enter, and therefore, the detection of the game ball by the count sensor 2160 also frequently occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 2160. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3522 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2105 where game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning a prize opening sensor 3522.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to games (game information) and various commands related to payouts to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown)). The main control MPU 4100a, which will be described in detail later, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board 851 as described in detail later. The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. It is described.) BC0 (see FIG. 169) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851 and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning voltage when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[4-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 168, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like controls the payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls relating to payout and the firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and also sends the ball by the ball feeding solenoid 585. A launch control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error cancel switch 860a for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720, a tank rail 731 and a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game balls in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[4-2A. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 168, the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and an external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4111c” for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. A payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. It is equipped with. The payout control MPU 4111a includes a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), in order to prevent fraud. Functions etc. are also built-in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from 4100 being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the ball break switch 750 Detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the prize ball relay board 754.

  A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first sent via the sensor board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay board 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first supplied as a payout control input circuit. 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls is first sent to the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880 and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an error LED. A signal to be displayed on the machine 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is sent to the payout control I / O port 4111b. Or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and graphics. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and when the number “2” is displayed, (Specifically, on the basis of the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotating body 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. When When the number “3” is displayed (specifically, it is a “counting switch error”) (specifically, the game ball is meshed with the vicinity of its entrance and the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate). Based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751, a notification is made that the counting sensor 751 is malfunctioning. When the number “5” is displayed, a “retry error” (specifically, a payout) That the number of operation retries has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that the operation is “full” (specifically, from the full-tank detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal, it notifies the fact that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it indicates that “CR is not connected” (payout) control That the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the numeral “9” is displayed, it is “in stock” (specifically, That the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent via the frequency display board 365, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Are input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in a serial manner, and this signal is the payout control I / O. It is received at the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. The CR unit 6 updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining level on the remaining number display 365c. It outputs to the board 874, the main side relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input into the remaining frequency display 365c.

[4-2B. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 168, the launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the clock signal, and this A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the firing reference pulse and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. . Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, the firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 gaming balls are launched toward the gaming area 1100 per minute and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

  A touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not a palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and a firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the launch control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and then input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit 4120a and is input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the front of the rotational handle body 506 is the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. The signal is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d through the plate 880.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d emits a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle body 506 based on a signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512. When the reference pulse is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e generates a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input. When the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 by the output and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current is obtained. Is stopped, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. . With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[4-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 168, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for performing drawing control.

[4-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 168, the peripheral control unit 4140 for effect control on the peripheral control board 4010 performs a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each peripheral board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the lamp driving board 4170, or the gaming board Game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in 4, color LEDs of each decoration board provided in the game board 4, etc. Game board side drive light emission data composed of a game board light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a flashing signal or a gradation lighting signal to the game board decoration drive board A transmission signal is transmitted from the serial I / O port to each relay board 3508, 3509, 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001, or a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5. Door side drive data for output, and door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5. Door side drive light emission data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame base board 194 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, or to the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the sound ROM 4140d Control signal for extracting the rales information (sound command) and outputs to the sound source IC4140c.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are transmitted to the periphery via relay boards 3508, 3509, and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. It is input to the control MPU 4140a. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided in the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are door frame base substrates. 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. The speaker 821 is controlled so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects flow, and is provided in the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and projecting rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) built into the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control unit 4140 is not shown, and an external watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together to diagnose whether or not its system is running out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body drive command, movable body drive command, This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The relay boards 3508, 3509, and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 send a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the door frame 5 through the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command. Are output to the LEDs of each of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, etc., or a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received game board side lighting flashing command. Or output to LEDs such as the respective light emitting substrates 3115 provided in the panel 4. The relay boards 3508, 3509, and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 are provided with a drive signal on the door frame 5 through the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 based on the received drive command of the movable body. Output to the dial drive motor 414 or each drive motor 3127 provided in the game board 4. In particular, in this example, as described above, the movable decorative body 3202 is moved between the standby position and the effect position with respect to the left accessory unit 3200, and also when the movable decorative object 3202 is in the standby position, the effect position Also at this time, the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 provided in the movable decorative body 3202 are output so as to emit light. In addition, when the movable decorative body 3202 moves from the standby position to the effect position, or when moving from the effect position to the standby position, the light emission of the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 is temporarily stopped. Output. In addition, about the 3rd light emission part 3222 arrange | positioned in the constantly exposed site | part of the movable decoration body 3202, it outputs so that light emission of the 3rd light emission part 3222 may be prohibited when the movable decoration body 3202 is a standby position.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the press operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. It is input via each relay board 3508, 3509, 3510 attached to the rear surface of 3001.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and connects the relay boards 3508, 3509, 3510 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. From the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5, or from the speakers 821 of the main body frame 3 via the relay boards 3508, 3509 and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. Control is performed so that the combined music and sound effects flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the gaming window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. By sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal added with a lower speaker 391, which will be described later, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to the low-frequency speaker 821. In addition, it is possible to present a sound effect (sound production) with a sense of reality more than before.

[4-4. LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 168, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the peripheral control board 4010 stores a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and various data. A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, a VDP (abbreviation of video display processor) 4150c for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a character ROM 4150d for storing various screen data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the character ROM 4150d. And a character RAM 4150e to which various stored data are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to draw on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Control is in progress. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal, which will be described later, from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, its control data (display command), and A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the top screen data. Extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the head screen data, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs an execution signal indicating that to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900. This is the output method.

  The character ROM 4150d stores a very large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. If the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, if the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a unit. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with the position on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition order”) set.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats the main scanning in which the display state for each pixel is set in one direction along the pixel and the direction crossing the one direction sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1900, the main scanning is performed sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the data are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[4-5. Power system]
Next, the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, the power supply board 851 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. FIG. 169 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 170 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. Note that the grounds of the various substrates and the grounds of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground of the power supply substrate 851 although not shown.

[4-5A. Power supply board]
The power supply board 851 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the island facility. When the power switch 852 is operated, the power supplied from the island facility is supplied to the power supply board 851, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 169, the power supply board 851 includes a full-wave rectification circuit 851a, a power factor correction circuit 851b, a smoothing circuit 851c, a + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, a + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, a + 12V creation circuit 851f, and a + 24V creation. A circuit 851g is provided. The full-wave rectification circuit 851a performs full-wave rectification of AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the island facility and supplies the rectified current to the power factor correction circuit 851b. This power factor improvement circuit 851b improves the power factor of the full-wave rectified power to generate DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 851c. The smoothing circuit 851c smoothes + 37V by removing the input + 37V ripple, and + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, + 12V creation circuit 851f, + 24V creation circuit 851g, payout control board 4110 and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872. The + 5.2V creation circuit 851d creates a direct current + 5.2V (DC + 5.2V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.2V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c.

  The + 5.25V creation circuit 851e creates a direct current + 5.25V (DC + 5.25V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.25V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The + 12V creation circuit 851f creates a direct current + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The + 24V creation circuit 851g creates DC + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The voltages created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g are supplied to the payout control board 4110, and the + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g. The generated voltage is supplied to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872. Note that AC24V supplied from the island facility is also supplied to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 via the power supply board 851 in addition to the full-wave rectifier circuit 851a.

  The power supply board 851 includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. The capacitor BC0 is a backup power source of a RAM (main control built-in RAM 4100e) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 in the payout control board 4110. This is a backup power source for RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

  As described later, + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and is also supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. + 5.2V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a and to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. + 5.2V supplied to the main control board 4100 is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e via the diode MD0.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 (hereinafter referred to as “the negative terminal of the capacitor BC1”) is grounded, and the positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as “the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the payout control board 4110. That is, as for the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d, a current flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a, the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM that is forward by the diode PD0, the + terminal of the capacitor BC1; An electric current flows toward.

  In this way, the capacitor BC1 has an electrical connection method in which + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d returns to the payout control board 4110 and then from the payout control board 4110 back to the power supply board 851. 2V can be applied and charged. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is not supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control MPU4111a does not operate. It has come to be.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as “the negative terminal of the capacitor BC0”) is grounded, and the positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as “the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. That is, the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e that is forward by the diode MD0, the + terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply board 851 from the supply control board 4110 and the supply control board 4110 again from + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d. Depending on the connection method, + 5.2V is applied and charging is possible. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is no longer supplied to the main control board 4100, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e. It has come to be.

[4-5B. Voltage supplied to each control board]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the firing power supply board 831 will be described.

  Three types of voltages + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the payout control board 4110 as shown in FIG. 4100 is also supplied. In addition, four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, and the peripheral control board is provided via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872. On the other hand, among the four types of voltages, three types of voltages of +5.25 V, +12 V, and +24 V are supplied to the peripheral relay terminal plate 882. As shown in FIG. 170 (a), four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V supplied to the peripheral control board 4010 are + 5.25V, + 12V, and Three kinds of voltages of + 24V are supplied to the lamp driving circuits 4161 of the relay boards 3508, 3509, and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. Various signals such as signals and gradation lighting signals are output, and the four types of voltages are supplied to the drive source drive circuit 4162 of each relay board 3508, 3509, 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 to drive the drive source. A drive signal is output from the circuit 4162 to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the game board 4. Of the four types of voltages, two types of voltages of +24 V and +37 V are supplied to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a liquid crystal module 1900a that is controlled for drawing, and a backlight power source that is a power source for the backlight of the liquid crystal module 1900a. + 24V is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a, and + 37V is a backlight. Power is being supplied. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 170 (b), three types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the door frame base board 194. Of these three types of voltages, + 12V is supplied to the + 9V creation circuit 194a to create DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”). In addition to the three types of voltages, the door frame base substrate 194 supplies four types of voltages including +9 V generated by the +9 V generation circuit 194 a to various decorative substrates of the door frame 5.

[4-5C. Voltage supplied to dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a and a power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in addition to the payout control MPU 4111a. The payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with + 5.2V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from the + 5.2V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 through the diode PD0, this + 5.2V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851, and monitors these + 12V and + 24V signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b detects signs of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at + 12V and + 24V, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 as a power failure warning. This power failure notice signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 via the main control board 4100, and as shown in FIGS. 170 (a) and 170 (b), the liquid crystal display device 1900 is transmitted via the peripheral control board 4010. The backlight power supply 1900b is transmitted to the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194, and various decorative substrates of the door frame 5 are passed through the door frame base substrate 194. Etc. are to be transmitted.

  In addition to + 12V and + 24V being supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b, + 12V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 4111e of the payout control unit 4111, and + 24V is, for example, payout of the payout control unit 4111 It is also supplied to the motor drive circuit 4111d and the like. Further, +37 from the power supply board 851 is not used at all in the payout control board 4110 and is supplied to the launch power supply board 831 as it is via the payout control board 4110. The firing power supply substrate 831 creates a predetermined voltage, which will be described later, from the supplied + 37V and supplies it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the firing control unit 4120.

[4-5D. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the main control board 4100 includes a main control filter circuit 4100h in addition to the main control MPU 4100a. The main control filter circuit 4100h is supplied with + 5.2V from the payout control board 4110, and removes noise from this + 5.2V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 through the diode MD0, this + 5.2V is supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 4100a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control input circuit 4100f and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g and the like, for example.

[4-5E. Voltage supplied to launch power board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the launch power supply substrate 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 (capacitance: 4700 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The DC / DC converter 831a steps down + 37V from the payout control board 4110 to create a direct current + 35V (DC + 35V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 35V”) to drive the firing solenoid of the launch control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110. This is supplied to the circuit 4120d.

  The negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (hereinafter referred to as “−terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0”) is grounded, while the plus terminal (hereinafter referred to as “positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0”). Is electrically connected to the + 35V output terminal of the DC / DC converter 831a. That is, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is charged by applying + 35V output from the DC / DC converter 831a. In the present embodiment, the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 flows to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the dispensing control board 4110. It has become. Detailed description thereof will be described later.

[4-6. Driving solenoid drive method]
Next, a method for driving the firing solenoid 654 will be described. First, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 will be described, and then the input / output current, output voltage, signal logic and waveform, etc. at predetermined points of the drive circuit will be described. FIG. 171 is a block diagram showing a driving circuit for a firing solenoid, FIG. 172 is a circuit diagram showing a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group, and FIG. 173 is a diagram showing characteristics of the DC / DC converter. FIG. 174 is a timing chart of predetermined points in the drive circuit for the firing solenoid of FIG.

[4-6A. Launch solenoid drive system]
As shown in FIG. 171, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 is mainly composed of a firing control input circuit 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b, a firing timing circuit 4120c, a firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, and a ball in the dispensing control board 4110. The feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e, the DC / DC converter 831a of the firing power supply board 831, the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the power factor improvement circuit 851b of the power supply board 851, and the smoothing circuit 851c are configured.

  When the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the launch control input circuit 4120a receives power (AC24V) from the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110. Is output to the firing timing circuit 4120c as a CR connection signal, and a detection signal from the touch sensor 516 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle is input. When the detection signal from the firing stop switch 518, which is output as a touch detection signal to the firing timing circuit 4120c and detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will, is input. The stop detection signal is output to the launch timing circuit 4120c.

  The launch timing circuit 4120c permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 based on the CR connection signal, the touch detection signal, and the launch stop detection signal from the launch control input circuit 4120a. Specifically, the firing timing circuit 4120c has a first state that the CR connection signal is not input because the CR unit 6 is not electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Case, touch detection signal is the second case that the palm or finger is not touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, the firing stop detection signal tells that the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped Among the third cases, when one of the cases is applicable, the launching of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is prohibited, while when not all of the cases, the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is permitted.

  The firing timing circuit 4120c is input with the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b. When the launching solenoid 654 is permitted to launch a game ball, 100 game balls per minute are played based on this clock signal. A firing reference pulse is generated so as to be launched toward 1100 and output to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, and a ball feed reference pulse is generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number of times (5 times in this embodiment). It outputs to the feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e. The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d drives the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 with a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e drives the ball feeding solenoid 585 by + 24V from the power supply board 851.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d mainly includes a shunt regulator circuit 4121a, an amplifier circuit 4121b, a voltage comparison circuit 4121c, and a switching circuit 4121d. The shunt regulator circuit 4121a is supplied with + 5.2V generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851. The direct current + 2.5V stabilized from this + 5.2V (DC + 2.5V, hereinafter “ + 2.5V ”) and is supplied to the amplifier circuit 4121b.

  As shown in FIG. 172 (a), the shunt regulator circuit 4121a mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0. The shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 has a reduced temperature drift due to the ambient temperature, and can create and supply a stabilized power supply that is held at a constant voltage with respect to the load. The REF terminal that is the reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal that is the cathode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 are electrically connected to + 5.2V via the resistor PR2, and the resistor PR2 connects to the REF terminal. The input current is limited. The K terminal outputs +2.5 V to the amplifier circuit 4121b. This +2.5 V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC component convoluted with voltage) by the capacitor PC0 connected to the ground (the capacitor PC0 also serves as a low-pass filter). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Returning to FIG. 171, the amplifier circuit 4121 b amplifies +2.5 from the shunt regulator circuit 4121 a by a factor of 2 to create DC +5.0 V (DC +5.0 V, hereinafter referred to as “+5.0 V”). Then, it is supplied to the rotational position detection sensor 512 in the handle device 500 via the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192.

  As shown in FIG. 172 (a), the amplifier circuit 4121b mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC1. The operational amplifier PIC1 is configured as a non-inverting amplifier circuit, and + 2.5V from the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 of the shunt regulator circuit 4121a is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC1, and the operational amplifier PIC1. One end of the inverting input terminal (− terminal) is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR3 whose ground is grounded, and the other end of the resistor PR4 whose one end is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1. And are electrically connected. The resistance values of the resistors PR3 and PR4 are set so that the amplification factor (flat loop gain) of the operational amplifier PIC1 is doubled. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1 is, as described above, + 5.0V obtained by amplifying + 2.5V applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC1, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the handle. The rotation position detection sensor 512 in the handle device 500 is supplied via the device relay board 192. This +5.0 V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC component convoluted with voltage) by the capacitor PC2 connected to the ground (the capacitor PC2 also serves as a low-pass filter). Note that + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC1 grounded to the ground.

  Returning to FIG. 171, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a three-terminal variable resistor, and one fixed terminal at both ends is supplied with +5.0 V from the above-described amplifier circuit 4121b, and the other fixed terminal at both ends is the handle. It is electrically connected to the resistor PR0 of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d in the payout control board 4110 via the device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal board 880. The other end of the resistor PR0 is grounded. From the variable terminal which is a terminal different from the fixed terminals at both ends of the rotational position detection sensor 512, it is possible to take out the divided voltage of the voltage applied to both ends according to the variable resistance value. The voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is connected to resistances PR5 and PR6 (described later) in the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the payout control board 4110 via the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal board 880. 172 (b)), and the divided voltage of the resistor PR6 is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the firing intensity target voltage.

  As shown in FIG. 172 (b), the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500 is passed through the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880 as described above. The ripple (the AC component convolved with the voltage) is removed and smoothed by the grounded and grounded capacitor PC3 (the capacitor PC3 also serves as a low-pass filter), and the firing solenoid of the dispensing control board 4110 The voltage is applied to an operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower of the drive circuit 4120d. As shown in FIG. 172 (b), this operational amplifier circuit group mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC2 at the first stage and an operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage. The voltage from the handle device 500 is a voltage on the order of volts, and is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the first stage operational amplifier PIC2 is electrically connected to the output terminal of the first stage operational amplifier PIC2. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 in the first stage outputs the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC2 by a factor of 1, that is, as it is as a voltage on the order of volts. The first-stage operational amplifier PIC2 simply outputs the input voltage, which is a voltage in the order of volts, but outputs the voltage to the first-stage input-side circuit for applying the voltage from the handle device 500 and the subsequent-stage operational amplifier PIC3. Therefore, circuit separation from the first stage output side circuit is realized. Thereby, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the first stage input side circuit to the first stage output side circuit, and the influence of the first stage output side circuit can be prevented from being given to the first stage input side circuit. The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC4 grounded to the ground.

  The output terminal of the first operational amplifier PIC2 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR5 in addition to its own inverting input terminal (− terminal), and the other end of the resistor PR5 is a non-inverting input terminal ( + Terminal). The non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR6 whose one end is grounded, in addition to the other end of the resistor PR5. As a result, the voltage from the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 in the first stage is a voltage in the order of volts because it simply outputs the input voltage, which is a voltage in the order of volts as described above, and is divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6. The voltage of the divided resistor PR6 is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage as a voltage on the order of millivolts. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage doubles the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC2, that is, the voltage in the millivolt order is output to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the firing intensity target voltage. To do. The operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage simply outputs the input voltage, which is the voltage that the resistor PR6 in the millivolt order divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6, directly outputs, but the resistance in the millivolt order divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6. Circuit separation is realized between a rear-stage input side circuit for applying a voltage that the PR6 takes on and a rear-stage output side circuit for outputting the voltage to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c. Thereby, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the rear stage input side circuit to the rear stage output side circuit, and the influence of the rear stage output side circuit can be prevented from being given to the rear stage input side circuit. The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground.

  Returning to FIG. 171, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 flows through the resistor PR1 whose one end is grounded, so that the voltage in the millivolt order that the resistor PR1 takes is used as a firing control voltage. 4121c. The voltage comparison circuit 4121c is also applied with the firing intensity target voltage, which is the voltage in the millivolt order described above. As described above, the firing control voltage and the firing strength target voltage to be compared by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c are, as described above, the resistance from the voltage on the order of volts to the voltage on the order of millivolts on the payout control board 4110 (launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d). The voltage is stepped down by the voltages that PR1 and PR6 handle. That is, since it is applied through a wiring pattern formed on the payout control board 4110, this wiring pattern is not easily affected by noise, and the voltage comparison circuit 4121c has a firing control voltage and a firing strength target voltage at a voltage on the order of millivolts. Can be compared with each other, between the board device of the payout control board 4110 and the hitting ball launching device 650 and between the board devices of the payout control board 4110 and the handle device 500 via the wiring. Since the wiring is easily affected by noise, the influence of noise between the substrate devices is suppressed by setting the voltage in the order of volts.

  The voltage comparison circuit 4121c is an inverting circuit that compares the firing control voltage with the firing strength target voltage, and outputs the comparison result to the switching circuit 4121d. The comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is a logical output of HI or LOW, and when the launch control voltage is greater than the launch intensity target voltage, it becomes LOW (hereinafter referred to as “L”), while the launch control voltage. Is smaller than the firing intensity target voltage, it becomes HI (hereinafter referred to as “H”). Thus, since the output logic is H or L depending on the comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, the output signal is input to the switching circuit 4121d as an ON / OFF signal.

  The switching circuit 4121d receives the current from the DC / DC converter 831a included in the firing power supply board 831 according to the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c each time the firing reference pulse from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input. A combined current obtained by combining the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC <b> 0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650. Specifically, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is input, the switching circuit 4121d generates a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. On the other hand, when the OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is input while flowing to the firing solenoid 654, the current flowing to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off. In other words, the switching circuit 4121d receives the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, and supplies the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. If the voltage divided by the resistor PR1 becomes larger than the firing intensity target voltage as the firing control voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4121c becomes L and OFF A signal is output to the switching circuit 4121d, and the switching circuit 4121d cuts off the constant current flowing through the firing solenoid 654. By this interruption, the current does not flow to the firing solenoid 654, so that the firing control voltage becomes smaller than the firing strength target voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4121c becomes H again, the ON signal is output to the switching circuit 4121d, and the switching circuit As described above, 4121d supplies the firing solenoid 654 with a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. As described above, in accordance with the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, the switching circuit 4121d generates a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 with the firing solenoid 654. Therefore, the switching circuit 4121d performs control to cause the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c to self-oscillate and flow the current to the firing solenoid. That is, the switching circuit 4121d functions as a “self-oscillation constant current circuit”, and brings the firing control voltage close to the firing intensity target voltage. Thereby, the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is rotated, and the launch solenoid 654 can be driven with a launch intensity corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 to launch a game ball toward the game area 1100.

  When the player touches the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and is at the original rotational position where the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is not rotated, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is applied to the resistor PR0. The applied voltage is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as the voltage follower described above, and is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the firing intensity target voltage. In this case, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is output to the switching circuit 4121d, the switching circuit 4121d combines the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The merged current is passed through the firing solenoid 654. The current output from the DC / DC converter 831a is the minimum output current. At this time, the firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 is at least over the firing rail 660. That is, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR0 is the firing intensity target voltage, the current commensurate with the voltage (the minimum output current output from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are combined). When the merged current) flows to the firing solenoid 654, the game ball launched by the firing solenoid 654 reaches the game area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 even if the game ball can jump over the firing rail 660. Therefore, the foul balls are collected by the foul cover unit 540. In other words, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR0 is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower and applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the firing intensity target voltage, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is the minimum current. However, even if this minimum current flows to the firing solenoid 654, all the game balls that have been launched are collected as foul balls. Thereby, since it can prevent overlapping with the game ball sent to the firing rail 660 by the ball feeding solenoid 585, the firing solenoid 654 is prevented from launching the overlapping game ball toward the game area 1100. In addition, it is possible to prevent the firing solenoid 654 from being overloaded and to prevent failure.

  In this embodiment, by adopting the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 for the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, the firing intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4121a + 2.5V. Is amplified by the amplifier circuit 4121b and is divided by the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500, so that the rotational position of the front part 506 of the rotary handle body is the same as that of the divided voltage. When held at the position, no fluctuation occurs and the voltage is held constant. As a result, the switching circuit 4121d causes the firing control voltage to be close to the launch intensity target voltage by causing the combined current to flow to the launch solenoid 654 of the ball hitting device 650, so that the launch control voltage becomes the same as the launch intensity target voltage. When the rotational position of the front handle body 506 is held at the same rotational position, the combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not change, and a constant current flows. Therefore, the firing solenoid 654 causes the game ball to play the game area 1100. The firing strength launched towards the same is the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent “flying unevenness” of the game ball due to the drive firing of the firing solenoid 654.

  In addition, the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed has a game ball circulation system in which game balls discharged from a plurality of pachinko gaming machines are ground and supplied to the pachinko gaming machine again. For this reason, the temperature in the island facility is extremely high due to heat generated by polishing of the game balls, heat generated by collision and friction between the game balls, and heat generated by the power supply board of the pachinko gaming machine and various electric decorations. In this embodiment, as described above, by adopting the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 for the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, + 2.5V can be stabilized even in an environment where heat is trapped in the pachinko facility. It can be output. As a result, since the fluctuation of +2.5 V due to temperature is suppressed, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512, that is, the “fluctuation” of the firing intensity target voltage can be suppressed. The voltage comparison circuit 4121c can output a control signal to the switching circuit 4121d without including the minute voltage. In other words, when the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle is the same rotational position, “unevenness” can be suppressed in the firing strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100, so that “unevenness” of the game ball is suppressed. be able to.

[4-6B. Input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter]
Next, the input / output current and output voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a will be described with reference to FIG. 173 with respect to the input current at the point TA and the output current and output voltage at the point TB shown in FIG. The TA point is a point for referring to the input current Iin of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a. The output voltage Vout is a potential difference from the ground.

  First, the relationship between the output voltage Vout at the point TB and the output current Iout is such that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V, as shown in FIG. 173 (a). Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, and in the section B where the output voltage Vout is from + 30V to + 20V, the output voltage Vout decreases as the output voltage Vout decreases. In section C where the current Iout increases from 360 mA to 400 mA and the output voltage Vout increases from +20 V to +10 V, the output current Iout increases from 400 mA to 660 mA by approximately 260 mA and the output voltage Vout increases by +10 V as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the section D from 1 to +5 V, the output current Iout increases from 660 mA to 1010 mA by about 350 mA as the output voltage Vout decreases. Note that, in the vicinity of +5 V to zero V, the output current Iout is approximately 1010 mA.

  As shown in FIG. 173 (b), the relationship between the input current Iin at the TA point and the output current Iout at the TB point is that the input current Iin decreases and the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V. It has become a relationship. Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, whereas the input current Iin is reduced by about 80 mA from 400 mA to 320 mA. In this section A, when a current corresponding to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin is larger than the output current Iout, the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is still a game. While the firing intensity is difficult to reach the region 1100, when the current corresponding to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle body flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin begins to become smaller than the output current Iout, The game ball launched toward the area 1100 has a launch intensity that reaches the game area 1100. In section B where the output voltage Vout is from + 30V to + 20V, the output current Iout increases from 360 mA to 400 mA by about 40 mA, while the input current Iin decreases from 320 mA to 260 mA by about 60 mA, compared with the output current Iout. Thus, the input current Iin is completely reduced. In the section C where the output voltage Vout is from + 20V to + 10V, the output current Iout is increased by approximately 260 mA from 400 mA to 660 mA, whereas the input current Iin is decreased by approximately 50 mA from 260 mA to 210 mA. The input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout. In section D where the output voltage Vout is from +10 V to +5 V, the output current Iout is increased by about 350 mA from 660 mA to 1010 mA, while the input current Iin is decreased by about 35 mA from 210 mA to 175 mA. Similar to C, the input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout.

  When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, the combined current obtained by combining 360 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the minimum current, that is, the player is in front of the rotary handle body. The current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 when the rotating handle main body front 506 is not rotated is touched 506, whereas the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 1010 mA. In some cases, the combined current of 1010 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the maximum current, that is, the player touches the front of the rotary handle body 506 and rotates the front of the rotary handle body 506 clockwise. Thus, the current flows through the firing solenoid 654 when it is at the limit rotational position. Thus, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a minimum output current value of 360 mA and a maximum output current value of 1010 mA. When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a exceeds 1000 mA, the firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 is that the game ball that has already jumped to the game area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 collides with the stop 1114. Then, it rolls downstream along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and is strong enough to be collected at the out port 1151 without entering the various winning ports. For this reason, the range of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a that can be taken when the player turns the front of the rotary handle body 506 clockwise to play a game is larger than 360 mA and smaller than 1000 mA. (360 mA <value of output current Iout <1000 mA), which is a milliampere order current.

[4-6C. Relationship between input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter and firing reference pulse from firing timing circuit]
Next, at a fixed rotational position in front of the rotary handle body 506, the output current Iout and output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a at the point TB shown in FIG. 171 and the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c, Will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout (potential difference from the ground) of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TC point is a firing reference pulse from the firing timing circuit 4120c. This is a point for referring to T0.

  As described above, when the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c allows the launching of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654, 100 game balls per minute, that is, 60000 ms, are directed toward the game area 1100. Since it is set so as to be ejected, as shown in FIG. 174 (a), its pulse width is 30 ms and its period T is 600 ms.

  Here, when the player touches the rotary handle body front 506 and rotates the rotary handle body front 506 to reach the limit rotational position, the DC / DC in the original rotational position not rotated. A waveform of the output voltage Vout of the converter 831a will be described.

  174 (b) and (c) when the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d when the front of the rotary handle 506 is in the limit rotational position. As described above, the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-described maximum current and starts to flow to the firing solenoid 654 (timing t0). ). When this maximum current is flowing to firing solenoid 654, the voltage of DC / DC converter 831a (the voltage of electrolytic capacitor SC0) drops to +5 V in accordance with the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. The value of the output current Iout of 831a is 1010 mA which is the maximum output current described above. Then, when the input is stopped after 30 ms has elapsed after the input of the firing reference pulse T0, the discharge proceeds until the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches near zero V (timing t1). When the maximum current to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Accordingly, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases as shown in FIG. Immediately after the maximum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is close to zero V, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is equal to the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a. When charging starts with a certain current of 1010 mA and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a recovers to near +35 V, charging is continued with a current of 360 mA, and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the time when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input and 30 ms elapses until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  On the other hand, when the firing handle front pulse 506 from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d when the front of the rotary handle body 506 is in the original rotational position, FIG. As shown in (d), the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-described minimum current, and is supplied to the firing solenoid 654. The flow starts (timing t0). When this minimum current is flowing to firing solenoid 654, the voltage of DC / DC converter 831a (voltage of electrolytic capacitor SC0) slightly decreases according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. The value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, which is the minimum output current described above. Then, after the input of the firing reference pulse T0, when 30 ms elapses and the input is stopped, the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slightly advanced (timing t1). When the minimum current to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Accordingly, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases as described above. Immediately after the minimum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 slightly falls, but belongs to the section A, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is output from the DC / DC converter 831a. Charging is started by a current of 360 mA that is the current Iout, and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the time when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input and 30 ms elapses until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  As described above, even when the maximum current and the minimum current flow through the firing solenoid 654, due to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a, the charge discharged from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 within the discharge time of 30 ms when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input. Can be completed within the remaining 570 ms charging time until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  Here, consider a case where the DC / DC converter 831a adopts a control method in which a current flows through the firing solenoid 654 alone in a state where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 does not exist within a period of 30 ms after the firing reference pulse T0 is input. In this control method, since the current that the DC / DC converter 831a independently flows to the firing solenoid 654 is about 2 A to 3.5 A, this current is supplied from the power supply board 851. When the firing solenoid 654 is driven, a large current larger than 2 A to 3.5 A flows instantaneously. Then, every time the firing reference pulse T0 of 30 ms is generated with a period T of 600 ms, the load on the power supply board also increases with this period T. In other words, the power supply board supplies a predetermined current to electronic components, decorations used for decoration, etc. in addition to the instantaneous large current that flows when the firing solenoid 654 is driven. If the power supply upper limit is exceeded, the power supply is cut off for safety.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the DC / DC converter 831a independently drives the firing solenoid 654 without the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the period of 30 ms which is the pulse width after the firing reference pulse T0 is input. The amperage-order current supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of +37 V on the power supply board 851 is extended to a period of 600 ms from when the firing reference pulse T0 is inputted until the next firing reference pulse T0 is inputted. When the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the combined current of the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the “first current” in the order of milliamperes supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of + 37V of the power supply board 851. And electrolytic When the power supply SC0 is charged with the power from the DC / DC converter 831a, it is distributed to the “second current” in the milliampere order supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851. it can. As a result, the amperage order of the amperage order supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 in the period of 30 ms which is the pulse width after the firing reference pulse T0 is input in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The current is supplied from the DC power source of + 37V of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a during a period of 600 ms from when the firing reference pulse T0 is input in the presence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input. It can be averaged by the “first current” and “second current” in the order of milliamperes supplied. Therefore, a load for supplying an instantaneous large current by driving the firing solenoid 654 can be eliminated from the power supply board 851. Further, it is possible to eliminate the time spent on designing the operating conditions of the safety device when the power supply board 851 is overloaded.

[4-6D. Relationship between firing reference pulse from launch timing circuit and ball feed reference pulse]
Next, the firing reference pulse T0 and the ball feeding reference pulse T1 from the firing timing circuit 4120c will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the TC point is a point for referring to the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c, and the TD point shown in FIG. 171 refers to the ball feeding reference pulse T1 from the firing timing circuit 4120c. It is a point to do.

  The ball feed reference pulse T1 is set to 150 ms (= T0 (30 ms) × 5) which is five times 30 ms which is the firing reference pulse T0. When the firing reference pulse T0 is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, as shown in FIGS. Input to the circuit 4120e (when timing t0, 150 ms elapses, the input is stopped (timing t3). Thereby, the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven to perform ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585. Thus, the next set of game balls to be launched can be completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input. Each time the firing reference pulse T0 is input, the game ball is moved to the game area 1100. It can be launched continuously toward.

  As described above, in this example, after the game ball is driven by the firing solenoid 654, the driving power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654, and the electrolytic power supply board 831 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0. Therefore, the current (maximum current) supplied to the firing solenoid 654 can be changed by exchanging the firing power supply substrate 831 having the electrolytic capacitors SC0 having different capacities, and the driving characteristics of the hit ball launching device 650 can be changed. The characteristics can be changed to match the board 4.

  In addition, since power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654, the power from the power supply board 851 is stored in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and fired between the time the game ball is launched and the next time it is launched. By supplying the power to the solenoid 654, it is possible to avoid instantaneously consuming a large current directly from the power supply board 851, and light emission and movement of the LED of the light emitting decoration board, the motor for driving the effect, the solenoid, etc. It is possible to prevent instability and occurrence of unevenness of the game ball.

  Further, the power supply board 851 creates and supplies DC power (+ 5.2V, + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V) from the AC power (AC24V) of the island facility, and the hitting ball launcher 650 has a handle. The front of the rotary handle main body 506 of the device 500 is rotated, and the shooting solenoid 654 can be driven with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 to launch a game ball toward the game area 1100.

  The firing intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is + 2.5V, which is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, is amplified by the amplification circuit 4121b, and + 5.0V is the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500. Therefore, when the rotational position of the rotary handle body front 506 is held at the same rotational position, the divided voltage is maintained at a constant voltage without fluctuation. Become. As a result, the switching circuit 4121d causes the firing control voltage to be close to the launch intensity target voltage by causing the combined current to flow to the launch solenoid 654 of the ball hitting device 650, so that the launch control voltage becomes the same as the launch intensity target voltage. When the rotational position of the front handle body 506 is held at the same rotational position, the combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not change, and a constant current flows. Therefore, the firing solenoid 654 causes the game ball to play the game area 1100. The firing strength launched towards the same is the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent “flying unevenness” of the game ball due to the drive firing of the firing solenoid 654.

[5. Game contents]
Next, game contents by the main board 4000 including the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is moved to the game panel 1150 when the player rotates the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5. The game area 1100 is placed in front of the game area 1100, and a game with a game ball is started. A game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down in the game area 1100 on the upper left side or the right side of the center accessory 2400 depending on the driving strength.

  The game ball driving strength is determined by detecting the amount of rotation of the handle device 500 with the rotation position detection sensor 512 and then using the shot control unit 4120 with the shot control unit 4120 based on the detection signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512. The driving strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled so that it can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1150 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2400 flows down from the substantially right and left center to the right side of the center accessory 2400, the game ball is guided to the right area of the center accessory 2400. When a game ball flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2400 enters the gate portion 2107 arranged at the lower right of the center accessory 2400 and is detected by the gate sensor 2176, an ordinary random number as a result of the normal lottery is obtained. Extracted. Based on the normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variably displayed (the normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED emits light alternately in red, green and orange), Extracted after elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 60 to 600 seconds when the time is short (when the number of fluctuations has not been reached), 7.23 to 7.77 seconds when the time is short (when the number of fluctuations is reached), 0.5 seconds when the time is short) The normal symbol based on the normal random number (ordinary lottery result) is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits light in either red or green). The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the regular symbol variation pattern selected from a predetermined regular diagram variation time determination table.

  Specifically, if the selected random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits green light), and the selected normal random number is a “normal lose” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits red light). When a normal symbol indicating a hit is displayed in a stopped state, the pair of blades 2125 that close the second start port 2102 expands for a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.5 seconds for non-short time, 1 second for short time). The operation to be performed is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice when not working and three times when working). The operation by the pair of blades 2125 (movable members) makes it easier for the second starting port 2102 to accept the game ball.

  In addition, about the fluctuation | variation time of a normal symbol, the expansion time of the blade | wing 2125 in the 2nd start port 2102, and the frequency | count of expansion, it comes to change according to a 1st special random number or a 2nd special random number (special lottery result). Yes. For example, when “short time per hour (including normal short time, high probability per short time, etc.)” is extracted as a special random number (special lottery result) and symbol random number, By changing the expansion time of the pair of blades 2125 of the two start ports 2102 to a longer time, the average total number of game balls to be struck with respect to the game area 1100 required until a big hit is obtained is a normal game. An advantageous gaming state is generated in which the game is enabled to be relatively smaller than when in the state.

  On the other hand, as long as it is controlled to the normal gaming state (more precisely, the non-short-time gaming state), the probability of hitting the normal symbol is not increased, and the pair of blades 2125 of the second starting port 2102 is not increased. The expansion time is set only as a relatively short time (a time during which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second start port 2102) as compared with the gaming state in which the time reduction function is activated. In the state, the average total number of game balls to be hit before the big hit is obtained is maintained as a relatively large value. However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the average total number of game balls to be hit before the big hit is obtained is maintained as such a relatively large value. However, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 800 times), the universal symbol used for the determination process for the universal symbol variation pattern By replacing the variable time determination table with a different table, the ease of accepting the game ball into the second start port 2102 is adjusted and changed to the side advantageous to the player.

  Incidentally, in the normal gaming state according to this embodiment, neither the so-called probability changing function nor the time-shortening function is activated, which is operable at least on the condition that it is won when the condition device is activated. It is a gaming state (excluding the big hit gaming state). The average number of game balls to be hit before a big hit is obtained is the average value of the total number of game balls that need to be put into the game area 1100 before the big hit. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the big hit is set relatively low compared to the gaming state in which the probability variation function is activated, and accordingly, the average hit of the game ball required until the big hit is obtained. Compared with the gaming state in which the total number of shots (the amount of driving into the game area 1100) increases and the time-shortening function operates, the probability of entering the starting port (the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102) is relative Therefore, the average total number of game balls to be hit before the big hit is obtained (the amount of shots into the game area 1100) increases accordingly. In this sense, when the gaming state in which either the probability changing function or the time-shortening function is activated, the average number of total hits of the gaming balls with respect to the gaming area 1100 required until the big hit is obtained is in the normal gaming state. It can be said that it is an advantageous gaming state in which a game can be made so as to be relatively smaller than the above.

  By the way, in this example, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2176 while the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 while the normal symbol is variably displayed, the normal symbol being changed is stopped and generated / extracted first. Until the result of the ordinary random number is determined, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2176 is temporarily stored and the display is suspended, and the stored ordinary random number is held. The number of symbols (also referred to as the number of reservations) is normally displayed on the symbol memory display 1188. This normal symbol memory display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and suggests the number of memories by the number of each LED to be lit. In this example, up to four are stored and the number of pending is displayed. It is like that. Note that when the number of holds exceeds four, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2176 is discarded.

  In addition, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 and has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2400 is moved toward the center of the game area 1100 below the center accessory 2400 by the guide rolling surface 2301e of the side decoration unit 2300. It is like that. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 2105 of the winning device unit 2100 arranged below the center accessory 2400 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3522, the main control board 4100 is based on the detection signal. Then, a predetermined payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 in accordance with the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls. Is dispensed to the upper plate 301.

  Note that the game ball that is driven into the game area 1100 wins a prize in any of the general prize opening 2105, the first start opening 2101, the second start opening 2102, the first opening / closing winning apparatus 2103, and the second opening / closing winning apparatus 2104. If not, the game area 1100 is provided at the lower center in the left-right direction, and is discharged from the out port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, even if a game ball wins any of the general winning opening 2105, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, the first opening / closing winning apparatus 2103, and the second opening / closing winning apparatus 2104 (large winning opening 2153), The winning game balls are discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 without being returned into the game area 1100.

  On the other hand, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2400 enters the warp entrance 2402a that opens to the left side surface of the center accessory 2400, the game ball is supplied to the stage 2403a of the shelf 2403 of the center accessory 2400. It has become. Then, the game ball supplied onto the stage 2403a rolls in the left-right direction.

  By the way, when the game ball rolling on the stage 2403a passes through the chance entrance 2403b formed in the center in the left-right direction and enters the chance passage 2404d formed in the rear shelf cover 2404, the game ball is arranged immediately above the first start port 2101. The chance exit 2403c is released into the game area 1100, and the game ball is received into the first start port 2101 with a high probability. When a game ball is received by the first start port 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 3524, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is dispensed to the upper plate 301.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first start port 2101 and the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, so that the game balls released from the stage 2403a have a high probability. One start port 2101 and the first open / close winning device 2103 are adapted to be received.

  By the way, when the game ball enters the gate portion 2107 and is detected by the gate sensor 2176 and “normal hit” is drawn as the normal lottery result, as described above, the pair of blades 2125 that close the second start port 2102 is closed. When the game ball is received by the second starting port 2102 and detected by the second starting port sensor 2166 when the winning becomes possible after being expanded for a predetermined time, the main control board 4100 or the like is used. Thus, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball device 740 to the upper plate 301.

  In the main control board 4100, when a game ball wins the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and is detected by the first start port sensor 3524 and the second start port sensor 2166, the first start The port 2101 extracts a predetermined first special random number, and the second start port 2102 extracts a predetermined second special random number. Then, based on the extracted special random number, it is extracted after the change display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 or second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result. In the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, among the “big hits”, a “10R positive variation big hit B”, “10R positive variable big hit C”, and “10R positive variable big hit D” described later are suggested. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a special advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit game) in which the winning door 2154 of the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern occurs, and the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 in the meantime. More game balls can be acquired by winning game balls in the (big prize opening 2153). When one game ball wins the first open / close winning device 2103 or the second open / close winning device 2104 (large winning opening 2153), a predetermined number (for example, 11) of game balls from the prize ball device 740 is placed on the upper plate 301. To be paid out.

  Note that, in the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 as well, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation display due to the game ball entering the gate portion 2107. In 1186, when the special symbol is variably displayed, or when the special symbol such as the big hit game as the special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball wins the start opening 2101 and 1022, and the first start opening sensor 3524. When detected by the second starting port sensor 2166, the first symbol extracted based on the detection signals from the first starting port sensor 3524 and the second starting port sensor 2166 until the special symbol variation display is possible. 1 special random number and 2nd special random number are memorized and the display is suspended, and the stored number of retained random numbers for hit judgment is stored in the first special symbol memory display It is adapted to display at 184 or the second special symbol memory indicator 1187. The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187 are each composed of two LEDs, so that the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. If the number of holds exceeds four, the extracted special random number is discarded.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, the first special random number extracted based on the detection by the first start port sensor 3524 and the second start port sensor 2166 and the special random number of the second special random number are used as predetermined random numbers. By collating with a judgment table (also called a big hit judgment table), it is determined whether the special random number is “lost”, “small hit”, or “big hit (hit the condition device is activated)”, For “big hit”, a predetermined random number determination table in which a first design random number extracted based on detection by the first start port sensor 2011 and the second start port sensor 2349 or a second design random number is used. (Also referred to as a symbol determination table), it may be one of “10R accuracy variation big hit A”, “10R accuracy variation big hit B”, “10R accuracy variation big hit C”, or “10R probability variation big hit D”. It is adapted to be another (winning species of discrimination).

  When the first special random number (special lottery result) extracted (lottery) with the start winning of the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 as a trigger is “small hit”, the main control board 4100 Is configured to repeat the opening / closing pattern for retreating the bevel-shaped indentation piece 2142 of the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 as a protruding state for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.05 seconds) a plurality of times (for example, 10 times). Therefore, it is difficult for the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 to win a game ball.

  On the other hand, when the extracted first special random number or second special random number is “10R probability variation big hit B”, “10R probability variation big hit C”, or “10R probability variation big hit D” among the “big hits”, the main control board 4100 After the winning door 2154 of the second open / close winning device 2104 is opened, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls are received by the second open / close winning device 2104 (large winning prize). An opening / closing pattern (a single opening / closing pattern is called one round) that closes the winning door 2154 when one of the winning conditions is satisfied at the mouth 2153) is repeated 10 rounds as a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). Thus, an advantageous gaming state (long-open big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player is generated. Further, in the case of “10R probability variation big hit A” among “big hits”, the main control board 4100 sets the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 of the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 in a protruding state, and then for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.05 Seconds), or an opening / closing pattern (a single opening / closing pattern) that causes the bell-shaped appearing piece 2142 to retreat when a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls satisfy the winning condition of the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103. Is called 10 rounds as a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds), and it is difficult for the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 to win a game ball as in the case of “small hit”. It has become. As described above, in the case of “big hit”, while the same 10 rounds, the opening / closing time per round is set to a long open state (for example, about 30 seconds) using the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 (big prize opening 2153). ) (A long-open big hit game state) and a short open state (for example, 0.05 seconds) in which the open time per round is extremely shorter than the long open state using the first open / close winning device 2103 In the case of controlling to (a short-open big hit game state), it is controlled to either. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big win winning at the low probability is finished, the type of the hit (“10R probability variable big hit A”, “10R probability variable big hit B) ”,“ 10R probability variation jackpot C ”,“ 10R probability variation jackpot D ”), the jackpot determination table is changed to a high probability table (a jackpot determination table at high probability) according to the extracted symbol random number (probability variation) Control to the state). However, as will be described later, whether or not to change to the variation pattern table in the short-time state (whether to control to the short-time gaming state) is determined according to the winning type.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first special random number and the second special random number (special lottery result) extracted in response to the start winning of the game ball at the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 are used. Accordingly, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 are variably displayed, and the display screen 1900a of the liquid crystal display device 1900 also displays a special random number (special lottery result). A corresponding effect image is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the variation of each symbol row in a state where a series of symbol rows composed of a plurality of different symbols is displayed (for example, three columns; left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol). When the display is started and then stopped in sequence, and finally all symbol sequences are stopped, the special symbol extracted by the combination of the symbols that have been stopped (left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol) The result of random number determination is suggested to the player. That is, according to the special lottery result by the start winning, an effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result after a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed is displayed. It should be noted that since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are larger and easier to see than the special symbols on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, a player generally uses the liquid crystal display device 1900. Pay attention to the displayed symbol.

  As one of the effect images in which the multiple symbol sequences are variably displayed, a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed with one variable symbol sequence remaining is specified (reach; the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped with the same symbol) In addition, there is a “reach effect image” displayed so as to satisfy the state where the middle symbol is still variably displayed). As a result of the special lottery in which this “reach effect image” is displayed, “per reach”, “ Reach loser ". There is also a “reach development effect image” that is displayed so as to be connected to the “reach effect image”, and that the remaining symbol sequence that is variably displayed is highlighted after the reach display. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can display not only an effect display related to the start winning prize but also a “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game.

  Note that the special symbol change display on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 168). The variation display of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on a command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010. ing. As a result, the variable display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 that the player particularly pays attention to is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 or the like, so that a certain one related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 is obtained. A plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance for one command to increase the symbol variation patterns in the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, the “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. Thereby, the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the calculation processing load on the main control board 4100 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that makes the player more entertaining and less likely to get bored can be obtained. It has become.

  In the display area 1900a of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the number of special random numbers displayed on the first special symbol memory display 1185 and the second special symbol memory display 1186 (that is, the first special random number and the second special random number are displayed). The number of on-hold displays corresponding to the number of on-holds is displayed as notification information. In the first special symbol memory display 1185 and the second special symbol memory display 1186, the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emission states of the respective LEDs, whereas in the display area 1900a of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the number is stored. Since the number of hold and the number of hold display to be displayed match, generally, the player can easily grasp the number of hold from the hold display and is displayed in the display area 1900a of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Pay attention to the hold display.

[6. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 175 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment first stores various registers and RAMs as processing in step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated. Initialize the stored data. The RAM clear switch 4100c is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch 4100c outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed since the power is turned on, and the main control MPU 4100a receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined that the data is stored, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, a backup process for storing information (for example, various flags) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is executed. If the RAM clear switch 4100c is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, as a process in step S2, a random number that is a number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped, and the special symbols. Reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in response to the variable random number used for the lottery process for the predetermined time (variation time) required for the variable display control of the game, and the special symbol variable display. Reach random numbers used for lottery processing of whether or not, the design random numbers (first design random number, the first design random number used to determine the type of jackpot if it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number 2 random numbers), a random number counter for holding random numbers such as ordinary random numbers, etc. used for lottery processing for winning a win that triggers the operation of the pair of blades 2125 That.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first starting port 2001 is won for starting, the second starting port 2002 is won for starting. Even if it is configured, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach ratio of the reach effect is obtained by acquiring from the counter in which the random number range for updating the reach random number is different. The reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number may correspond to the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is different from the first reach determination table. You may make it vary the execution ratio of reach production by providing the 2nd reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. Note that after the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms, for example.

  FIG. 175 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register saving process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as processing of step S12, detection signals from various switches such as the gate sensor 2176, the first start port sensor 3524, the second start port sensor 2166, the count sensor 2160, the general winning port sensor 3522, and the like. Entered. Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, the random number counter is updated in such a manner that the random numbers (special random numbers, normal random numbers) related to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols and the normal symbols are updated. Counter operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes, as the process of step S14, a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable symbol variable display is stopped. Execute. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, first flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a). The corresponding processing is selectively executed based on the two special symbol process flags).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process related to a winning win as an operation trigger of the pair of blades 2125 as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. In addition, when the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is controlled to be in a time-saving state after the big hit gaming state is finished, the operation mode at the time when the opening time of the second start port 2102 is longer than that in the normal gaming state is short. The opening time of the pair of blades 2125 is extended so that the blades 2125 (movable members) operate. However, in the short-time state according to this embodiment (the state in which the short-time function is activated), not only the extension of the opening time, but also the normal symbol winning probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state, The frequency of opening the blades 2125 is also increased.

  In the short time state of this example, the control for increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol than in the non-time short state, the control for reducing the time required for the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol than in the non-short time state, the second start port 2102 Control for extending the opening time during which the second start port 2102 is opened, control for increasing the number of times the second start port 2102 is opened compared to the non-time-short state, the first special symbol indicator 1185 and the second Two special symbol display units 1186 are configured to perform all of the control required to shorten the time required for the special symbol variable display control (the time required for the decorative symbol variable display control in the liquid crystal display device 1900) to be shorter than the non-short-time state. It is desirable that

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 then performs the special symbol process as step S16. Then, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed. Next, as a process in step S17, a process is performed in which the command set in the predetermined area of the RAM 4100e in the normal symbol process is transmitted to, for example, the peripheral control board 4010.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as a process of step S18.

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs the processing of step S19, such as the first start port sensor 3524, the second start port sensor 2166, the count sensor 2160, the general winning port sensor 3522, etc. When the detection signals are in the ON state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 so that a prize ball corresponding to the signals is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 so as to pay out a prize ball to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the start memory number as a process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that operates constantly is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is terminated when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). It becomes.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 176, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is first controlled by the first start port sensor 3524. On condition that the detection signal is in the on state (the ball enters the first start port 2101) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is obtained from the RAM 4100e. A first start port passing process such as storing in one special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S32). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2166 is in the on state (the ball enters the second start port 2102) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start port passing process such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit running flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. A big hit control process (step S40) is executed. In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped becomes a mode suggesting “10R probability variable big hit A”. The first open / close winning device 2103 is controlled to open according to the short-open 10R big hit game state, and suggests "10R positive change big hit B", "10R positive change big hit C", and "10R positive change big hit D" When this happens, the second open / close winning device 2104 (large winning port 2153) is controlled to be opened according to the long-open 10R big hit gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped in the low probability state (low probability short time state or low probability non-short time state). If the result suggests a probability variation big hit (10R probability variation big hit A, 10R probability variation big hit B, 10R probability variation big hit C, 10R probability variation big hit D), after the big hit gaming state corresponding to the hit type is executed Activating the probability variation function. In addition, a big hit (10R probability variable big hit A, 10R positive variable big hit B, 10R positive variable big hit C) in a lottery for a special symbol in the high probability state (high probability short time state or high probability non-time short state state) in which the probability variation function is activated in this way. Even when the 10R probability variation big hit D) is won, the probability variation function is basically operated after the big hit gaming state corresponding to the type of the hit is executed.

  However, as will be described later, as a result of repeating the game in such a high probability state (which may be controlled to a low probability state during the big hit game state), the big hit in the high probability state (10R probability variation big hit A, 10R probability variation big hit) When the number of wins of B, 10R probability variable big hit C, 10R probability variable big hit D) reaches a predetermined number (here, 9 times) (the game is controlled 9 times to the big hit gaming state), the ninth big hit gaming state is executed. Then, control is again made to a low probability state (low probability short time state, low probability non-short time state) in which the probability changing function is not activated.

  On the other hand, the operating conditions of the short-time function will also be described later. Yes.

  For example, when a big hit (special lottery result) is obtained as a lottery result for the second special symbol, after a big hit game corresponding to the type of the hit (here, 10R probability variable big hit D) is performed (big hit) The short-time function is always activated after the gaming state is finished. The time-saving function thus operated is basically continued until the next big hit is obtained. However, although the big win was obtained as a result of the lottery for the second special symbol, the big hit in the high probability state (10R positive variation big hit A, 10R positive variable big hit B, 10R positive variable big hit C, 10R positive variable big hit D is achieved by winning the big hit. ) Is the predetermined number (here, 9), after the big hit game corresponding to the hit type (here, 10R probability variable big hit D) is performed (the big hit gaming state is ended) Later, the time-shortening function is activated only until the end of 100 special symbol variations.

  On the other hand, when a big hit (special lottery result) is obtained as the lottery result for the first special symbol, the hit type (here, 10R positive variable big hit A, 10R positive variable big hit B, or 10R positive variable big hit C) is selected. After the corresponding jackpot game is performed (after the jackpot game state is finished), basically, it is determined whether or not to activate the time reduction function based on the type of the hit. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the time-shortening function is activated after the big hit game corresponding to “10R probability variation big hit C” is performed. The time-saving function thus operated is basically continued until the next big hit is obtained. However, although “10R probability variation big hit C” was obtained as the lottery result for the first special symbol, the big hit in the high probability state (10R probability variation big hit A, 10R probability variation big hit B, 10R probability variation big hit C was obtained by winning the big hit. When the winning number of 10R probability variable big hit D) reaches a predetermined number (here, 9 times), after the big hit game corresponding to the type of hit (here, 10R probability variable big hit C) is performed (big hit) After the gaming state is finished), the time-shortening function is activated only until the change of 100 special symbols is finished.

  In addition, as will be described later, even if a big win is obtained as a lottery result for the first special symbol, Regardless of (here, 10R probability variation big hit A, 10R probability variation big hit B, or 10R probability variation big hit C), after the big hit game is performed (after the big hit gaming state is finished), the time reduction function must be operated. ing. The time-saving function thus operated is basically continued until the next big hit is obtained. However, the winning number of the big hit (10R probability variation big hit A, 10R probability variation big hit B, 10R probability variation big hit C, 10R probability variation big hit D) in the high probability state will be a predetermined number (9 times here). When the big hit game is performed (after the big hit game state is finished), the time-shortening function is activated only until the change of the special symbol for 100 times is finished.

  In the big hit control process, after performing the opening control of the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 and the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104, each set process of the high probability flag, the hour / short flag, and the hour / times counter is executed. The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state (a state in which the probability changing function is activated), and the counter value of the big hit number counter used in the big hit determination process shown in FIG. In other words, if it is not the last big hit among the 10 big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-time short-time state) ) Is set after the big hit gaming state, and when the count value of the big hit number counter is “10”, that is, among the ten big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state, the last big hit (from the high probability state to the low probability) Status (a big hit that shifts to a low probability non-short-time state or a low-probability short-time state) is reset after the big hit gaming state ends, and the control of each big hit gaming state is opened. It is reset when (Second special symbol stop processing without first special symbol stop processing or illustrated shown in FIG. 186 described later) to be. The time-short flag is a flag indicating that the time-short state (state where the time-short function is activated), and is a big hit (details will be described later) for controlling the time-short state (high probability time-short state, low probability time-short state). This is set when the jackpot gaming state based on is terminated, and will be described later on the basis of the fact that the time counter is set to “0” in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. It is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 186 or the second special symbol stop process (not shown).

  On the other hand, if the big hit execution flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S36). If is set, a small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit gaming state is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) has become a mode that suggests "small hit", A process of controlling the first open / close winning device 2103 to an open state is executed in accordance with a small hit game state in which an opening mode similar to the short-open 10R big hit game state is defined.

  If neither big hit execution flag nor small hit execution flag is set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “ On the condition that it is “0” (step S37), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and the second special symbol is suspended. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the storage area is not “0” (step S37), the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol is applied. A second special symbol process process including a lottery process is executed (step S39). Accordingly, by continuing the game so that the number of holdings of the lottery process relating to the second special symbol does not become “0”, the first special symbol regardless of the holding state of the lottery processing relating to the first special symbol. Thus, it is possible to avoid the execution of the lottery process related to the second special symbol and to execute only the lottery process related to the second special symbol continuously (priority control).

  FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

  If it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 3524 is in the on state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2101, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the counter value by the first special reservation number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S41. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved special symbols is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S41, if it is determined that the number of the first special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. The processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing in step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the processing of step S44, the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reserved number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is used as the random number thus obtained. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S41 that the number of the first special symbol hold is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S42 to S44, the first special symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S34).

  If it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2166 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2102, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the second special reservation number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  In the process of step S51, if it is determined that the second special symbol hold count is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. The processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing in step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S54, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is used as the random number thus obtained. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S51 that the second special symbol hold count is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S52 to S54, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed in accordance with the first special symbol process flag.

1. First special symbol normal processing (step S80) in which the first special random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read out, and the determination processing for winning the big hit is performed based on the read first special random number.
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which a determination process of the mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the determination process regarding the big hit in the first special symbol normal process
3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S82)
4). First special symbol variation process that waits until the first special symbol variation display on the first special symbol indicator 1185 is stopped (step S83).
5). The first special symbol indicator 1185 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 175).

  FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 180, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, then in step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol being read is read from the RAM 4100e. . Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is stored. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  And after that, as a process of step S105, based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol, a big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big win is performed. Thereafter, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, if the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short time state, high probability non-short time state) (step S111), the high probability time shown in FIG. A jackpot determination table is selected (step S112). If the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), a jackpot determination table at a low probability shown in FIG. 182A is selected (step S113) and selected. The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S114).

  The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 182 (A) is stored in the ROM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, and the gaming state is low probability (low probability non-short time) for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Jackpot judgment table at low probability used in the case of state and low probability short state) and jackpot judgment at high probability used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-short state, high probability short state) And a table. Then, in the jackpot determination table at low probability referred to for comparison with the first special random number, 51 types of first special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and 81 types of first jackpot determination values are obtained. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that the special random number matches the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit is won, and the 20217 types of first special random numbers match the loss determination value indicating the loss. Has been. In the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, a small hit determination value is set in the low probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It is not done and you won't win a small hit. In the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, it matches the jackpot determination value indicating that 51 types of second special random numbers have been won, and the loss determination value indicating that 20298 types of second special random numbers are the above-mentioned losses. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match.

  In addition, the high probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number has 399 types including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the low probability jackpot determination table. The first special random number matches the big hit determination value, the first special random number of 81 types matches the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit is won, and the 1869 type first special random number matches the loss determination value. As described above, the first special random numbers are associated with each other. In the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, a small hit determination value is set in the high probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It is not done and you won't win a small hit. In the jackpot determination table at the high probability, the jackpot indicating that 399 kinds of second special random numbers including the second special random number identical to the second special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the low probability are won. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so that they match the determination values and match the loss determination values indicating that the 19950 types of second special random numbers are the above-mentioned losses. Thus, in this embodiment, the winning probability of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is set to 1/399 at low probability (low probability short time state, low probability non-short time state). On the other hand, in the case of high probability (high probability short-time state, high probability non-time-short state), by setting the winning probability of the special symbol to 1/51, the big hit judgment value indicating that the big win is won. Increased compared to low probability.

  In this way, in this example, when the first open / close winning device 2103 is controlled to open / close according to the determination result based on the first special random number, it is difficult to determine whether it is a small hit or a 10R positive change big hit A out of a 10R positive change big hit. Yes. When the second open / close winning device 2103 (large winning port 2153) is controlled to open / close in accordance with the determination result based on the first special random number, it is possible to specify that 10R probability variation big hit B and 10R probability variation big hit C are out of 10R probability variation big hit. When the second open / close winning device 2104 is controlled to open and close according to the determination result based on the second special random number, it is possible to specify that the 10R probability variation big hit D is 10R probability variation big hit.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process and determines that it is a jackpot (step S115). ), A jackpot flag indicating that the change is won by the big win is set (step S116), the process proceeds to step S122, and the first jackpot determination table and the first special symbol read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process As a result of the comparison with the special random number, when it is determined that a small hit is made (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the variation is won for the small hit is set (step S118), and the process proceeds to step S125. The selected jackpot determination table and the first special symbol normal process read out in step S102 Results of the comparison of a special random number, if it is determined that the loss compares the reach random read Reach determination table and step S102 shown in FIG. 182 (B) (step S119).

  The reach determination table shown in FIG. 182 (B) is stored in the ROM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, and is used when the gaming state is the high probability non-time short state, the reach determination table for the high probability non-time short state, and the gaming state Reach determination table for high probability short-time state when used in high-probability short-time state, and low-probability state used when gaming state is low-probability state (low-probability non-short-time state and low-probability short-time state) And a reach determination table. In the reach determination table in the high probability short-time state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number is reached matches with the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers are not reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other.

  Further, the reach determination table in the low probability state has one reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability short time state reach. Then, the reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 kinds of reach random numbers coincide with the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. Thus, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating the reach is increased compared to the high probability time short state.

  Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-short-time state, 6 types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high-probability short-time state and the low-probability state are reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 66 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach in the high probability non-short-time state is higher than that in the high-probability short-time state and the low-probability state (low-probability short-time state, low-probability non-short-time state). Enhanced.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119) and determines that the reach is lost (step S120), the fluctuation is detected. A reach flag indicating reach is set (step S121).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 subtracts “1” from the counter value of the big hit number counter (step S122), and determines whether or not the counter value of the big hit number counter is “0” (step S122). S123). When the initialization process (step S1) is executed when the power is turned on, the gaming state is controlled to the low probability non-short-time state, and the counter value “10” which is the initial value is set in the big hit number counter. If the counter value is not “0” in step S123, that is, if it is not the last big hit among the ten big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state (high probability non-short state, high probability short state) (high If it is a big hit that shifts to or continues in the probability state), the big hit determination process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the counter value becomes “0” in step S123, that is, the last big hit (from the high probability state to the low probability state (low probability non-time short state, In the case of big hits that shift to the low probability short time state), the counter value of the big hit number counter is set to “10” (step S124), and the big hit determination process is terminated. The process of setting the counter value “10” in such a big hit number counter may be executed as a special symbol stop process.

  FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 183, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 The result of the jackpot determination process for the first special symbol, that is, the result of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the lottery result is performed by determining whether the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set (steps S131 and S134).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 selects the symbol determination table corresponding to the gaming state (the state of the high probability flag and the short time flag) (step S132a). By comparing the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 182 (C) (step S132b), the mode (first) A jackpot symbol as a special symbol stop symbol) is determined (step S133a), and depending on the determined jackpot symbol, the type of jackpot, the presence / absence of time-saving control after the jackpot gaming state ends, and the number of variable displays that can execute the time-saving control (So-called short-time number of times), type of jackpot gaming state (whether a winning ball has been acquired), and whether to reset the variation counter (Step S133b). In addition, although the determined time-saving number is set in the time-saving number counter in the first special symbol stop process (step S84), it may be set when the control of the big hit gaming state is finished in the big hit control process. .

  As shown in FIG. 182 (C), in the symbol determination table, the determination result (10R probability variation big hit A, 10R probability variation big hit B, 10R probability variation big hit C, 10R probability variation big hit D), gaming state (low probability non-time-short state, low Symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) are stored in association with each other according to the probability short time state, high probability non-time short state, and high probability short time state.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determined based on the first symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determined based on the second symbol random number.

In particular,
1. It is difficult to acquire a prize ball by controlling the short-open 10R big hit gaming state (the opening and closing pattern for opening and closing the first opening and closing prize winning device 2103 is repeated 10 times (10 rounds)), and the counter value of the variation counter is Without resetting, low probability non-time short state or low probability short time state (At this time, the state that is the first big hit that triggers the start of high probability state (high probability non-time short state, high probability short time state) If it occurs in the state of “9”)), it is controlled to the high probability non-time-short state until the next big hit gaming state is generated, and it is generated in the high probability non-time-short state and 10 from the start to the end of the high probability state. When a big hit (excluding the first big hit that triggers the start of a high probability state) is not the last big hit (when the big hit count counter is "1" to "8") Next, control is made to a high probability non-time-short state until a big hit gaming state occurs, and 10 big hits (the first trigger for starting a high-probability state) are generated in the high probability non-time short state and from the start to the end of the high probability state. If it occurs in the state that is the last big hit (the state where the big hit number counter is “10”), it is controlled to a low probability non-time-short state until the next big hit gaming state occurs. Out of 10 big hits (except for the first big hit that triggers the start of the high probability state) that occur in the short-time state and from the start to the end of the high probability state, the state that is not the last big hit (the big hit number counter is “1”) To "8" state), control to the high probability short-time state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, 10 times from the start to the end of the high-probability state that occurs in the high probability short-time state Jackpot (high probability If it occurs in the state that is the last big hit (the state where the big hit number counter is “10”) in the state (excluding the first big hit that triggers the start of the state), after controlling to the low probability time short state of 100 times 10R probability variation jackpot A that controls to a low probability non-time-short state

  2. By controlling to a long-open 10R big hit game state (opening / closing pattern for opening / closing the second open / close winning device 2104 is repeated 10 times (10 rounds)) It is possible to obtain 1000 expected values, and reset the counter value of the fluctuation counter, so that the low probability non-short state or low probability short state (high probability state (high probability non-short state, high probability) If it occurs in the state that is the first big hit that triggers the start of the (short-time state) (state where the big hit number counter is “9”)), control to a high probability non-short-time state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, Of the 10 big hits (excluding the first big hit that triggers the start of a high probability state) that occur in a high probability non-short state and are not the last big hit (big hit) When the number counter is in the state of “1” to “8”), it is controlled to the high probability non-short state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, If it occurs in the last big hit state (the state where the big hit number counter is “10”) among the ten big hits from the start to the end (excluding the first big hit that triggers the start of the high probability state) 10 big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state (the first big hit that triggers the start of the high probability state) In the state that is not the last big hit (the state where the big hit number counter is “1” to “8”), it is controlled to a high probability time-short state until the next big hit gaming state occurs. Occurs in a state with a short time probability and When it occurs in the last big hit state (a state where the big hit number counter is “10”) among 10 big hits (excluding the first big hit that triggers the start of the high probability state) from the start to the end of the probability state The 10R probability variation big hit B which controls to the low probability non-short-time state after controlling to the low-probability short-time state of 100 times

  3. By controlling to a long-open 10R big hit game state (opening / closing pattern for opening / closing the second open / close winning device 2104 is repeated 10 times (10 rounds)) It is possible to obtain 1000 expected values, and reset the counter value of the fluctuation counter, so that the low probability non-short state or low probability short state (high probability state (high probability non-short state, high probability) If it occurs in the state that is the first big hit that triggers the start of the (short-time state) (the state where the big hit number counter is “9”)), it is controlled to the high-probability short-time state until the next big hit gaming state occurs. Out of 10 jackpots (except the first jackpot that triggers the start of a high-probability state) that occur in a probabilistic non-short-time state or a high-probability time-short state, and the last jackpot If it occurs in a state where the big hit number counter is "1" to "8", it is controlled to a high probability short time state until a next big hit gaming state occurs, and a high probability non-short time state or a high probability short time state Is the last big hit (the big hit count counter is “10”) among the ten big hits (excluding the first big hit that triggers the start of the high probability state) ) 10R probability variation big hit C which controls to low probability non-short-time state after controlling to low-probability short-time state of 100 times

  4). By controlling to a long-open 10R big hit game state (opening / closing pattern for opening / closing the second open / close winning device 2104 is repeated 10 times (10 rounds)) It is possible to obtain 1000 expected values, and reset the counter value of the fluctuation counter, so that the low probability non-short state or low probability short state (high probability state (high probability non-short state, high probability) If it occurs in the state that is the first big hit that triggers the start of the (short-time state) (the state where the big hit number counter is “9”)), it is controlled to the high-probability short-time state until the next big hit gaming state occurs. Out of 10 jackpots (except the first jackpot that triggers the start of a high-probability state) that occur in a probabilistic non-short-time state or a high-probability time-short state, and the last jackpot If it occurs in a state where the big hit number counter is "1" to "8", it is controlled to a high probability short time state until a next big hit gaming state occurs, and a high probability non-short time state or a high probability short time state Is the last big hit (the big hit count counter is “10”) among the ten big hits (excluding the first big hit that triggers the start of the high probability state) 10R probability change big hit D which controls to low probability non-short-time state after controlling to low-probability short-time state of 100 times

  According to such a win type, the second special symbol is more than the expected value of the total number of prize balls that the player can obtain when the big hit is obtained in the big hit determination process for the first special symbol. The expected value of the total number of award balls that can be obtained by the player when a big hit is obtained in the big hit determination processing is larger. In addition, when a big hit is obtained in the big hit determination process for the second special symbol, the lottery mode is adopted in which the big hit determination process for the second special symbol is more advantageous for the player in that the time-shortening function is always activated. It can be said that.

  In this example, the opening and closing time of the first open / close winning device 2103 per round in the short-open 10R big hit gaming state and the second open / close winning device 2104 per round in the long-open 10R big hit gaming state (large The opening time of the winning opening 2153) is different. For example, in the case of 10R probability variation big hit B, 10R probability variation big hit C, 10R probability variation big hit D, control is made to a long open state in which the opening time of the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 per round is 28.5 seconds. On the other hand, when the 10R probability variation big hit A is reached, the opening / closing time of the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 per round is controlled to a short opening state that is 0.05 seconds that is extremely shorter than the long opening state. ing. In the case of a small hit, a short open state in which the opening time of the first open / close winning device 2103 per round in the small hit game state is 0.05 seconds, as in the short open 10R big hit game state. Is controlling. In this way, when the 10R probability change big hit A or small hit, the opening time of the first opening and closing prize winning device 2103 per round in the short-open 10R big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is too short, Even if the opening control of the first open / close winning device 2103 is recognized, it is difficult to win a game ball to the first open / close winning device 2103. That is, in the long-open 10R big hit game state, the game balls are successively awarded to the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 by firing the game balls aiming at the right side of the center actor 2400 (so-called “right hit”), We can expect to acquire many game balls. On the other hand, in the short-open 10R big hit game state or the small hit game state, even if left-handed, the game ball rarely wins the first open / close winning device 2103, which is different from the long-open 10R big hit game state. , Can not expect the acquisition of many game balls.

  In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2107, and the pair of blades 2125 of the second start port 2102 are not opened or closed. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 occurs, and there is a holding ball of the second special symbol Except for the case, only the variation display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 1185, and a big hit (10R positive variation big hit A, 10R positive variable big hit B, 10R positive variable big hit C) related to the first special symbol is generated. It will be. Similarly, in the right-handed state, a game ball is not won at the first start port 2101. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 occurs, and the second special symbol display 1186 in the second special symbol display 1186 except for the case where there is a holding ball of the first special symbol. Only the variable display is executed, and a big hit (10R probability change big hit D) related to the second special symbol is generated. In addition, if the right-handed operation is continued while the time-shortening function is in operation, the gauge configuration can be maintained so that the number of the lottery processing pending for the second special symbol does not become “0”. Therefore, even if there is a holding ball of the first special symbol, coupled with the above-mentioned priority control, the lottery processing for the first special symbol is executed (10R probability variation big hit A, 10R probability variation big hit B, 10R probability variation big hit C is won. In other words, only the lottery process (10R probability variation big hit D) related to the second special symbol can be executed continuously.

  In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when 10R probability variation big hit A is decided, 10R probability variation big hit A symbol is decided as big hit symbol, and when 10R probability variation big hit B is decided, 10R probability variation big hit B is decided as big hit symbol. When the symbol is determined and the 10R probability variation big hit C is determined, the 10R probability variation big hit C symbol is determined as the big hit symbol. Although not shown, when the 10R probability variation big hit D is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 10R probability variation big hit D symbol is determined as the big hit symbol.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S134), and if the small hit flag is set, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped. If the small hit flag is not set, the lost symbol is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped (step S136).

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after the determination process for the stop symbol is thus performed, “1” is added to the counter value of the variation counter (step S137a), and then the 10R probability variation big hit It is determined whether or not B, 10R probability variation big hit C is determined (step S137b). And, when it is determined as a type (10R probability variation big hit B, 10R probability variation big hit C) that can obtain a large number of prize balls by controlling to the long-open 10R big hit gaming state among the wins, Assuming that a specific reset condition (at least a condition that requires winning a big hit) is satisfied, the counter value of the variation counter is reset (step S137c). On the other hand, even if the game is determined to be lost or a win is obtained, a type (10R probable change that is not possible to acquire a large number of prize balls by controlling to a short-open 10R big hit game state) When the big hit A) or the small hit is determined, the counter value of the variation counter is not reset because a specific reset condition (a condition that at least the big hit is required) is not satisfied. In the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, when the 10R probability variable big hit D is determined, that is, by controlling to the long open 10R big hit gaming state, Even when the jackpot that can be acquired is determined, the counter value of the variation counter is reset. On the other hand, if it is lost, the counter value of the variation counter is not reset. Such a process of resetting the counter value of the variation counter may be executed as a special symbol stop process.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 instructs one of these lottery results (big hit type, small hit, reach lose, lose) as a process of step S138 (instructs the stop symbol form of the first special symbol). The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the information may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S139, the process is terminated.

  According to such control by the main control MPU 4100a, when the count value of the big hit number counter is “1 to 9”, that is, 10 from the start to the end of the high probability state (high probability short time state, high probability non-short time state). If the big hit is not the last big hit, the high probability flag (high probability non-short time state, high probability short time state) is set or continued by setting the high probability flag after the big hit gaming state ends. If the counter value is “10”, that is, if it is the last big hit among the ten big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state, the high probability flag is reset by resetting the high probability flag after the big hit gaming state ends. Transition to a low probability state (low probability non-short state, low probability short state).

  In addition, in this example, even if the state shifts to the high probability state, the lottery process of the first special symbol is performed as long as the big hit to control to the short time state (high probability short time state, low probability short time state) does not occur. Only the left-handed game that will be played continues. And as a result, if you have never won the big hit to control to the short-time state (high probability short-time state, low-probability short-time state) during the period from the transition to the high probability state until the nine big hits are won Thus, the player's ball is controlled to be in a low probability non-short-time state with little increase. On the other hand, if a single big hit that controls to the short-time state (high-probability short-time state, low-probability short-time state) occurs once, nine big hits are won after the transition to the high-probability state, and the subsequent low-probability state Since the short-time state will continue until the end of 100 special symbol changes, the player will be given preferential treatment for the lottery while suppressing the consumption of balls by right-handed games. The lottery process for the second special symbol can be performed.

  That is, in the left-handed state, a game based on a winning of a game ball mainly at the first starting port 2101 is executed, and the display result of the first special symbol that is variably displayed based on the starting winning at the first starting port 2101 is displayed. On the other hand, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball by setting the ratio of execution of the short-open 10R big hit game state to be high as the big hit game state executed when it becomes a mode that suggests a big hit, In the right-handed state, the game is executed mainly based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102, and the display result of the second special symbol variably displayed based on the starting winning to the second starting port 2102 is a big hit. As the jackpot gaming state to be executed when it becomes the suggested mode, the ratio of the long-open 10R jackpot gaming state to be executed is set to be all, and the winning of the winning ball becomes easy. To have. Therefore, in the left-handed state, expect to switch to the right-handed state every time 10 big hits occur from the start to the end of the high-probability state (high-probability short-time state, high-probability non-short-time state) The game is played in anticipation of switching to the right-handed state at an early stage until the high-probability state ends so that the right-handed state can be continued for a long time.

  Specifically, when the initialization process is executed when the power is turned on, the gaming state is controlled to a low probability non-short state state, and the counter value “10” which is an initial value is set in the big hit number counter. That is, when the initialization process is executed when the power is turned on, the control in the low probability non-short-time state is started and the left-handed state in which the game based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2101 is executed is controlled. .

  Then, when the 10R probability variable big hit A is won in the low probability non-time short state, the counter value of the big hit number counter is decremented by “1” and the high probability non-time short state is controlled after the short open 10R big hit gaming state. The left-handed state control is continued. In addition, when the 10R probability variable big hit A is won in the high probability non-short-time state, the counter value of the big hit number counter is decremented by "1", and until the counter value of the big hit number counter becomes "1", the short open 10R big hit game When the left-handed state control is continued by controlling to the high probability non-short-time state after the state ends, and the counter value “10” as the initial value is set again in the big hit number counter, the short-open 10R big hit gaming state The control of the left-handed state is continued by controlling to the low probability non-time-short state after the end of. As described above, even if the transition control from the low probability non-time-short state to the high probability non-time-short state is performed, as long as the 10R probability variable big hit A is won in the high probability non-time-short state, the short-open 10R big hit gaming state is repeated, Since the control of the state is continued, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball.

  In addition, if the 10R probability variable big hit B is won in the low probability non-time short state, the counter value of the big hit number counter is decremented by “1”, and the high probability non-time short state is controlled after the long open 10R big hit gaming state. The left-handed state control is continued. In addition, when the 10R probability variable big hit B is won in the high probability non-short-time state, the counter value of the big hit number counter is decremented by “1”, and the long-open 10R big hit game until the counter value of the big hit number counter becomes “1”. The left-handed state control is continued by controlling to the high probability non-short-time state after completion of the state, and the long-open 10R big hit gaming state when the counter value “10” as the initial value is set again in the big hit number counter The control of the left-handed state is continued by controlling to the low probability non-time-short state after the end of. As described above, when the 10R probability variable big hit B is won in the low probability non-time short state or the high probability non-time short state, it is possible to obtain one prize ball based on the long open 10R big hit gaming state. Since the control of the state is continued, it is difficult to continuously acquire many prize balls.

  On the other hand, when the 10R probability variable big hit C is won in the low probability non-time short state, the counter value of the big hit number counter is decremented by “1”, and after the long open 10R big hit gaming state is finished, the high probability time short state is controlled. Shift control to the right-handed state. Also, if the 10R probability variable big hit C is won in the high probability non-short-time state, the counter value of the big hit number counter is decremented by “1”, and the long open number 10R big hit game until the counter value of the big hit number counter becomes “1”. Control to shift to the right-handed state by controlling to a high probability short-time state after the end of the state, and when the counter value “10” which is the initial value is set again in the big-hit number counter, the end of the long-open 10R big-hit gaming state Later, control to shift to the right-handed state is performed by controlling to a low-probability short-time state of 100 time-shortening times. Then, by controlling to shift to the right-handed state, it is possible to win a game ball to the second start port 2102. When the 10R probability variable big hit D is won in the high probability time-short state, the counter value of the big hit number counter is changed to “ 1 ”is subtracted, and the right-handed state control is continued by controlling to the high probability short-time state after the end of the long open 10R big hit gaming state until the count value of the big hit number counter becomes“ 1 ”. When the counter value “10”, which is the initial value, is set again, the control of the right-handed state is continued by controlling to the low-probability short-time state of 100 time reductions after the end of the long-open 10R big hit gaming state. . As described above, when the transition control from the low probability non-time short state or the high probability non-time short state to the high probability short time state is performed, as long as the 10R probability variable big hit D is won in the high probability short time state, the long open 10R big hit gaming state is repeated, Since the control of the right-handed state is continued, it is easy to obtain many prize balls continuously.

  In addition, if the 10R probability variable big hit D is won before the low probability short-time state of 100 time reductions ends, the counter value of the big hit number counter is decremented by “1”, and the high probability after the end of the long open 10R big hit gaming state The right-handed state control is continued by controlling to the time-short state. On the other hand, when the low-probability short-time state of 100 time reductions is completed without winning 10R probability variable big hit D, the left-handed state is controlled by controlling to the low-probability non-short-time state. As described above, when the transition control from the low probability short-time state to the high probability short-time state is performed, the long-open 10R big hit game state is repeated by repeating the long open 10R big hit game state as long as the 10R probability variable big hit D is won in the high probability short-time state. Since the control of the right-handed state is continued so that the state can continuously acquire 10 winning balls, it is easy to continuously acquire many winning balls again.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, only the short-time state (high probability short-time state, low-probability short-time state) generated by winning either the 10R probability variation big hit C or the 10R probability variation big hit D. In addition, a predetermined period after the number of times of fluctuation display (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is reset exceeds a specific number of adjustments ( It is possible to win a game ball to the second starting port 2102, but it is more advantageous for the player to play a so-called right-handed game than a so-called left-handed game, even though it is not as fast as a time-short state. The control which becomes becomes.

  Therefore, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds a specific number of adjustments and is switched to the right-handed state, the switching to the right-handed state in the short-time state is mainly performed to the second start port 2102. A jackpot gaming state that is executed when a game based on a winning of a game ball is executed and the display result of the second special symbol variably displayed based on the starting winning at the second starting port 2102 is in a mode that suggests a big hit As described above, the proportion of the long-open 10R big hit gaming state is set to be all, so that it is easy to obtain a prize ball.

  Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds a specific number of adjustments in the low probability non-short state, control of the low probability non-short state is continued. Control transition to control. Then, by controlling the shift to the right-handed state, it is possible to win a game ball to the second start port 2102. When the 10R probability variable big hit D is won in the low probability non-short-time state, the counter value of the big hit number counter is changed. By subtracting “1” and controlling to a short state with a high probability after the end of the long-open 10R big hit gaming state, the control of the right-handed state is continued. Then, if the 10R probability variable big hit D is won in the high probability short-time state, until the counter value of the big hit number counter becomes “1”, the control is set to the high probability short-time state after the long-open 10R big hit gaming state is finished. Control of the hit state is continued, and when the counter value “10” as the initial value is set again in the big hit number counter, control is made to the low probability short time state of 100 time reduction after the end of the long open 10R big hit gaming state. To continue the right-handed control. In this way, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds a specific number of adjustments in the low probability non-short-time state, the long-open is long as long as the 10R probability variable big hit D is won in the low-probability non-short-time state and the subsequent high-probability time-short state. By repeating the 10R big hit game state, the above-mentioned right-handed state control is continued so that the long-open 10R big hit game state can continuously acquire 10 prize balls. Making it easier to acquire. Therefore, in the left-handed state in the low-probability non-short-time state, not only is it expected to become a big hit that triggers the start of a high-probability state (high-probability short-time state, high-probability non-short-time state), A player who has played a game in anticipation of switching to the right-handed state when the number of adjustments exceeds a specific number of adjustments, and has been unable to acquire many prize balls for a long time. Can be remedied.

  In addition, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds a specific number of adjustments in the high probability non-short-time state, control of the high-probability non-time-short state is continued. Control. Then, by controlling to shift to the right-handed state, it is possible to win a game ball to the second starting port 2102. When the 10R probability variable big hit D is won in the high probability non-short-time state, the counter value of the big hit number counter is changed. By subtracting “1” and controlling to a short state with a high probability after the end of the long-open 10R big hit gaming state, the control of the right-handed state is continued. Then, if the 10R probability variable big hit D is won in the high probability short-time state, until the counter value of the big hit number counter becomes “1”, the control is set to the high probability short-time state after the long-open 10R big hit gaming state is finished. Control of the hit state is continued, and when the counter value “10” as the initial value is set again in the big hit number counter, control is made to the low probability short time state of 100 time reduction after the end of the long open 10R big hit gaming state. To continue the right-handed control. Thus, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds a specific number of adjustments in the high probability non-short-time state, as long as the 10R probability variable big hit D is won in the high-probability non-short-time state and the subsequent high-probability time-short state, the long opening is long. Since the 10R big hit gaming state is repeated and the control of the right-handed state is continued, it is easy to obtain a lot of winning balls continuously. Therefore, in the left-handed state in the high-probability non-short-time state, the right-handed state is entered every time 10 big-hits occur from the start to the end of the high-probability state (high-probability short-time state, high-probability non-short-time state). In addition to expecting to switch, the game will be played in anticipation of switching to the right-handed state when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds 800 times, and a large number of prize balls can be obtained. A player who has been unable to continue for a long time can be relieved.

  Also, before the low-probability time-short state with 100 time reductions is over, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates exceeds the specified adjustment number, and the low-probability short-time state with 100 time-reductions without winning 10R probability variation big hit D When finished, the transition control to the low probability non-short state is performed, but the control of the right-handed state is continued even if not the short state. In this way, even when the transition control from the low probability short-time state to the low probability non-short-time state is controlled, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates exceeds the specific number of adjustments before the low-probability short-time state of 100 time reductions ends. For example, as long as the 10R probability variable big hit D is won in the low probability non-time short state and the subsequent high probability short time state, the long open 10R big hit gaming state is repeated, so that the long open 10R big hit gaming state continues for 10 times. Since the control of the right-handed state is continued so as to be able to acquire a prize ball, it is easy to acquire a lot of prize balls again.

  In this example, a small hit determination value is set in the low probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, and there may be a case where a small hit is won. When winning a small hit in the low probability non-short state, the left-handed control is continued by controlling to the low probability non-short state after the end of the small hit gaming state similar to the case where the 10R probability variable big hit A is won. . In this way, when the 10R probability variable big hit A or small win is won in the low probability non-time short state, it is difficult to determine whether the short open 10R big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, and a high probability state (high It is difficult to recognize whether it is the first big hit out of ten big hits from the start to the end of the probability short-time state or high probability non-time-short state. In addition, when winning a small hit in the high probability non-short-time state, the left-handed control is continued by controlling to the high-probability non-time short state after the end of the small hit gaming state similar to the case where the 10R probability variable big hit A is won. . In this way, when a 10R probability variable big hit A or small win is won in a high probability non-time short state, it is difficult to determine whether it is a short open 10R big hit game state or a small hit game state, and a high probability state (high It is difficult to recognize the number of big hits out of ten big hits from the start to the end of the probability short-time state and high probability non-time-short state. Therefore, if the 10R probability variable big hit C is won in the high probability non-time short state, the long open 10R big hit gaming state will be repeated as long as the 10R probability variable big hit D is won in the high probability non-time short state and the subsequent high probability time short state. However, of the 10 big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state, it is difficult to recognize the remaining number of times (less than 10) after winning the 10R probability variable big hit D in the high probability non-time-short state, and the long open It is difficult to predict the number of prize balls for which 10R big hit gaming state is continuously acquired.

  Also, in this example, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds a specific number of adjustments in the low probability non-short-time state, it is long as long as the 10R probability variable big hit D is won in the low-probability non-time-short state and the subsequent high-probability time-short state. By repeating the open 10R big hit game state, the control of the right-handed state is continued so that the long open 10R big hit game state can continuously acquire 10 prize balls. On the other hand, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds a specific number of adjustments in the high probability non-short-time state, as long as the 10R probability variable big hit D is won in the high-probability non-time-short state and the subsequent high-probability short-time state, the long open 10R big hit By repeating the gaming state, after winning the 10R probability variable big hit D in the high probability non-time short state out of 10 big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state (high probability short time state, high probability non-time short state) For the remaining number of times (less than 10), the control of the right-handed state is continued so that the long-open 10R big hit gaming state can continuously acquire a prize ball. For this reason, in the latter half of the big hits (for example, the seventh big hit after the 7th) from the start to the end of the high probability state, if 10R probability variable big hit B or 10R probability big hit C is won in the high probability non-short-time state. The remaining number of times until the high probability state ends is small, and even if the long-open 10R big hit game state continues, it is not possible to acquire 10 prize balls. In other words, in comparison with the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds a specific number of adjustments in the low probability non-time-short state, the number of prize balls will be reduced even if the long-open 10R big hit gaming state continues. Instead, the counter value of the variation counter is reset. Therefore, even in the left-handed state in the high probability non-short-time state, in the latter half of the ten big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state (for example, the seventh big hit), Hope to win 10R probability variation big hit A without winning 10R probability variation big hit B or 10R probability variation big hit C in the time-short state, end the high probability non-time-short state and control the transition to the low probability non-time-short state, then open long In order to enable the 10R big hit game state to continuously acquire 10 prize balls, the game will be played in anticipation of switching to the right-handed state when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds 800 times. become.

  FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 184, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the big hit flag. If so (step S141), the type of jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (step S141). If the small hit flag is set (step S143), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the small hit according to the current gaming state is selected (step S144), and the reach flag is set. (Step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current gaming state When the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag are not set, that is, when the normal loss (the loss that does not execute the reach effect) is set, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the loss is selected. (Not shown) is selected (step S147).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 4010 is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets a variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S150). As a result, variation control is performed in the first special symbol display 1185 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the variation time thus determined.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a selects the variation pattern table selected from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number, and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

  When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, it is next determined in step S151 whether or not the counter value of the short time counter in which the short time state continuation number is set is “0”. To do. If the counter value is not “0”, the time counter is counted down (step S152), and it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is “0” (step S153). . As a result, if the counter value is “0”, a time reduction end flag indicating that the control of the time reduction state is ended is set (step S154).

  If it is determined in the process of step S151 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, or if it is determined in the process of step S153 that the time reduction counter is not “0”, Then, the process proceeds to step S155. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), the processing is terminated.

  FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 185, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S171. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 186, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S181. As the processing, display control for causing the first special symbol display 1185 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing is performed, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 has the first special symbol. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral board 4010 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 resets the time reduction flag (step S184) and resets the time reduction flag (step S185) when the time reduction completion flag is set (step S183). As a result, the time-short state control is terminated and the non-time-short state control is started.

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S187). The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the effect of starting the big hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the short time flag is set, The short time flag is reset (step S189), and it is determined whether or not the count value of the big hit number counter is “10” (step S193a). If the counter value is not “10” in step S193a, that is, if it is not the last big hit among the ten big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state (high probability non-time short state, high probability short time state) (high If it is a big hit that transitions or continues to a probability state), a high probability flag is set after the big hit gaming state ends, and if it is a big hit that controls to the above-mentioned short time state (high probability short time state, low probability short time state) After completion, the time reduction flag is set (step S193b), and when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step S194), this processing is performed. finish. As a result, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the control in the high probability state is started, and the control in the short time state is started if the big hit is controlled to the short time state (high probability short time state, low probability short time state). .

  On the other hand, when the counter value becomes “10” in step S193a, that is, the last big hit (from the high probability state to the low probability state (low probability non-short-time state, If it is a big hit to shift to the low probability short time state), it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to control to the above short time state (high probability short time state, low probability short time state) (step S193c). If it is a big hit that is controlled to the above-mentioned short time state (high probability short time state, low probability short time state) in step S193c, the counter value of the short time counter is set to “100” (step S193c), and after the big hit gaming state ends The time reduction flag is set, and when the first special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift the process to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S194), this process is terminated. As a result, after the big hit gaming state is finished, if the big hit is controlled to the above short time state (high probability short time state, low probability short time state), the control of the short time state is started 100 times.

  The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a big hit start command (10R positive change big hit A start command, 10R positive change big hit B start command, 10R positive change big hit B, 10R positive change big hit B, 10R positive change big hit C, 10R positive change big hit D) Set the probability variation jackpot C start command, 10R probability variation jackpot D start command). Thereby, the effect of the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit designated by the big hit start command is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED and the speakers 130, 222, 262, 821 and the like.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (step S195), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a small hit start command indicating that the small hit gaming state is started (step S196). The standby time until the start of the small hit gaming state (the time for displaying to indicate that the small hit gaming state is started) is set in the interval timer (step S197). Then, a small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting gaming state is being executed is set (step S198), and the first special symbol process flag is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is an initial value. When updated to (step S194), this process is terminated. The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral board 4010. In step S196, by setting the small hit start command, the effect of the small hit game state instructed by the small hit start command is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is executed by the apparatus 1900, lamps / LEDs and speakers 130, 222, 262, 821, and the like.

  FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol process (step S15).

  If it is determined in step S801 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2176 is on and it is determined that a game ball has passed to the gate portion 2107, as shown in FIG. In step S802, the main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100 first obtains the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of ordinary symbols held is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S802, when it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is not the maximum value, the following steps S803 to S805 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control in the hold state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S803, the normal holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). In step S804, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, in step S805, each random number obtained in this way is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S802 that the number of normal symbols held is the maximum value, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly held. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S803 to S805, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal symbol normal process in which a normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read and a normal hit determination process for the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S806).
2. A normal symbol variation time determination process (step S807) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 based on the ordinary symbol random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1189 is stopped (step S808).
4). The normal symbol that stops the normal symbol variation display so that the normal symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the normal symbol determination processing in the normal symbol normal processing is displayed on the normal symbol indicator 1189. Stop processing (step S809)
5). When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is a mode that suggests “per-common”, the process of controlling the pair of blades 2125 to the open state is executed. Processing (Step S810)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S806) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 175).

  FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal process (step S806).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 188, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the process of step S821. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is then processed as step S822. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the symbol display mode (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary variable random numbers) is read from the RAM 4100e. Then, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and the normal symbol variation display stop stored in each storage area of the normal reserved storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is stopped. The random number (ordinary random number, ordinary variable random number) related to the display mode is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted in accordance with the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2107 are sequentially from the first (first) area. Remember. When a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2107, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable symbol control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the first occurrence). .

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the current game state is a short time state (low probability short time state, high probability short time state) (step S826). ) Is selected (step S826), and if the current gaming state is a non-time-short state (low probability non-time-short state, high probability non-time-short state) (step S825), a non-time-short normal figure determination table (not shown) ) Is selected (step S827), and the selected normal symbol determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal process (step S828).

  In addition, the normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, and the short hit normal figure hit determination table used when the gaming state is short time (low probability short time state and high probability short time state), And a non-time-saving usual time per-judgment determination table used when the gaming state is non-time-saving (low-probability non-time-short state, high-probability non-time-short state). Then, in the time-per-time common figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, 500 kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the common figure judgment value indicating that the common figure is won. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so that the random number is a common figure loss determination value indicating that the random number is a common figure loss.

  In addition, in the non-temporal common figure determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, 251 types of ordinary random numbers coincide with the common figure determination value, and 251 types of ordinary random numbers correspond to the common figure loss determination value. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match. As described above, in this embodiment, the determination value per universal figure indicating that the player wins per common figure in the time reduction is higher than that in the non-time reduction. Further, as will be described later, in this embodiment, even when the normal hit determination process (ordinary lottery) is performed, even if it is not a short time, as a result, a high probability of 50% or more (at least a probability of not falling below the appearance ratio of normal losing) With the ability to get a normal hit, the gameplay and directing performance after the number of changes (number of changes) of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) exceeds 800 times is improved. It can be raised.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected universal symbol determination table with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal process, and determines that the normal symbol is per unit (step S115). ) After setting the flag for the normal symbol indicating that the variation is won per normal symbol (step S116), the normal symbol per symbol as the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (ordinary symbol stop symbol) A symbol is determined (step S831). On the other hand, if the result of comparison between the selected normal symbol determination table and the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal process is that it is lost, the normal symbol variation control stop mode (normal symbol A general-purpose lost symbol as a stop symbol) is determined (step S832). After that, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S808) (step S833), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S807).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation time determination process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 189, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has the time reduction flag set. If this is the case (step S841), the normal time fluctuation time determination table (not shown) for time reduction is selected (step S842), and if the counter value of the fluctuation counter is less than “800”, that is, the first special symbol big hit determination Number of times of change display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) after resetting the counter value of the variation counter in step S127 of the process or step S227 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (first special symbol) If the total number of changes of the symbol and the second special symbol) does not exceed 800 (specific number of adjustments) (step S 43) When the fluctuation count has not yet reached, the normal figure fluctuation time determination table (not shown) is selected (not shown) (step S844), and the counter value of the fluctuation count counter is “800” or more, that is, the first special symbol. Number of fluctuation display of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) after resetting counter value of variation counter in step S127 of big hit determination processing or step S227 of second special symbol big hit determination processing (fluctuation If the number of times exceeds 800 times (a specific number of times of adjustment) (step S843), a normal change time determination table (not shown) when the number of times of change has been reached is selected (step S844).

  Then, a normal symbol variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected normal symbol variation time determination table with the normal symbol variation random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S148), and the ordinary symbol indicator 1189. The display of the variation of the normal symbol displayed on is started (step S847). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the fluctuation time of the normal symbol set corresponding to the usual figure fluctuation pattern determined to decide the usual figure fluctuation pattern in the usual figure fluctuation timer (step S847). As a result, the normal symbol display 1189 performs the symbol control for the variation time of the normal symbol thus determined. Then, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation processing (step S808) (step S849), this processing is terminated.

  In this example, the normal figure variation time determination table has 800 times the number of times of variation display (variation count) of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) after resetting the counter value of the variation counter. When the number of fluctuations used is not exceeded and the number of fluctuations of the above-mentioned special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) exceeds 800 times And a normal figure change time determination table for non-short-time when the change count is reached. In addition, the regular pattern variation pattern set in each regular pattern variation time determination table includes a plurality of regular symbol variation time information indicating a predetermined time (ordinary symbol variation time) required for the regular symbol variation display control. It is stored in a form associated with each of the above ordinary random numbers. Accordingly, the main control MPU 4100a selects the normal map change time determination table selected from the plural types of normal map change time determination tables according to the number of changes in the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the normal control MPU 4100a. The normal symbol fluctuation random number read in step S822 of the symbol normal processing is compared, and the fluctuation time information of the normal symbol associated with the read common symbol variable random number is obtained from this table, so that the fluctuation of the normal symbol Determine the pattern. Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the normal symbol is performed. In addition, the said normal map change time determination table is memorize | stored in ROM4100e of the said main control MPU4100a.

  That is, in a pachinko machine equipped with such a time-shortening function and a probability changing function, the burden on the hall side in an advantageous gaming state (a gaming state in which at least one of the time-shortening function and the probability changing function operates) is often increased. . For this reason, in a normal gaming state (a gaming state in which neither the time-shortening function nor the probability changing function is activated), a game (a low probability and a low probability) that requires a relatively large amount of game balls to be consumed. As a whole, the pachinko machine as a whole is designed to balance the burden on the hall side and the player side.

  However, as the balance is achieved in this way, the burden on the player increases in the normal gaming state, so if the big hit is not won even though the game has been played for a long period of time, the game will continue Motivation for the event will eventually be lost, which could have a negative impact on the availability of pachinko machines.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the average number of total hits of the game balls with respect to the game area 1100 required until the big hit (special lottery result) is obtained is maintained as a relatively large value. However, the control is performed so that the relatively large average total driving amount is varied within a specific adjustment range determined in advance. In addition, as a timing for performing such control, the number of fluctuations at the time when a large number of game balls are consumed in a normal gaming state where the burden on the player side is large (a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is specified) When the number of adjustments is exceeded), that is, when a specific amount of profit is given to the hall side.

  According to such a configuration, from the hall side, after obtaining a specific amount of profit first, the game playability as a normal gaming state (the balance on the burden between the hall side and the player side) is not limited. In this case, only the adjustment is performed to slightly reduce the burden on the player side, so that the burden in the normal gaming state does not increase. On the other hand, from the player's side, such an adjusted gaming state occurs on the condition that the player has consumed a large number of gaming balls, so the game is stopped in the gaming state. (Vacant base) can be a form of helping other players free of charge at their own expense. In addition, if the game can be performed with the game conditions being relaxed as much as possible, the motivation to continue the game (or start a new game if left as an empty base) is maintained. As a result, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 through the formation of a game situation in which it is difficult for the player to stop the game while suppressing the burden on the hall side in the normal game state from increasing. Can be planned.

  In the following, the game state until the number of changes in the special symbol exceeds the specified number of adjustments since the end of the previous jackpot (more precisely, when the long-open jackpot game state has ended) ), The gaming state (fluctuation) when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds the specific number of adjustments from the end of the previous big hit (more precisely, when the long-open big hit gaming state is finished) Three types of gaming states, that is, when the number of times is not reached and when the number is reached, will be described.

  First, in a normal game state (more precisely, a non-short-time game state), in the usual figure variable time determination table used when the number of fluctuations has not been reached, it is in the range of 60 to 600 seconds. The fluctuation time information (normal pattern fluctuation pattern) of 55 types of normal symbols set in increments of 10 seconds is stored in association with each random value that can be acquired as a normal variable random number. . That is, in this normal pattern variation time determination table, the time (average value) required for the normal symbol variation display control is lengthened and the variation is intentionally increased so that the movement of the pair of blades 2125 Aiming at the timing when the second start port 2102 is opened, it is difficult to hit the game ball.

  In addition, during the period, the normal symbol winning probability is set to a relatively low probability (for example, ½) in order to achieve the above-described balance with the advantageous gaming state. Even when the symbol lottery result is a win, the pair of blades 2125 is less likely to enter the ball than in the short-time state. It can be operated only with (repeat). That is, in this case, even if the game ball is launched (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2400, the game ball is hardly entered at the second start port 2102, so a big hit is expected. The player cannot aim at the left side of the center accessory 2400 so that many game balls win the first start port 2101 instead of the second start port 2102 (so-called the so-called second start port 2102). "Left-handed").

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when 250 game balls are so-called “left-handed”, an average of 20 games at the first start port 2101 regardless of the game state. A sphere is entered (normal real probability). In this sense, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the probability that a game ball enters the start port (the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102) is not limited to the type of the start port. In other words, it can be said that the “normal real probability of entry” is guaranteed as the lower limit.

  On the other hand, when 250 game balls are so-called “right-handed” in a gaming state in which the time-shortening function is activated, an average of 80 game balls are inserted into the second start port 2102. (Short-time entry probability). In this respect, since three game balls are paid out when a game ball enters the second start port 2102, when 250 game balls are hit “so-called right”, on average 240 One game ball will be paid out. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the time-shortening function is activated, although the burden on the hall side is large, it is possible for the player side to play the game with almost no reduction in game balls until a big hit is obtained.

  In the time-short state control, the normal symbol win probability is set to 250/251, and the time required for the normal symbol variable display control is set to a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the non-time-short state. ). When the normal symbol lottery result is won, the pair of blades 2125 of the second starting port 2102 is opened and closed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) longer than the non-time-short state. The pattern is repeated more times (for example, three times) than in the non-time-short state. That is, during the control of the short-time state, the probability that the lottery result of the above-mentioned normal symbol wins is much higher than that of the non-time-short state, and the time required for the variable symbol display control of the above-mentioned normal symbol Value) is constant and short, and the pair of blades 2125 are open for a long time, making it easier to win a game ball to the second starting port 2102 than the non-time-short state. A game ball can be won more efficiently by aiming at the second start port 2102 than the one start port 2101. Further, as will be described later, when a game ball wins the second starting port 2102, the number of winning balls as a type of jackpot when the lottery processing of the special symbol is a big hit than the first starting port 2101 The probability of deciding on a big hit that is set to be controlled to a big hit game state (a long open big hit game state) is high. For this reason, during the control of the short-time state, the player moves the right side of the center accessory 2400 so that many game balls pass through the gate portion 2107 and many game balls win the second start port 2102. A game ball is launched aiming at (so-called “right-handed”).

  By the way, in the normal gaming state (more precisely, the non-short-time gaming state), the pair of blades has only the probability of the normal time and the normal operation mode in the non-short-time time period when the number of fluctuations has not been reached. As described above, the 2125 is operable. Therefore, even if the game ball can be so-called “right-handed” aiming at the timing at which the second starting port 2102 is opened, the second starting port 2102 has a “normal real-time probability of entering”. However, only the “normal ideal probability of entry” that does not reach the “short time entry probability” is realized.

However, as described above, in this period, it is difficult to hit the game ball aiming at the timing at which the second starting port 2102 is opened by the operation of the pair of blades 2125. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) exceeds a specific number of adjustments,
・ When playing under the above-mentioned “normal real probability of entry”, the upper limit is the average total number of hits required to get a big hit, and ・ the above-mentioned “normal ideal probability of entry” When the game is played, the average number of total hits required to obtain a big hit is within the specific adjustment range set at the lower limit, respectively (the closer to the “normal ideal probability of entry”) Side) is controlled so that the average total number of shots in the normal gaming state can be varied.

  More specifically, in the normal gaming state (more precisely, non-short-time gaming state), a special symbol from the end of the previous jackpot (more precisely, when the long-open jackpot gaming state has ended). General chart change time determination table used in a predetermined period (when the change count is reached) when the change count of the first special symbol and the second special symbol exceeds a specific adjustment count (for example, 800). Then, 55 types of normal symbol variation time information (ordinary symbol variation pattern) set in increments of 0.01 seconds in the range of 7.23 to 7.77 seconds can be obtained as random numbers that can be acquired as ordinary variable random numbers. It is memorized in the form corresponding to each of each. That is, in this normal figure fluctuation time determination table, the time required for the above-mentioned normal symbol fluctuation display control is compared with the normal figure fluctuation time determination table used in a period before a specific number of adjustments (for example, 800 times). By shortening the (average value) and keeping the variation small, the second start port 2102 has a pitch probability close to the “normal ideal pitch probability” simply by continuing so-called “right strike”. Game balls are allowed to enter (normally adjusted entrance probability).

  Here, the “regular entry probability after normal adjustment” refers to the difference between the “normal real entry probability” and the “normal ideal entry probability” through such a setting change that takes the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. It is set within the range (within a specific adjustment range). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, when 250 game balls are so-called “right-handed” under the “regulated entry probability after normal adjustment”, the second start port On average, 25 game balls can enter 2102.

  By the way, in the normal gaming state (more precisely, non-short-time gaming state), in such a predetermined period after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds a specific number of adjustments (non-short-time when the number of fluctuations is reached) The lottery processing of the second special symbol, where the lottery content is preferentially over the lottery processing of the first special symbol, although the consumption of the player's ball is not sufficiently suppressed as in the short-time state, Execution is possible with a probability equal to or greater than the probability of entering the starting port 2101 “normal real probability of entering”. Therefore, depending on the timing at which a specific number of adjustments arrives, there is a concern that the burden on the hole side becomes large despite the normal gaming state, and the balance between the hole side and the player side is disrupted.

  In particular, in the lottery process of the second special symbol according to this embodiment, only “10R probability variation big hit D” is obtained as the hit type. Therefore, if a win is obtained in the lottery process of the second special symbol during the period (when the number of fluctuations is not reached), the remaining 9 winning lotteries until the high probability state ends will be It is possible to perform in a state where the short-time function is activated in which consumption is suppressed, and it is possible to obtain a lot of prize balls in the big hit game for each of them.

  In other words, in this case, assuming that the expected number of winning balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of “10R probability variation jackpot D” is 1000, after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number During the control in the non-time-short state, once winning is obtained by the lottery process of the second special symbol, “10000 × 10” by “1000 × 10 times” in a state where consumption of the holding ball is suppressed. A large number of prize balls will be expected. At this time, a large number of prize balls such as “9000” can be obtained as a net increase even considering that the number of game balls consumed during the big hit game for 10 times is “1000”.

  On the other hand, during the period (when the number of fluctuations is not reached), when 250 game balls are hit to the right, an average of 25 game balls enter the second start port 2102. (Regarding the probability of entering after normal adjustment), calculation after switching from “Normal real probability of entering” to “Probability of entering after normal adjustment” (after exceeding a specific number of adjustments) In the above, if an average of 4000 game balls are consumed by a right hit, a big win is won (a win probability of 1/399 for the big win). However, in the normal gaming state (more precisely, non-short-time gaming state), during such a predetermined period after the number of changes in the special symbol exceeds a specific number of adjustments (non-short-time when the number of fluctuations is reached) The above-mentioned average total number of hits (“4000” as the player's burden) at a given time is the expected value of the total number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player when the jackpot is won (the burden on the hall) If the relationship is smaller than “9000”, the burden on the hole side may become large despite the normal gaming state. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after switching from “normal real-time probability of entry” to “normal-time adjusted entry probability” (after exceeding a specific number of adjustments), such a game The conditions are continued until the jackpot is won.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the number of game balls required to exceed the above-mentioned “specific number of adjustments” that determines the entry timing into such a period (when the number of fluctuations is not reached) Is more than the expected value of the total number of prize balls that can be earned by the player when the big win is won during the period (when the number of fluctuations is not reached) ("9000" as the burden on the hall side) The “specific number of adjustments” is set so as to increase. According to such a configuration, the load on the hall side exceeds “9000” when a big hit is won by right-handed in a predetermined period after exceeding a specific number of adjustments (when the number of fluctuations is not reached) A certain number of adjustments will be reached after a certain number of game balls have been secured in advance as the amount to be acquired on the hall side.

  Moreover, even after exceeding this specific number of adjustments, in view of the fact that, on average, the consumption of “4000” gaming balls will be required before the big hit is won, from the hall side, As long as the gameability (balance between the hall side and the player's side) as a normal gaming state is not disrupted, only adjustments are made to slightly reduce the player's burden. There is no such thing as increasing the burden. On the other hand, on the player's side, on the condition that it has consumed so many game balls, it has been switched from “normal real-time probability of entry” to “normal-time adjusted entry probability”. , Because it is now possible to perform lottery processing of the lottery content ("10000 pieces" if you win a big hit) than before, even if you want to stop further game continuation It becomes difficult and the player's motivation to continue the game can be maintained.

  However, in order to further reduce the burden on the hall side in the normal gaming state, for a predetermined period after exceeding the specific number of adjustments, the average total driving time required when playing a game until a big win is won during that period. It is more important that the quantity (the player's burden) is larger than the expected value of the total number of prize balls that can be earned by the player (the burden on the hall) when the jackpot is won. desirable.

  In other words, in this case, the gameability as a normal game state (the balance concerning the burden on the hall side and the player side) is maintained only by this gameability for a predetermined period after exceeding the specific number of adjustments. Become. Therefore, even if “specific adjustment count” is exceeded, the quantity exceeding the share on the hall side when the big hit is won by right-handed in the predetermined period after the specific adjustment count is exceeded (when the fluctuation count is not reached) The game balls need not be secured in advance, and the handling becomes easier, so that the gameability can be enhanced by setting with a higher degree of freedom.

  In addition, with regard to the “specific number of adjustments”, for example, the specific number of adjustments is set to a value smaller than the number of changes (average number) of special symbols required until the big hit is won. It is also possible to do. That is, the predetermined period after exceeding the “specific adjustment count” is ended with a change of about 30 special symbols, and the “specific adjustment count” is set to “200”, “400”, “600”. If it is set at each of a plurality of timings such as “”, a game on the second start port 2102 side that cannot be played unless a lot of game balls are consumed without increasing the burden on the hall side. You will be able to give them opportunities to enjoy regularly.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as long as the game machine is in the normal gaming state, the number of changes in the special symbol (the total value of the number of changes in the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is the specific number of adjustments. Regardless of whether (for example, 800 times) is exceeded or not, when a game ball passes through the gate part 2107, the normal probability (for example, the normal symbol winning probability “1/2”) and the normal operation By making the pair of blades 2125 operable only with a mode (for example, the pair of blades 2125 repeats the open / close pattern of 0.5 seconds twice) Even when the control using the usual figure variable time determination table is executed, the average total number of game balls to be thrown into the game area 1100 required until the big hit is obtained is a relatively large value. This is to be maintained.

  However, even when the control related to the adjustment that slightly reduces the burden on the player side is performed in this way, in the normal gaming state, eventually, a relatively large number of game balls are consumed ( If the player does not hit the game area 1100, not only will he win a big hit, but the burden on the player side will not be reduced even slightly. In other words, in the normal gaming state, although a relatively large amount of gaming balls are consumed (launching into the gaming area 1100) before a big hit is obtained, Since it often becomes useless without creating any value, regret for having consumed a lot of game balls in a game that exceeds a certain number of adjustments will also reduce the game interest There are concerns.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
The first quantity expectation is the expected quantity of game balls that can be obtained by the player when the big hit is obtained in the big hit determination process (the lottery process on the first start port 2101 side) for the first special symbol. When the number of revolutions exceeds a specific number of adjustments, and a big hit is obtained based on the game ball entering the second start port 2102 in which the probability of entering the ball is adjusted. In addition, at least a part of the average number of game balls to be thrown into the game area 1100 required until the specific number of adjustments is exceeded is increased as a premium for the first expected quantity value. Control is made so that the player can acquire the game balls having the second expected quantity value.
,

  In other words, as described above, in this embodiment, when 250 game balls are left-handed, an average of 20 game balls enter the first start port 2101. The number of game balls required to perform the jackpot determination process for the special symbol (the lottery process on the first start port 2101 side) 800 times is “10000”. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a lottery process (second start port 2102) on the side played by the player during a predetermined period after the specified number of adjustments (800 times) is exceeded. When the big win is obtained in the lottery process on the side, a part of “10000 pieces” consumed by the player (acquired by the hall side) until the number of adjustments is exceeded is increased as a premium. A game ball with an expected value can be obtained. In addition, when a big hit is obtained in the big hit determination process for the second special symbol (the lottery process on the second start port 2102 side), the game is performed until the number of adjustments is exceeded, even if the time-shortening function is always activated. It can be said that at least a part of “10000 pieces” consumed by the player side (acquired by the hall side) contributes as a premium. As a result, it is avoided that the game balls consumed before exceeding the specific number of adjustments (800 times) in the normal game state are wasted without generating any value. As a result, a decrease in the entertainment interest is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
In the normal gaming state, the expected value of the total number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player when the big win is obtained in the big hit determination process (the lottery process on the first start port 2101 side) for the first special symbol ( The difference between the first expected value) and the above-mentioned average driving total amount when the game is aimed at the first start port 2101 is “A”, and in the normal gaming state, the big hit determination process for the second special symbol Aiming at the expected value (second-side expected value) of the total number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player when a big win is obtained in (the lottery process on the second starting port 2102 side) and the second starting port 2102 The difference from the above average total number of shots when playing
When the number of changes in the special symbol (total value of the number of changes in the first special symbol and the second special symbol) exceeds a specific number of adjustments (for example, 800 times), the gate 2107 is moved to the game ball. The setting change to the side that shortens the length of the game cycle (ordinary symbol variation time) from when the pair of wings 2125 operates until the pair of blades 2125 operates (the normal diagram variation time determination table when the number of times the variation is reached) ), The difference is changed from “A> B” (before 800 times) to “A <B” (after 800 times).

  In such a configuration, even if the consumption of game balls has increased to a level exceeding a specific number of adjustments (800 times) without winning a big win, Anxiety about continuing the game without burdening it will be alleviated, and the decline in the game entertainment will be suppressed.

  However, on the other hand, as long as the game is in the normal gaming state, whether or not the number of changes in the special symbol (total value of the number of changes in the first special symbol and the second special symbol) exceeds a specific number of adjustments (for example, 800 times). Regardless, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2107, the normal probability (for example, the normal symbol winning probability “1/2”) and the normal operation mode (for example, the pair of blades 2125 is 0) As described above, the pair of blades 2125 can be operated only with a .5 second opening / closing pattern repeated twice. Therefore, even if the difference is changed from “A> B” (before 800 times) to “A <B” (after 800 times), the big hit is It becomes possible to maintain the average total consumption amount of game balls required until it is obtained as a relatively large value.

  In addition, the average total consumption of game balls required to obtain a big hit in each gaming state is the winning probability of the normal symbol set in each gaming state, the fluctuation display pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, This includes the influence of the operation mode of the pair of blades 2125 when winning in the normal symbol.

  In this way, during the control of the non-time-short state after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds a predetermined number, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit or the open state of the pair of blades 2125 The time is the same as during the control of the non-time-short state before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number, but the average value of the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is greatly shortened. By reducing the variation, although not as short as the short time state, it is possible to win the game ball to the second starting port 2102 and increase the number of times the second special symbol is changed and displayed per unit time. For this reason, during the control of the non-time-saving state after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds a predetermined number of times, a relatively large number of games are placed in the second start port 2102 due to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2107 The ball is allowed to win, and the lottery process of the second special symbol is more preferential than the lottery process of the first special symbol, and the game is aimed at the right side of the center bonus 2400. It is made more beneficial for the player to play a ball (so-called “right-handed”).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when 250 game balls are left-handed, an average of 20 game balls are inserted into the first start port 2101. On the other hand, during the control of the non-time-short state after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number of times, the normal figure variation time determination table for the non-time-short time when the number of fluctuations has not been reached and the gauge configuration on the right side of the game area 1100 When 250 game balls are hit to the right, an average of 25 game balls enter the second start port 2102. In this way, during the control of the non-time-saving state after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number, the probability of entering the first starting port 2101 when left-handed is more Since the probability of entering the second starting port 2102 is slightly higher, the player's consumption of the ball cannot be sufficiently suppressed as in the case of a short time.

  However, during the control of the non-time saving state after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number, it can be said that the player's consumption of the ball is not sufficiently suppressed as in the case of the time reduction. It is possible to execute the lottery process for the second special symbol in which the lottery content is preferentially given over the lottery process for the special symbol. In particular, in the lottery process of the second special symbol according to this embodiment, only “10R probability variation big hit D” is obtained as the hit type. Therefore, during the control of the non-time-saving state after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number, if the winning is obtained by the lottery process of the second special symbol, the remaining nine times until the high probability state ends. It is possible to perform a lottery lottery with the short-time function activated so that the consumption of holding balls is suppressed, and it becomes possible to obtain a prize ball in the big hit game for each of them .

  In other words, in this case, assuming that the expected number of winning balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of “10R probability variation jackpot D” is 1000, after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number During the control in the non-time-short state, once winning is obtained by the lottery process of the second special symbol, “10000 × 10” by “1000 × 10 times” in a state where consumption of the holding ball is suppressed. A large number of prize balls will be expected.

  In addition, during the control of the non-time-saving state after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds a predetermined number, when 250 game balls are hit to the right, 25 game balls are averaged at the second start port 2102. Since the winning probability is a low probability such as “1/399” because of winning, it is calculated that if you hit an average of 4000 game balls on the right, you will win a big hit. The Rukoto. Therefore, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds a predetermined number (800), “10000” that can be obtained when the big hit is obtained, and a high probability non-time-short state until the big hit is obtained. The difference between “4000” and “1000”, which is the number of game balls consumed during the big hit game for 10 times, can be expected as a net increase. The non-short-time state after the number of fluctuations exceeds the predetermined number (800 times) is a state in which the number of possessed balls decreases as the game progresses (a state in which neither the probability variation function nor the time-short function operates). Regardless, it can be said that the player is in a gaming state that is difficult to stop even if he wants to stop further games.

  However, for the expected value of the game ball that can be obtained when the big hit is obtained when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds a predetermined number (800 times), this generates a net increase as described above. It is more desirable not to have such a large value. That is, in this case, it is possible to maintain motivation to continue the game while reducing the burden on the hall side in the normal game state.

  In addition, regarding the probability of entering the second starting port 2102 after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number, the lottery processing of the second special symbol is more preferential than the lottery processing of the first special symbol. In combination with this, it is sufficient if the probability is such that it is more beneficial for the player to play a game ball aiming at the right side of the center object 2400 (so-called “right-handed”). The probability of entering the first start port 2101 is not necessarily higher. However, in this case, at least a part of the decrease in the probability of entering the starting port after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number is turned as a preferential amount of the lottery content. Therefore, at least a part of the average number of game balls that are required until the number of times the special symbol fluctuates reaches a predetermined number is not increased as a premium for the above first side expected value.

[7. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  In the sub main process, as shown in FIG. 190, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment executes a 2 ms steady process as an interrupt process every 2 ms. That is, in this 2 ms steady process, the counter value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is incremented ("1" is added to the counter value). As a result of repeating the count-up every time 2 ms elapses, when the counter value becomes 8 (when 16 ms elapses), the 16 ms elapse flag T is set and the 16 ms elapse monitoring is performed. The counter value of the counter is reset.

  In this regard, in the process of step 1002, such a 16 ms elapsed flag T is monitored until the 2 ms steady process is set (loop process). As a result, when it is determined that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set (Yes in step 1002), after resetting the 16 ms elapsed flag (step S1003), a 16 ms steady process described later is performed (step S1004). The 16 ms steady process is performed every 16 ms.

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, 821, and the like based on various effect commands received from the main control board 4100 is executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to the process of step S1002, and this is monitored again until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set in the 2 ms steady process described above (loop process).

[About 16ms steady processing]
FIG. 191 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process.
As shown in FIG. 191, in the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first analyzes various effect commands received from the main control board 4100 (command analysis process) as the process of step S1100. Next, based on the analyzed effect command, control (effect control processing) for effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed (step S1200). More specifically, the setting of the notice effect that can appear in the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the determination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that can appear in the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the like are performed.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided in the door frame 5 and the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 to generate a sound effect (for example, BGM) that promotes the effect. A sound control process for sound output is executed (step S1300). Further, the lamps / LEDs are lit on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided on the door frame 5 and the light emitting boards 3115 provided on the game board 4. A process of transmitting a signal or the like is executed (step S1400).

  After this, the commands set in the above-described processing S1200 to S1400 for the relay terminals 3508, 3509, 3510 attached to the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 (in addition to the display commands described later, An information output process for transmitting a sound output command, a light emission decoration command, or the like is performed (step S1500). As a result, the above-described setting is performed through the liquid crystal display device 1900, the speakers 821, the door frames 5 and the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432 provided in the game board 4. Production according to the command is performed.

  After this information output process (step S1500) is performed, when the random number update process in which the random numbers used for various settings are updated in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed (step S1600), the 16 ms steady state is performed. The process ends.

  It should be noted that such processing in steps S1100 to S1600 (16 ms steady processing) is set as a processing amount that is completed within 16 ms, but it is assumed that when the time of 16 ms has elapsed from the start of 16 ms steady processing, the step is performed. Even if the execution up to the process of S1600 has not been completed, the process in the above-described step S1600 is continued without changing back to the process in step S1100 (from the command analysis process). It will carry out to the processing of. That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set. When it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms elapse process is performed. To start.

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the random number update process (step S1600) is executed by a 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. Is not limited to this. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub-main processing and the 16 ms steady processing.

[About command analysis processing]
Next, command analysis processing (processing in step S1100) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 192, in the command analysis process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first determines whether the effect command from the main control board 4100 is stored in the received command storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4140e as the process of step S1101. Is determined (step S1101).

  That is, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment receives an effect command from the main control board 4100, it interrupts other processes such as a 16 ms steady process and generates a command reception interrupt process, and this command reception interrupt In the processing, the effect command from the main control board 4100 is stored in the received command storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4140e. In the reception command storage area, a plurality of areas are provided corresponding to the order in which the effect commands are received from the main control board 4100. In the command reception interrupt process, these effect commands are associated with the reception order. Each of these areas is memorized separately.

  In this regard, in the process of step S1101, the contents of the received command storage area are confirmed, and if an effect command is stored, the effect command with the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 is read from the reception command storage area. (Step S1102).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the read effect command is a pattern command (command indicating a variation pattern) among the effect commands set on the main control board 4100 side (step S1103). As a result, when it is determined that the effect command is the same (YES in step S1103), the variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4140e and the variation pattern reception flag is set. (Step S1104), the command analysis process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the read effect command is not a pattern command (NO in step S1103), the read information command is a winning information command of the effect commands set on the main control board 4100 side. It is determined whether or not the winning information is a winning information command indicating the winning type including the winning or the small winning (step S1105). As a result, when it is determined that the effect command is the same (YES in step S1105), when the winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4140e (step S1106), the command analysis process is executed. finish.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the read effect command is not a winning information command (NO in step S1105), when the flag corresponding to the effect command received in the corresponding storage area of peripheral control RAM 4140e is set. (Step S1107), the command analysis processing ends. Examples of such effect commands include a fixed stop command set on the main control board 4100 side, an interval effect command set on the main control board 4100 side, and the main control board 4100 side. There are a big hit start command to be set and a small hit start command to be set on the main control board 4100 side.

[About production control processing]
Next, the effect control process (the process of step S1200) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 193, the effect control process is based on the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress of the game. Either the display process (step S1250) or the small hit display process (step S1260) is selectively performed.

  That is, as described later, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the variation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 192) is set. On the condition that the display is performed, a process for starting a display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed, including the display of the decorative symbols. For example, a display effect pattern (decoration pattern stoppage, presence / absence of the above-mentioned extension effect, etc.) is determined based on a pattern command or a winning information command, and the display effect pattern is determined according to the determined display effect pattern (for the liquid crystal control unit 4150). In addition to setting display commands, settings related to the notice effect are also performed.

  Further, in the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is “1”, a flag corresponding to the fixed stop command that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 192) is set. Display command (for the liquid crystal control unit 4150) to end the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 including the display of the decorative symbols, so that the result of the big hit lottery is displayed. And so on. At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the confirmed stop command is reset.

  Also, in the big hit display process (step S1250) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the big hit that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 192), On the condition that the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set, a display indicating that the big winning opening 2103 is opened on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or a display in the big hit gaming state (for example, round display, etc.) Each control is performed. At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of the big hit and the flag corresponding to the big hit start command are reset.

  Further, in the small hit display process (step S1260) executed when the process selection flag is “3”, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the small hit that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 192). In addition, on the condition that the flag corresponding to the small hit start command is set, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays that the big winning opening 2103 is opened, or the effect display in the small hit gaming state is displayed. Control each. At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of the small hit and the flag corresponding to the small hit start command are reset.

  As described above, the command set in the processes of steps S1210 to 1230 in the effect control process is transmitted to liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. As a result, a display effect of the contents (display effect pattern or the like) indicated by the command appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900 through the control by the liquid crystal control unit 4150 side.

  For example, when the current gaming state is a low-probability state and the gaming state is such that the number of changes in the special symbol does not exceed the above-mentioned specific number of adjustments, as shown in FIG. The numerical symbols (1 to 6, 8, 9) and the special character symbols (GOOD) can be varied as the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Then, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the fluctuation stop, when the 10R probability variation big hit A of the big hits is specified from the received determination result notification command, as shown in FIG. 194 (b), the 10R probability variation big hit A symbol (a combination of decorative symbols that will be lost) (a combination of decorative symbols that are not the same. However, the left and right symbols are the same, and the special symbol that appears in the middle during the change)) 194 (c), the 10R probability variation big hit B symbol (the combination of the same numeric symbols of the blue symbols) is determined and the 10R probability variation big hit C is selected as the big hit. When specified, as shown in FIG. 194 (d), the 10R probability variation big hit C symbol (a combination in which special character symbols are displayed together) is determined. Probability variation big hit when identifying the D is determined to 10R probability variation jackpot D symbol (a combination of special characters symbols are displayed aligned). In addition, when a small hit is specified, it is determined as a small hit symbol (a combination of decorative symbols that will reach reach loss), and when a reach loss is specified, it is determined as a lost symbol with a reach (a combination of decorative symbols that will reach a reach loss). However, when a loss is specified, it is determined that it is a loss pattern that does not involve reach (a combination of decorative patterns that are not the same. Also, the decorative patterns on the left and right are not the same). At that time (at the end of the game effect), the liquid crystal display device 1900 controls display of the determined stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, as a small hit symbol that appears when a small hit is specified in a gaming state that is in a low probability state and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol does not exceed the above-mentioned specific number of adjustments. Uses a specific display mode (see FIG. 194 (b)) that appears when the 10R probability variation big hit A symbol is specified. As a result, it is difficult to determine whether the symbol is a 10R probability variation big hit A symbol or a small hit symbol, and thus whether or not the counter value of the big hit number counter is decremented by “1”. Further, as will be described later, in such a gaming state, even if a so-called right-handed game is performed, almost no gaming ball enters the second starting port 2102, so that the 10R probability variation big hit D is specified. Although it is rare, the 10R probability variation big hit D symbol that appears when the 10R probability variation big hit D is tentatively specified is a specific display mode that appears when the 10R probability variation big hit C symbol is identified (FIG. 194 (c)). Reference) is used.

  However, as will be described later, even if the current gaming state is a low-probability state, if the number of changes in the special symbol is within a predetermined period after exceeding the above-mentioned specific number of adjustments, so-called right-handed is better. To the extent that it is advantageous to the player, the probability of entering the game ball into the second start port 2102 is adjusted to be higher. In such a gaming state, the game is possible so that only the 10R probability variation big hit D can be repeatedly won over the remaining 10 times by so-called right-handed without any subtraction value of the big hit number counter being subtracted. “1000 pieces” × “10 times” = “10000 prize balls”). In addition, even in the gaming state where the time-shortening function is activated after such “10 times” of the game is finished, the counter value of the big hit number counter is not subtracted, and so-called right-handed, It is possible to play so that only the 10R probability variation big hit D can be won repeatedly over the remaining 10 times ("1000 pieces" x "10 times" = "10000 pieces" winning balls).

  Therefore, when it is in a period in which “10000” award balls can be obtained, the numeric symbols (all numeric symbols) consisting of blue letters are extinguished as shown in FIG. 195 (a). Thus, a special character design (GOOD) and a blank design that fills the space between these character designs can be changed as decorative designs displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this case, the effective line of the symbol is changed from a plurality of lines to one line. As a mode (stop pattern) at the time of the fluctuation stop, when a 10R probability variation big hit C or 10R probability variation big hit D is specified among the big hits, as shown in FIG. 195 (b), a special character design is used. When the winning combination of other types is obtained, as shown in FIG. 195 (c), it is determined that the blank symbols are displayed together, and reach loss is determined. If specified, it is determined to be a losing pattern with a reach (a combination of decorative patterns that will reach reach), and if a losing is specified, a losing pattern without a reach (a combination of decorative patterns that are not the same. And the stop symbol determined when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect). To display control to 900. In addition, when a hit of a type other than 10R probability variation big hit C, D is obtained, after all the blank symbols are stopped and displayed, only 10R probability variation big hit D (10000 prize balls won) can be won. An effect image indicating that the game state in which the game can be performed has ended will appear. However, if a small win is won, the game is in a state where a right-handed game can be executed after this, so that only 10R probable big hit D (10000 prize balls won) can be won. It will return to the display mode of the production | presentation and decoration design shown that it is possible.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is a high probability state and a gaming state in which a right-handed game is not executable, the counter value of the big hit counter is at least “1” or more subtracted. . Note that a gaming state that is a high-probability state and in which a right-handed game is not executable is generated based on the fact that the 10R probability variable big hit B is won when the gaming state is not operating. A highly probable non-short game state.

  In other words, in this case, no matter what type of win is obtained, 10,000 prize balls cannot be obtained. Therefore, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, as shown in FIG. 196 (a), a special character design is not displayed, and an even number design (2, 4, 6, 8) composed of blue characters. The odd-numbered numerals (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) made of red letters can be changed as decorative patterns displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Then, as a mode (stop pattern) at the time of the fluctuation stop, when the 10R probability variation big hit A is identified from the big hits from the received determination result notification command, as shown in FIG. 196 (b), the 10R probability variation big hit A symbol (a combination of decorative symbols that will be lost) (a combination of decorative symbols that are not the same. 196 is determined to be a 10R probability variation big hit B symbol (combination of the same numeric symbols of blue characters) as shown in FIG. 196 (c). When specified, as shown in FIG. 196 (d), the 10R probability variation big hit C design (the combination of the same numeric design of the number design consisting of red letters) is determined, When identifying the Chi 10R probability variation big hit D is determined to 10R probability variation jackpot D symbol (a combination of the same numerical symbol of numerical symbol consisting of red). In addition, when a small hit is specified, it is determined as a small hit symbol (a combination of decorative symbols that will reach reach loss), and when a reach loss is specified, it is determined as a lost symbol with a reach (a combination of decorative symbols that will reach a reach loss). However, when a loss is specified, it is determined that it is a loss pattern that does not involve reach (a combination of decorative patterns that are not the same. Also, the decorative patterns on the left and right are not the same). At that time (at the end of the game effect), the liquid crystal display device 1900 controls display of the determined stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, as a small hit symbol that appears when a small hit is specified when the game is in a high probability state and a right-handed game is not executable, a 10R probability variable big hit A symbol is used. A specific display mode (see FIG. 196 (b)) that appears when is specified is used. As a result, even in the gaming state, it is difficult to determine whether the symbol is a 10R probability variation big hit A symbol or a small hit symbol, and thus whether or not the counter value of the big hit number counter is decremented by “1”. Further, as will be described later, in such a gaming state, even if a so-called right-handed game is performed, almost no gaming ball enters the second starting port 2102, so that the 10R probability variation big hit D is specified. This is rare, but the 10R probability variation big hit D symbol that appears when the 10R probability variation big hit D is tentatively specified is a specific display mode that appears when the 10R probability variation big hit C symbol is identified (FIG. 196 (c)). Reference) is used.

  On the other hand, even if the current gaming state is a high probability state and a gaming state in which a right-handed game can be executed, the counter value of the big hit number counter is subtracted by at least “1” or more. Therefore, no matter what kind of hit is obtained, 10,000 prize balls cannot be obtained.

  However, in this case, by performing a right-handed game, it is possible to avoid the execution of the lottery process related to the first special symbol (possibility of winning 10R probability variation big hit A, 10R probability variation big hit B, 10R probability variation big hit C). Thus, it is possible to continuously execute only the lottery process (10R probability variation big hit D) concerning the second special symbol. Accordingly, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, as shown in FIG. 197 (a), the number symbol composed of blue characters corresponding to the 10R probability variation big hit B disappears, and the odd number symbol composed of red symbols (1, 3) , 5, 7, 9) and the blank symbol filling the space between these numeric symbols can be varied as the decorative symbol. In this case, the effective line of the symbol is changed from a plurality of lines to one line. As a mode (stop pattern) at the time of the fluctuation stop, when 10R probability variation big hit B, 10R probability variation big hit C or 10R probability variation big hit D is specified among the big hits, as shown in FIG. 197 (b). When the combination of numbers of red symbols is displayed and determined, and other types of wins are obtained, blank symbols are displayed as shown in FIG. 197 (c). When a combination is determined and a reach loss is specified, it is determined to be a loss pattern with a reach (a combination of decorative patterns that will reach a reach loss) (see FIG. 197 (a)), and when a loss is specified, a reach is accompanied. No losing symbol (a combination of decorative symbols that are not the same. Also, the decorative symbols on the left and right are not identical), and when the variation time specified by the variation pattern command has elapsed (the end of the game effect) The determined stop symbols in time) to display control the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  Here, even if the current gaming state is a high-probability state, the gaming state in which the right-handed game can be executed is the gaming state in which the time reduction function is activated and the 10R probability variable big hit A is won. However, there is a non-short game state in which the counter value of the variation counter is not reset and the variation number of the special symbol exceeds a specific adjustment number. Of these, when in the gaming state in which the hourly function is activated, as shown in FIG. 182, even if any win is obtained, the hourly function may end immediately after the big hit game. There is nothing. However, when in the non-time saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 182, if either 10R probability variation big hit A or 10R probability variation big hit B is won, no time reduction will occur after big hit gaming. .

  By the way, according to the control structure relating to the game of this embodiment, the number of counted times is large until the number of times counted as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds a specific number (here, 800 times). As a result, the game value when the lose is obtained (in the form of exceeding the game value when the win is obtained) gradually increases.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
・ In the low probability non-short-time state, the expected value of the net increase that can be obtained by the end of nine jackpot games after the transition to the high-probability state at the time when “10R probability variable jackpot A” is won is “620”, and ・ In the low probability non-short-time state, when “10R probability variable big hit B” is won, it can be acquired by the end of nine jackpot games after the transition to the high probability state The expected value of the net increase is “1520”, and until “10R probability variation big hit C” is elected in the low probability non-short-time state until the end of nine jackpot games after the transition to the high probability state Expected net increase of 9000 pieces
If you combine the expected values for each category,
・ A net increase that can be earned by the end of nine jackpot games after the transition to the high probability state when the big win is obtained in the lottery processing for the first special symbol in the low probability non-short-time state Expected number is “1550”
It has become.

  Here, the “net increase” means the number of game balls consumed to obtain the jackpot game, the number of game balls consumed during the jackpot game, from the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game. Is the number obtained by subtracting.

  On the other hand, as described above, the expected value of the net increase when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number (800) is “5000”. Also, as described above, when 250 game balls are hit to the left, an average of 20 game balls enter the first start port 2101. In view of these facts, even during the control in the non-time-saving state before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 524 times (branch point of loss / loss: 800 times- (5000 pieces) -1550) / 12.5 shots), it is more advantageous for the player to lose the special symbol and exceed the predetermined number of times (800 times) than to win the jackpot (The game value when the loss is obtained exceeds the game value when the win is obtained). In addition, even when compared with the hit type, not only the “10R probability variation big hit A” but also the “10R probability variation big hit B” that activates the probability variation function and allows the player to acquire a large number of winning balls. It can be said that the game value is higher.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the counted number of times does not exceed a predetermined number of performance determinations, and the gaming situation as a lose is relatively low (the number of times counted above) While there are relatively few gaming situations), by lowering the appearance frequency when losing a specific expected effect, the player is impressed that the specific expected effect is a highly expected effect. Control. In addition, the number of times counted above exceeds the predetermined number of performance judgments, and the gaming value as a game loss is relatively high (the gaming situation where the number of times counted is relatively large). Sometimes, it is controlled to increase the appearance frequency of the specific expected effect that is impressed while the game situation is relatively small that the number of counted times is an effect with high expectation level Yes.

  In other words, in this case, when the game value has a relatively high game value as a loser (the game situation in which the number of counted times is relatively large), the expected level of success when a specific expected effect appears. Although it will be reduced, while the player has impressed that it is a highly anticipated performance while in the gaming situation where the number of counted times is relatively small, the player will appear the performance Each time, you will be aware of the possibility of winning, at least reflectively.

  In this regard, in such a gaming situation (a gaming situation in which the number of times counted above is relatively large), the player is given a normal privilege (any of 10R probability variation big hits A to C) given when a win is obtained. As well as a special privilege (expected value of “5000” as an expected value) that is given when the number of times counted above exceeds a specific number of adjustments (here, 800 times) without winning. Because it is possible to play a lottery process for the second special symbol so that a net increase of “pieces” can be obtained), it will be hit by the appearance of a specific expected performance. Every time you are aware of the possibility that you are earned, you will have a complex feeling that you may want to win or not win. Or, a game situation in which the game value when the lose is obtained clearly exceeds the game value when the win is obtained (for example, several variations of symbols are digested if the win is not obtained). In the game situation where special benefits are granted, etc., until a special benefit is granted due to the appearance of a specific expected performance with a high level of expectation per hit. A stunning performance will be realized.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the role that the specific expectation plays is not only to indicate the level of expectation that the jackpot can be obtained, but also to be planted over a long game period. By using an impression of a high degree of jackpot expectation, at the time of its emergence, the player is at least intuitively aware of the possibility of winning the jackpot, and thus the special gameplay that appears when the jackpot is conscious Combined with (gameability in which the game value of losers increases), it is to be able to obtain a certain level of satisfaction (recognition of satisfaction) regardless of whether the winning of the big hit is obtained.

  In addition, as the “predetermined number of performance determinations”, when the special symbol variation number exceeds the predetermined number of times in the non-time-short state before the big hit is won with a low probability of 1/399. It is more desirable that the number of times is larger than the average value of the required number of fluctuations. That is, in this case, a specific expected effect can appear at a high frequency only when the average value of the number of fluctuations required until the big hit is won with a low probability of 1/399 is exceeded. In many cases, jackpots are won at a stage prior to the appearance of a specific expected effect at a high frequency. It is often switched to an effect at the time of high probability without shifting to a game situation where the number of times played is relatively large. Therefore, a specific expected effect is basically positioned as an effect with a high expectation level that appears only infrequently, and as a result, the player is strongly impressed as an effect with a high expectation level. become.

[About decorative symbol variation start processing]
Hereinafter, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0” will be described including the control method related to such effects. FIG. 198 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a decorative symbol variation start process.

  As shown in FIG. 198, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the peripheral control MPU 4140a first performs a variation pattern that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 193) as the process of step S1221. It is determined whether or not the reception flag is in an ON state (set). That is, in the process of step 1221, the fluctuation pattern reception flag is turned on in the process of step S 1104 (see FIG. 192) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition on the main control board 4100 side. It will wait to be done.

  Here, until the fluctuation pattern reception flag is operated to the ON state, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs control related to the demonstration effect as follows (step S1291).

  That is, first, it is determined whether or not the demonstration effect is being executed in the liquid crystal display device 1900, and when it is determined that the display effect is not in the same state, a predetermined display is performed after the display effect such as the previous symbol variation is completed. Determine whether time has passed. As a result, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, a display command (for the liquid crystal control unit 4150) for starting a demonstration effect is set in the liquid crystal display device 1900. The display command set in this way is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 191, so that the demonstration effect is produced in the liquid crystal display device 1900 through the control by the liquid crystal control unit 4150 side. Will be executed.

  If it is not determined in step S1236 that the predetermined time has elapsed, the decoration symbol variation start process is temporarily terminated and the variation pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221). In the process of S1291, the process waits until either of the conditions for the predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in the process of step S1291 that the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executing a demonstration effect, the demonstration effect is continued.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S1221, when it is determined that the variation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 192) is in the ON state (set), the main control board 4100 side. Assuming that the predetermined start condition is established, the following processing in steps S1222 to 1231 for starting a display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first operates (resets) the fluctuation pattern reception flag to the OFF state (step S1222). On this basis, the gaming state flag indicates that the gaming state flag is in a normal gaming state (a gaming state in which neither the time-shortening function nor the probability changing function is activated), and the counted number is a specific number of adjustments (here, It is determined whether it is in a state not exceeding (800 times) (step S1223). The game state flag is used, for example, at the end of the big hit game (for example, the big hit display process (step S1250)) or when the operation of the time-saving function is stopped in response to the end of 100 special symbol changes. It is operated to indicate the type of gaming state to be controlled thereafter.

  When the game state flag indicates that the game state is in the normal game state and the counted number does not exceed the specific number of adjustments (here, 800 times) (YES in step S1223), the next step As the processing of S1224, it is determined whether or not the production mode transition condition is satisfied. As a result, when it is determined that the effect mode transition condition is satisfied, the effect mode is set according to the satisfied effect mode transition condition (step S1225). If it is not determined in the process of step S1224 that the effect mode transition condition is satisfied, the effect pattern and the stop symbol are set based on the already set effect mode type without performing the process of step S1225. The process related to the determination is performed (steps S1227, S1228, S1229).

  Here, the production mode transition condition according to this embodiment is established when the counted number exceeds the “predetermined number of production judgments”. The “predetermined number of production determinations” may be a single value (for example, 500 times) prepared in advance or a plurality of values (for example, 450 times, 500 times, 550) prepared in advance. Or the like may be selectively determined.

  However, the peripheral control unit 4140 according to this embodiment, as the “predetermined number of production determinations”, reaches the first production judgment number and can be reached after reaching the first production judgment number. Three types of effect determination times, that is, the number of effect determinations of 2 and the third effect determination number of times (790 times) that is less than the specific number of adjustments (800 times) by a predetermined number (10 times) To prepare.

  Of these, the first effect determination count is used as a transition condition from the normal effect mode to the appearance rate change mode (here, the first appearance rate change mode) in which the appearance frequency of a specific expected effect is increased. It is what Therefore, in the process of step S1224, while it is not determined that the counted number exceeds the first effect determination number, it is determined that the appearance rate change mode is not set (step S1226). While referring to the effect pattern table that is already set in the normal effect mode, information on the variation pattern stored in the variation display pattern storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4140e and the winning information storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4140e Based on the winning information stored in step 1, the effect pattern and the stop symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900 are determined (step 1228d).

  Next, a notice selection process is performed in which it is determined whether or not a notice effect is to be executed based on the notice determination random number (step S1229d). That is, as will be described later, the execution frequency of the notice effect and the contents of the effect change depending on the effect pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1900 between the normal effect mode and the appearance rate change mode. In the notice selection process, an effect mode (notice effect pattern) related to the notice effect is determined based on an appropriate notice determination random number in the notice effect table when the normal effect mode is set.

  Then, display commands (notice commands) associated with the effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the notice effect pattern in the normal effect mode thus determined are set (step S1230), and the process selection flag is set to “1”. At the time of updating (step S1231), the decoration symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 191, so that in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 side Through the control, a display effect of the content indicated by the display command (extended effect pattern or the like) appears, and a notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S1224, when it is determined that the counted number of times exceeds the first effect determination count, it is determined that the effect mode transition condition (first effect mode transition condition) is satisfied. The setting is made so as to control the transition to the appearance rate change mode (here, the first appearance rate change mode) in which the appearance frequency of the expected effect is increased (step S1225). That is, in this case, it is determined that the first appearance rate change mode among the appearance rate change modes is set through the processes of steps S1226 and S1227a (YES in step S1226, YES in step S1227a). While referring to the effect pattern table when in the first appearance rate change mode, information on the variation pattern stored in the variation display pattern storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4140e and the winning information storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4140e The effect pattern and the stop symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900 are determined based on the winning information stored in the step (step 1228a).

  Next, a notice selection process is performed in which it is determined whether or not a notice effect is to be executed based on the notice determination random number (step S1229a). That is, as will be described later, the execution frequency of the notice effect and the contents of the effect change depending on the effect pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1900 between the first appearance rate change mode and the other effect mode. Therefore, in this advance notice selection process, in the notice effect table when the first appearance rate change mode is set, an effect mode (notice effect pattern) related to the notice effect is determined based on an appropriate notice determination random number. It will be.

  In addition, for each of the processes of steps S1228a and 1229a, in addition to the case where it is determined in the process of step S1224 that the first effect mode transition condition is satisfied, none of the effect mode transition conditions is satisfied. The same operation is performed when the first appearance rate change mode is already set.

  Then, display commands (preliminary commands) respectively associated with the effect pattern, stop symbol, and notice effect pattern in the first appearance rate change mode determined in this way are set (step S1230), and the process selection flag is set. When it is updated to “1” (step S1231), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 191, so that in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 side Through the control, a display effect of the content indicated by the display command (extended effect pattern or the like) appears, and a notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

  On the other hand, the second number of production determination times is used as a transition condition from the first appearance rate change mode to the second appearance rate change mode in which the appearance frequency of a specific expected effect is further increased. Therefore, in the process of step S1224, if it is determined that the counted number of times exceeds the second effect determination count, it is determined that the effect mode transition condition (second effect mode transition condition) is satisfied. The setting for transition control to the second appearance rate change mode in which the appearance frequency of the expected effect is further increased is performed (step S1225). That is, in this case, it is determined that the second appearance rate change mode among the appearance rate change modes is set through the processes of steps S1226, S1227a, and S1227b (YES in step S1226, NO in step S1227a). , YES in step S1227b), information on the variation pattern stored in the variation display pattern storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4140e and the peripheral control while referring to the effect pattern table in the second appearance rate change mode Based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area of the RAM 4140e, the effect pattern and the stop symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900 are determined (step 1228b).

  Next, a notice selection process is performed in which it is determined whether or not the notice effect is to be executed based on the notice determination random number (step S1229b). That is, as will be described later, the execution frequency of the notice effect and the contents of the effect change depending on the effect pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1900 between the second appearance rate change mode and the other effect mode. For this reason, in this notice selection process, in the notice effect table when the second appearance rate change mode is set, the effect mode (notice effect pattern) related to the notice effect is determined based on an appropriate notice determination random number. It will be.

  In addition, in each of the processes in steps S1228b and 1229b, in addition to the case where it is determined in the process in step S1224 that the second effect mode transition condition is satisfied, none of the effect mode transition conditions is satisfied. The same operation is performed when the second appearance rate change mode is already set.

  Then, display commands (preliminary commands) respectively associated with the effect pattern, stop symbol, and notice effect pattern in the second appearance rate change mode determined in this way are set (step S1230), and the process selection flag is set. When it is updated to “1” (step S1231), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 191, so that in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 side Through the control, a display effect of the content indicated by the display command (extended effect pattern or the like) appears, and a notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

  On the other hand, with respect to the third production determination count, production in a different special production mode appears in the normal production mode, the first appearance rate change mode, and the second appearance rate change mode. Is used as a condition for shifting to the third appearance rate change mode. Therefore, in the process of step S1224, when it is determined that the counted number exceeds the third effect determination number (here, a predetermined number of times less than the specific adjustment number), the effect mode Assuming that the transition condition (third effect mode transition condition) is satisfied, the third appearance rate change mode is set (step S1225). That is, in this case, it is determined that the third appearance rate change mode among the appearance rate change modes is set through the processes of steps S1226, S1227a, and S1227b (YES in step S1226, NO in step S1227a). , NO in step S1227b), information related to the variation pattern stored in the variation display pattern storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4140e, and the peripheral control while referring to the effect pattern table in the third appearance rate change mode Based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area of the RAM 4140e, the effect pattern and the stop symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900 are determined (step 1228c).

  Next, a notice selection process is performed in which it is determined whether or not the notice effect is to be executed based on the notice determination random number (step S1229c). That is, as will be described later, the execution frequency of the notice effect and the content of the effect change depending on the effect pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1900 between the third appearance rate change mode and the other effect mode. Therefore, in this advance notice selection process, in the notice effect table when the third appearance rate change mode is set, the effect mode (notice effect pattern) related to the notice effect is determined based on an appropriate notice determination random number. It will be.

  In addition, in each of the processes in steps S1228c and 1229c, in addition to the case where it is determined in the process in step S1224 that the third effect mode transition condition is satisfied, none of the effect mode transition conditions is satisfied. The same operation is performed when the third appearance rate change mode is already set.

  Then, display commands (preliminary commands) respectively associated with the effect pattern, stop symbol, and notice effect pattern in the third appearance rate change mode determined in this way are set (step S1230), and the process selection flag is set. When it is updated to “1” (step S1231), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 191, so that in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 side Through the control, a display effect of the content indicated by the display command (extended effect pattern or the like) appears, and a notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

  On the other hand, in the processing of step S1223, it is determined that the gaming state flag does not indicate that the gaming state flag is in the normal gaming state, or the gaming state flag indicates that the gaming state flag is in the normal gaming state, but the counted number of times When it is determined that the number of adjustments exceeds a specific number of adjustments (here, 800), the detailed description is omitted, but the production pattern and stop symbol are determined based on the production table according to the current gaming state. (Step S1228e) In the notice effect table according to the current gaming state, the effect aspect (notice effect pattern) related to the notice effect based on the appropriate notice determination random number, including the determination of whether or not to execute the notice effect. The notice selection process in which is determined is executed (step S1229e).

  Then, a display command (preliminary command) associated with the effect pattern, stop symbol, and notice effect pattern corresponding to the current gaming state thus determined is set (step S1230), and the process selection flag is set to “1”. ”(Step S1231), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 191, so that in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 side Through the control, the display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and the notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the appearance of a specific expected effect among the normal performance mode, the first appearance rate change mode, and the second appearance rate change mode. The probabilities are made different. However, in view of the fact that the appearance frequency and the expectation at the time of the appearance are basically in a trade-off relationship, even if the appearance frequency of the specific expected effect is increased, the specific expected effect is used instead. Since only the feeling of expectation when appears will be low, it will be difficult to maintain motivation to continue the game.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, in the normal effect mode, the first appearance rate change mode, and the second appearance rate change mode, a specific effect mode is provided in any effect mode. Control is performed so that an effect (for example, an effect in which a specific decorative design is variably displayed while a specific background image appears) appears. That is, in this case, it is difficult for the player to grasp which effect mode is being controlled only by looking at the effect mode appearing on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, even when the specific expected effect appears when the appearance frequency of the specific expected effect is high (the probability of being a big hit when the specific expected effect appears is low) The possibility that a specific expected performance may have appeared when in the normal performance mode is no longer excluded, so that a specific expected performance can be executed with the same feeling of feeling as when in the normal performance mode. Become.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the number of times counted is in a relatively small period (normal production mode), for a specific expected production, instead of the appearance frequency being low, the jackpot expectation degree is By making it function as a high performance, an image as a highly anticipated and rare performance is planted for the player. When the counted number of times is in a relatively large period (appearance rate change mode), an image planted over such a long game period (normal performance mode) (high hit expectation is high, and the appearance probability is reduced). The production value using the production value as a production with scarcity is being performed. In other words, in this case, even if a specific expected performance appears, it is possible to make the player at least intuitively aware of the possibility of winning the big hit, and there is such a rarity. Coupled with being able to see the performance, the motivation to continue the game can be suitably maintained.

  In order to realize an effect using such an image, until the big hit calculated from the big hit probability is obtained with respect to the timing (first production judgment number) of the transition control from the normal effect mode to the appearance rate change mode. It is more desirable to set the number of rotations to be greater than the average number of rotations. In other words, in this case, as long as a game that matches the winning probability of the jackpot (a game that wins the jackpot with the average number of revolutions and resets the counted number), the mode changes from the normal performance mode to the appearance rate change mode. Since it will not be controlled, it will only have an image as a highly anticipated and rare performance. Under such an image, it is needless to say that even if there is a case where the jackpot is lost, it is possible to improve the game entertainment just by the appearance of a specific expected performance.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the player is unlucky and rarely exceeds the average number of revolutions until the big hit calculated from the big hit probability is obtained. As long as the control is performed as described above using the image planted in the normal effect mode (control to shift to the appearance rate change mode). That is, in this case, only after the average number of revolutions until the big hit calculated from the big hit probability is obtained (only when the player's luck is bad), the appearance of a specific expected performance at a higher frequency than before However, the image that has been planted over a long period of time in the game so far will favorably maintain the motivation to continue the game even when the player is unlucky.

  However, even if it is such a configuration, if the timing (first production determination number) for which the transition control from the normal production mode to the appearance rate change mode is controlled as the fixed number of fluctuations, the counted number is Only by checking whether or not the number of changes has been reached, it may be possible for the player to easily grasp whether or not the mode is in the appearance rate change mode.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 4140 according to the present embodiment, as the process of step S1224, first, a specific number greater than the average number of rotations until the big hit is obtained (the number of special symbol fluctuations) is obtained. It is determined whether or not the number of times (for example, 450 times) has been exceeded. As a result, the first effect lottery regarding whether or not to perform the transition control to the first appearance rate change mode is performed on the condition that it is determined that the specific number of times (for example, 450 times) has been exceeded. In addition, it is determined that the counted number of times exceeds the first number of times of determining the production based on the fact that the performance per winning is obtained in the first production lottery. That is, in this case, the transition control is performed to the first appearance rate change mode in which the specific expected effect can appear at a high frequency (FIG. 198: Step S1225). In the first effect lottery, a lottery for winning per effect with a probability (for example, 1/100) that the average value of the number of fluctuations required until the effect is won is about 100 times. Processing is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the number of times greater than the average number of rotations until the big hit calculated from the big hit probability is obtained as the timing for controlling the transition from the normal production mode to the appearance rate change mode (first production judgment number). However, it is difficult for the player to grasp the same timing (first production determination count). Therefore, even when a specific expected effect appears when in the first appearance rate change mode, the possibility that a specific expected effect may appear when in the normal effect mode is not excluded. As a result, a specific expected effect can be executed with the same expectation as in the normal effect mode.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control unit 4140 according to this embodiment, after the transition control to the first appearance rate change mode is performed in this way, the transition control to the second appearance rate change mode is performed as the process of step S1224. A second effect lottery is performed as to whether or not to perform, and a determination is made that the counted number of times exceeds the second effect determination number based on the fact that the second effect lottery has been obtained per effect. To do. That is, in this case, the transition control is performed to the second appearance rate change mode in which the specific expected effect can appear at a higher frequency (FIG. 198: Step S1225). In the second effect lottery, the lottery for winning per effect with a probability (for example, 1/300) that the average value of the number of fluctuations required until the effect is won is about 300 times. Processing is performed.

  However, the number of times of the third effect determination, in which the counted number is set as a fixed value (790 times) before winning per winning effect in the first effect lottery or the second effect lottery, is set. If it exceeds, the transition control to the third appearance rate change mode is preferentially performed without performing the transition control to the first appearance rate change mode or the second appearance rate change mode. .

  In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 4140 according to this embodiment, the average number of times of winning per effect in the second effect lottery is larger than the third effect determination number (790 times). I am going to set it. That is, in this case, since the transition control to the third appearance rate change mode is often performed without performing the transition control to the second appearance rate change mode, the second appearance rate change mode is performed. The appearance itself has a rarity (the probability that the transition is controlled is low, and even if the transition is controlled, only a short period is continued).

  Accordingly, when in the second appearance rate change mode, the appearance frequency of a specific expected effect is made extremely high to such an extent that the player can grasp that the effect mode is controlled. Is more desirable (for example, the appearance frequency is 10 times or more that of the normal performance mode). In such a configuration, although the expectation when a specific expectation effect appears, the expectation will certainly decrease, but the rare expectation mode will frequently cause a specific expectation effect with rarity, which has such scarcity. A special production environment that appears as much as there is no production (the higher the probability that it will appear continuously) can suppress the decline in the gaming interest.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 4140 according to this embodiment, in the transition control to the appearance rate change mode in which the appearance frequency of the specific expected effect is increased, the specific expected effect is a highly expected and rare effect image. The planting period (normal production mode) will be provided. However, even if such a period is provided, if the transition control to the appearance rate change mode may be performed at a relatively early stage depending on the result of the first effect lottery described above, a relatively long period Since a specific expected effect appears frequently, the image planted in the normal effect mode may gradually fade.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 4140 according to this embodiment, when performing the performance in the normal performance mode, first, a specific high-expected notice effect (specific expected effect) is performed based on the result of the big hit lottery. A notice determination is made as to whether or not (FIG. 198: Step S1229d). Only when it is determined in this notice determination that a specific highly anticipated notice effect is to be performed, the display output of the highly anticipated notice video that requires a predetermined time at a specific timing after the change of the special symbol is started. The production control is performed so that the display output of the high-expected warning moving image is terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start (FIG. 198: Step S1230).

  On the other hand, when performing the performance in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), first, whether or not to perform a specific high-expected announcement effect based on the result of the big hit lottery The advance notice determination is performed for the car (FIG. 198: Steps S1229a and S1229b). However, in the peripheral control unit 4140 according to this embodiment, even if it is not determined that the specific high expectation notice effect is performed in the notice determination, the specific control after the change of the special symbol is started. A control (a control to start forcing) that allows the display output of a highly anticipated notice video that requires a predetermined time at the timing to start is performed (FIG. 198: step S1230). In addition, when the forced start is started in this way, the high-expected warning video is displayed at the stage where the high-expected warning video that requires the predetermined time is not completed before the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the forced run. The output is terminated (FIG. 198: Step S1230).

  According to such a configuration, in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), the display output of the high-expected warning video as the specific high-expected warning effect starts at a high frequency. However, if it is not determined in the advance notice determination that the specific highly anticipated advance notice effect is to be performed, the display output is ended at the intermediate stage. As a result, in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), while the specific high expectation notice effect appears at a high frequency, the effect reliability (the effect concerned) (Probability that a big hit is obtained when appears) can be suitably maintained.

  Conversely, when in the normal performance mode with a relatively small number of counted rotations (a period shorter than the average number of rotations until the big hit calculated from the big hit probability is obtained), a specific high expectation notice is given. When an effect appears, only a display pattern that is displayed and output until it is completed is allowed to appear. In other words, in this case, as long as a game that matches the winning probability of the jackpot (a game that wins the jackpot with the average number of revolutions and resets the counted number of times), a specific high-expected announcement effect is in the middle. Since it does not end at the stage of production, it has only an image as a high-expected announcement effect from the time when the display output of the high-expected announcement video requiring a predetermined time is started.

  In this regard, in the first appearance rate change mode (or second appearance rate change mode) according to this embodiment, an image planted over such a long game period (normal performance mode) (high expectation requiring a predetermined time) It is supposed to produce an effect using an image as a notice effect with a high degree of expectation from the start of the display output of the notice video. In other words, in this case, even if the display output of the high-expected announcement video that requires a predetermined time is terminated in the middle, the player can be at least intuitively aware of the possibility of winning the jackpot when it appears. Furthermore, coupled with the fact that such a rare performance can be seen, it is possible to suitably maintain motivation for continuing the game.

  In addition, as a control method related to display output of a highly anticipated notice video that requires a predetermined time, videos that have different lengths depending on whether they are terminated in the middle stage or not in the middle stage It may be performed by preparing and selectively displaying and outputting the moving images.

  However, even when such control is performed, the first appearance rate change mode (or the second) is applied to the completed portion of the high-expectation notice video whose appearance ratio is low in the normal performance mode. In the appearance rate changing mode), the appearance rate is still kept low. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the motivation to continue the game by causing the rare effect in this manner when it is in the normal performance mode to appear frequently when in the appearance rate change mode. There are concerns that are difficult.

  However, on the other hand, in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), after increasing the appearance ratio of such a high-expected preview video, it simply appears until the final completion part. If it does in this way, it is as having mentioned above that it may have a bad influence on the production reliability as a specific high expectation notice production. Therefore, the specific high-expected announcement effect is controlled as follows when in the normal effect mode and when in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), respectively. Is more desirable.

  FIG. 201 is a time chart illustrating an example of a control method related to display output of a high-expectation notice video that appears in a specific high-expectation notice effect.

  That is, first, in the normal performance mode, only when it is determined in the advance notice determination that a specific highly anticipated advance effect is to be performed (FIG. 198: step S1229d), a specific timing after the start of the special symbol change is started. The display control of the high-expected warning video that requires a predetermined time is started and the presentation control is performed so that the display output of the high-expected warning video is finished (completed) when the predetermined time has elapsed since the start. That's right. However, here, after the display output of the high-expected advance notice video is started, the player can accept an effect operation (such as a press operation to the press operation unit 405) by the player with respect to a specific high-expectation advance notice effect (high-expected notice video). It is supposed to be controlled to allow.

  For example, now, in the normal effect mode, as shown in FIG. 201 (a), if it is at the first midway effect timing tb1 after the start of the display output of the highly anticipated notice video, this embodiment is used. The peripheral control unit 4140 performs control to allow a player to perform a rendering operation (such as a pressing operation on the pressing operation unit 405) with respect to a specific high-expected warning effect (high-expected warning video). This control is performed over a period from the first midway effect timing tb1 to the second midway effect timing tb2 before the display output of the highly anticipated notice video is finished (completed). Therefore, when a player performs a production operation on a specific high-expected announcement effect (high-expected announcement video) during the period, any one of a plurality of announcement-effect images having different jackpot expectations based on the production operation. For example, an additional effect in which a predetermined effect can newly appear is performed.

  However, in the normal effect mode, when there is no effect operation by the player for a specific high-expected notice effect (high-expected notice video) within the period from the first midway effect timing tb1 to the second midway effect timing tb2. Will be completed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the display output of the highly anticipated warning video, without performing an additional effect that a predetermined effect can newly appear. .

  On the other hand, in the first appearance rate change mode (or second appearance rate change mode), as shown in FIG. Assuming that it is at the first midway effect timing tb1, in this case as well, whether or not the display output is forcibly started (whether or not it is determined to perform a specific high-expected notice effect) is determined. First, control is performed so as to allow the player to perform a production operation on a specific high-expected announcement effect (high-expected announcement video). Similarly, this control is performed over a period from the first midway effect timing tb1 to the second midway effect timing tb2 before the display output of the highly anticipated notice video is ended (completed). In addition, similarly, in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), the player has performed an operation for a specific high-expected announcement effect (high-expected announcement video). Based on the above, an additional effect in which a predetermined effect can newly appear can be performed, such as one of a plurality of notice effect images having different jackpot expectations.

  However, in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), for a high-expected warning video that has been forced to start even though it has not been determined to perform a specific high-expected warning effect. When the player performs a production operation, as shown in FIG. 201 (b), the display output of the high-expected warning video that has been started in this manner is displayed at the timing of the middle production stage (the production operation is performed). The timing is terminated at tbx. Even in such a control method, when the display output of the high-expected warning video has been started, the high-expected warning video that requires the predetermined time before the predetermined time elapses from the start of the forced The display output of the high-expectation notice video is terminated at the stage of production that is not completed. Therefore, the performance reliability (probability that a big hit is obtained when the performance appears) as a specific high expectation notice performance is suitably maintained.

  In this regard, the peripheral control unit 4140 according to this embodiment further provides a specific high-expectation notice effect (high-expectation notice) during the period even when the display output of the high-expectation notice video has been started. If there is no production operation by the player for (video), as shown in FIG. 201 (c), the display output of the highly anticipated preview video is completed without ending at the timing of the midway production stage. It will be continued until In other words, in this case, the production operation is performed to confirm further details about the jackpot expectation level, or the scarce high expectation notice video is sacrificed at the expense of the opportunity to confirm further details about the jackpot expectation level. Whether to continue the display output until it is completed can be selected each time depending on the player's intention (depending on the operation). Thus, in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), it does not adversely affect the production reliability as a specific high-expected announcement effect, and originally appears only at a low frequency. It is possible to enjoy all of the high-expected notice videos that can be enjoyed with high frequency depending on the player's intention (depending on the operation).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player determines whether in the normal performance mode or the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode). The appearance probability of a specific expected effect increases as the counted number of rotations increases, while making it difficult for the side to grasp. However, the effect pattern appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is based on the variation time (variation pattern) determined on the main control MPU 4100a side. Therefore, for example, a high expectation effect pattern associated with a high expectation variation pattern (relatively long variation time) in which the presence or absence of execution is determined based on reach determination on the main control MPU 4100a side such as a reach variation pattern. If the appearance probability is simply increased on the peripheral control unit 4140 side, a deviation will occur between the fluctuation control for the special symbol on the main control MPU 4100a side.

  However, as a specific expected effect whose appearance probability is increased in this way, a notice effect (a variation pattern (variation determined by the main control MPU 4100a) that can be appropriately changed within the range of control on the peripheral control unit 4140 side) In the case of using only the effect that can appear in addition to the effect pattern that complies with the time), the change pattern (variation time) determined on the main control MPU 4100a side is used. There may be a deviation in the expectation for the production pattern.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 4140 according to this embodiment, the main control is performed when the counted number of rotations is in a relatively large period (first appearance rate change mode, second appearance rate change mode). Regardless of whether or not the MPU 4100a side has decided to perform a highly anticipated variation pattern (relatively long variation time) (reach determination), reach formation as a highly anticipated production pattern can be achieved by forming a reach state early. It is assumed that control for frequent occurrence is performed (steps S1228a and S1228b).

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 199 and FIG. 200, an example of the method of setting the effect pattern when in the normal effect mode and when in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode) Will be explained.

  FIG. 199 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect pattern and stop symbol determination process (step S1228d) in the normal effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 199, in the effect pattern and stop symbol determination process in the normal effect mode (step S1228d), first, it is stored in the variable display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 192). The variation pattern command is read, and an effect pattern associated with the variation pattern command is determined (step S1301). Here, in the effect pattern determination table in the normal effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one variation pattern command, or only one effect pattern is associated. Also good. In addition, when a plurality of production patterns are associated, any production pattern is determined based on the result of a lottery using a predetermined production random number, or one of the production patterns is based on the state related to the game or production. The production pattern is determined.

  After the effect pattern is determined in this way, the stop symbol (the symbol combination at the time of stop) that appears when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined based on the result of the big hit lottery indicated by the winning information command. It should be noted that the decorative symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1900 are to be stopped (based on the fact that the fixed stop command is set) so as to coincide with the special symbol fluctuation stop.

  That is, first, based on the winning information command stored in the winning information storage area in the process of step S1106, it is determined whether or not the result of the big win lottery is a big hit (step S1302). As a result, when the result of the big hit lottery is a big win, when the stop symbol at the time of the big win is determined (step S1303), the processing of the step S1228d (see FIG. 198) is ended. However, depending on the winning type (10R probability variation big hits A to D) obtained as a result of the big hit lottery, the stop symbols that appear when the decorative symbols are stopped (the combination of symbols at the time of stoppage) are determined to be different. This is as described above (FIGS. 194 (b) to (d)).

  If the result of the big hit lottery is not a big hit (NO in step S1302), it is determined whether or not the result is a small hit (step S1304), and if the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit. The stop symbol at the time of small hit is determined (step S1305). That is, in this case, the short open symbol combination that appears even when “10R probability variable big hit A” is obtained as a result of the big hit lottery is determined as the stop symbol at the time of the small hit (FIG. 194 (b)).

  Further, when the result of the big hit lottery is not a small hit (NO in step S1304), next, in step S1306, whether or not the display effect (a high expectation loss effect as a high expectation effect pattern) in which a reach is formed is determined. Judgment is made. As a result, when the display effect is a reach formation, when a reach loss stop symbol (however, different from the short-open symbol combination) is determined (step S1307), step S1228d (see FIG. 198). On the other hand, if the display effect is not formed with reach, the process of step S1228d (see FIG. 198) is terminated when the irregular stop pattern without reach is determined (step S1308). To do.

  FIG. 200 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect pattern and stop symbol determination processing (steps S1228a and S1228b) in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode).

  As shown in FIG. 200, in the effect pattern and stop symbol determination processing (steps S1228a and S1228b) in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), first, The variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 is read, and the effect pattern associated with the variation pattern command is determined (step S1321). Here, also in the effect pattern determination table in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), a plurality of effect patterns are associated with one variation pattern command. Or only one effect pattern may be associated. When a plurality of performance patterns are associated, one of the performance patterns is determined based on the result of the effect lottery using a predetermined random number for performance, or one of the effects is determined based on the type of jackpot The pattern will be determined.

  After the effect pattern is determined in this way, the decorative symbols are stopped based on the result of the big hit lottery indicated by the winning information command in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode) as well. The stop symbol (the symbol combination at the time of stop) that appears when the operation is performed is determined. That is, first, based on the winning information command stored in the winning information storage area in the process of step S1106, it is determined whether or not the result of the big win lottery is a big hit (step S1322). As a result, when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, when the stop symbol at the time of the big hit is determined (step S1323), the processing of the steps S1228a and S1228b (see FIG. 198) is ended. Also, depending on the winning type (10R probability variation big hits A to D) obtained as a result of the big hit lottery, the stop symbols (the combination of symbols at the time of stoppage) that appear when the decorative symbols are stopped are determined to be different. This is also the same as in the normal performance mode (FIGS. 194 (b) to (d)).

  Similarly, when the result of the big hit lottery is not a big hit (NO in step S1322), it is determined whether or not the result is a small hit (step S1324), and the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit. When it is, the stop symbol at the time of small hit will be determined (step S1325). That is, in this case, the short open symbol combination that appears even when “10R probability variable big hit A” is obtained as a result of the big hit lottery is determined as the stop symbol at the time of the small hit (FIG. 194 (b)).

  Similarly, when the result of the big win lottery is not a small win (NO in step S1324), next, as a process of step S1326, a display effect in which reach is formed (a high expectation loss effect as a high expectation effect pattern). A determination is made as to whether or not. As a result, when it is a display effect in which reach is formed, when a stop symbol for reach loss (but different from the short-open symbol combination) is determined (step S1327), the steps S1228a and S1228b (FIG. 198) are determined. The processing of (see) is terminated.

  However, in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), it is not determined that the display effect (high expectation loss effect) in which the reach is formed in the process of step S1326. Although the main control MPU 4100a side has not been determined (reach determination) to perform an expected fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time (high expectation fluctuation pattern), the peripheral control MPU 4140a side has its own reach. It is determined whether or not to produce an effect (step S1328). That is, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment is a case where it has not been determined (reach determination) to perform a highly expected variation pattern (relatively long variation time) on the main control MPU 4100a side. However, when a predetermined special variation pattern (special variation time) is determined, a special reach production pattern appears by forming the reach state early.

  Therefore, when it is determined in the processing of step S1328 that the reach effect is uniquely performed, when the stop symbol for reach loss (but different from the short-open symbol combination) is determined (step S1329), the step When the processing of S1228a and S1228b (see FIG. 198) is finished, but when it is not determined that the reach effect is to be performed independently, when the irregular stop symbol where the reach is not formed is determined (step S1330). The processing in steps S1228a and S1228b (see FIG. 198) is terminated.

  It should be noted that the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment receives a special command predetermined on the main control MPU 4100a side when receiving any of the following production commands “01H” to “03H” from the main control MPU 4100a side. It is determined that the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation time) is determined. That is, in this case, control is performed so that different effect patterns appear when in the normal effect mode and when in the first appearance rate change mode (or second appearance rate change mode). Even if it is not determined (reach determination) to perform a highly expected variation pattern (relatively long variation time) on the control MPU 4100a side, a special reach effect pattern appears.

  Hereinafter, an example of a display effect that appears when such various processes (steps S1228a, S1228b, and S1228d) by the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment are executed will be described. FIG. 202 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the above-described variation pattern (specific variation pattern) is determined on the main control MPU 4100a side.

  Here, in describing an example of such display effects, first, a method for determining a variation pattern (variation time) by the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment will be described.

  That is, as described above, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment is assigned a relatively short variation time based on the reach determination table prepared separately for the gaming situation when the result of the big win lottery is a loss. A determination is made as to which of the normal fluctuation pattern and the expected fluctuation pattern (highly expected fluctuation pattern) to which a relatively long fluctuation time is assigned to perform the control related to the special symbol fluctuation display. Ordinarily, when it is determined that the control related to the change display of the special symbol is performed with the expected change pattern (highly expected change pattern) to which the relatively long change time is assigned, the peripheral control unit 4140 is determined. Through the processing on the side, a highly expected production pattern such as a reach production will appear.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the control related to the special symbol variation display is performed with the normal variation pattern, the special symbol variation display having a relatively short variation time (normal variation pattern) is basically performed. Will appear. However, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment determines whether or not the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is suspended when displaying the variation in the normal variation pattern. to decide. And when the same lottery is held, the control related to the change display of the special symbol so that the shorter fluctuation time (normal fluctuation pattern) is further shortened than when the lottery is not held. (Control related to the shortened variation pattern) is performed (for example, control is performed using the shortened variation pattern when the number of holdings is 2 or more).

[Regarding the production pattern when the production command is “01H” in the normal production mode]
This effect command “01H” is received by the peripheral control MPU 4140a when the main control MPU 4100a side performs the control related to the shortened variation pattern.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 202 (a), based on the fact that a loss has been obtained in the big hit lottery on the main control MPU 4100a side when the normal performance mode is set, the above-described shortened variation pattern is obtained. If the control (control when the number of holdings is equal to or greater than the predetermined number) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a display effect at the time of a shortened change associated with the effect command “01H”. Be started. The display effect at the time of the shortening variation (the effect pattern at the time of the shortening variation) is performed by displaying the decorative symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a variable manner for the shortened variation time t1 (for example, 6 seconds). Therefore, the display effect at the time of the shortened variation thus started is terminated when the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped in the form of an irregular stop pattern in which reach is not formed when the shortened variation time t1 has elapsed. It will be.

[Regarding the production pattern when the production command is “02H” in the normal production mode]
This effect command “02H” is received by the peripheral control MPU 4140a when the control related to the above-described normal variation pattern is performed on the main control MPU 4100a side.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 202 (b), when the normal effect mode is set, the normal fluctuation pattern described above is based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a side loses in the big hit lottery. If the control related to (control when the number of holdings is less than the predetermined number) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the display effect at the time of normal fluctuation associated with the effect command “02H” ( The production pattern at the time of normal fluctuation) is started. The display effect at the time of normal variation is performed by displaying the decorative symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a variable manner for a variation time t2 (for example, 12 seconds) at the time of normal variation. Therefore, the display effect at the time of normal variation started in this way is terminated when the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped in the form of an irregular stop pattern in which reach is not formed when the variation time t2 at the time of normal variation has elapsed. Will be.

[Regarding the production pattern when the production command is “03H” in the normal production mode]
The effect command “03H” is controlled on the above-described expected variation pattern (highly expected variation pattern) on the main control MPU 4100a side, but within such an expected variation pattern, a relatively short variation time t3 (normal variation) The peripheral control MPU 4140a is made receivable when a specific variation pattern having only a longer variation time t2 is selected.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 202 (c), when the normal effect mode is set, the above-described specific variation pattern is based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a side loses in the big hit lottery. If the control related to is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect at the time of the specific change associated with the effect command “03H” is started. In the display effect at the time of specific fluctuation (effect pattern at the time of normal reach), at a timing tr2 that is slightly earlier than the fluctuation time t2 at the time of normal fluctuation (the timing after the fluctuation time t1 at the time of shortening fluctuation). The decorative pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1900 forms a reach state. And about the decorative design made into the reach state in this way, after performing the reach effect without changing the background image, the variation time t3 (for example, 20 seconds) at the time of specific variation has elapsed since the start of the control. At that point, the stoppage pattern of reach losing will appear and be stopped (so-called normal reach production).

  By the way, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment receives any one of the production commands “01H” to “03H” from the main control MPU 4100a side, a special variation predetermined on the main control MPU 4100a side is received. The determination that the pattern (special variation time) has been determined is as described above. However, in the normal effect mode, regardless of whether the effect commands “01H” to “03H” are received, the peripheral control MPU 4140a side performs control to perform the reach effect (special reach effect pattern) independently. Is never done. That is, as described above, control is performed so that the production patterns associated with the production commands “01H” to “03H” (production patterns at the time of shortening, production patterns at the time of normal fluctuation, production patterns at the time of normal reach) appear. Will be performed. Therefore, in those display effects when in the normal effect mode, effect patterns with relatively low expectations only appear as different effect contents.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), the production commands “01H”, “02H”, “03H” When any one of the above is received, the following processes are sequentially executed. That is, first, a unique effect lottery is performed as to whether or not to perform a unique reach effect on the peripheral control MPU 4140a side.

  In this unique effect lottery, it is determined that the unique reach effect is performed with a higher probability in the second appearance rate change mode than in the first appearance rate change mode. More specifically, when in the first appearance rate change mode, the probability that the unique reach effect is not determined is higher than the probability that the unique reach effect is determined. When in the second appearance rate change mode, the probability that it is determined that the unique reach effect is determined is higher than the probability that the unique reach effect is not determined. Thereby, when in the first appearance rate change mode, it becomes difficult to exclude the possibility of being controlled in the normal production mode, and as a result, when a unique reach production (a special reach production pattern described later) appears. It is possible to suitably improve the game entertainment. In addition, when in the second appearance rate change mode, at least in the normal performance mode, a rare unique reach effect (a special reach effect pattern to be described later) is likely to appear continuously, and such a special effect. The environment itself can suppress the decrease in the entertainment interest.

  As a result, when it is determined that the unique reach production is to be performed, the specific command that is earlier than the fluctuation time t1 at the time of the shortening fluctuation elapses regardless of any of the production commands “01H” to “03H”. A process for forming the reach state early is performed at timing tr1. Then, after the reach state is formed at an early stage until the fluctuation times t1 to t3 corresponding to the received effect commands “01H” to “03H” elapse, the reach effect described later (FIGS. 203 to 207). Control) to appear. If it is not determined that the unique reach effect is to be performed, as in the normal effect mode, the effect patterns (shortening variation) respectively associated with the received effect commands “01H” to “03H”. Display effect at the time, display effect at normal variation, and normal reach effect).

  According to the unique reach effect on the peripheral control MPU 4140a side, when the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode) in which the counted number of rotations is relatively large is the same. Compared to the normal performance mode with a relatively low number of revolutions, the game playability on the main control MPU 4100a side (change time setting depending on the number of holds, probability setting for reach determination, etc.) The appearance rate of reach production, which is a kind of expected production, can be improved.

  By the way, in order to realize such a unique reach effect, the reach state is set at a specific timing tr1 that is earlier than the above-described shortened fluctuation time t1 (for example, the timing when two seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation). Early formation is essential. However, if such a special reach effect is allowed to appear only when it is in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), the reach state is brought to an early stage. Even if it is formed, there is a concern that the reach effect is not recognized as a highly anticipated effect pattern, and the game entertainment cannot be maintained.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, a specific expected fluctuation pattern (highly expected fluctuation pattern) having a specific fluctuation time t4 longer than the fluctuation time t3 used for so-called normal reach production is selected. When this occurs, a reach effect with the above-mentioned special characteristics is performed regardless of whether the mode is the normal effect mode or the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode). I am going to do that. In the normal effect mode, the expectation level (probability that the big hit is won) when a specific expected variation pattern appears is an effect pattern associated with each of the effect commands “01H” to “03H”. It is important to maintain a higher level of game entertainment than when any of the (display effect at the time of shortening change, display effect at the time of normal change, normal reach effect) appears.

[Regarding the production pattern when the production command is “04H”]
This effect command “04H” can be received by the peripheral control MPU 4140a when the main control MPU 4100a side selects a highly expected variation pattern having the above-described variation time t4 from the expected variation pattern. It is what is done.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 202 (d), when the normal performance mode and the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode) are currently set, If the control related to the highly expected variation pattern having the variation time t4 described above is started based on the result of the big hit lottery (big hit or loss) on the control MPU 4100a side (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1900 , A highly expected display effect associated with the effect command “04H” is started.

  Hereinafter, an example of a highly anticipated display effect (specific expected effect pattern) associated with the effect command “04H” will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 207. In this case, basically, regardless of whether it is controlled in the normal performance mode or the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), FIG. 203 to FIG. 207 are basically used. The production proceeds along the production route indicated by the solid line shown in FIG. However, here, the case of the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode) will be described later, and a highly anticipated display effect when in the normal effect mode will be described.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 203 as well, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, first, an effect image EG1 on which a variable display for a plurality of decorative symbol sequences is performed appears. Next, at the timing tr1 described above, an effect image in which the reach state is formed early by the plurality of decorative symbol sequences variably displayed in this way appears. In this highly anticipated display effect, when the reach state is formed early, it is switched to a specific background image different from that before the reach state is formed early. After this, the reach effect is performed in the presence of a specific background image that is different from the background image that appeared due to the pre-reach fluctuation.

  After the reach production is started early in this way, first, until the variation time t1 at the time of the shortening variation elapses on condition that the performance per win is obtained in the first notice determination (FIG. 198: step S1229d). The effect image EG2a in which the first notice effect is performed using this time will appear.

  Here, in the first notice effect, a plurality of types of display modes having different notice expectations (probability of winning a big hit when a notice appears) are prepared, and the first notice determination result (type per effect) is prepared. Based on this, one of these display modes is selectively displayed. Note that, in the effect image EG2a shown in FIG. 203, the first notice effect is performed with a display mode in which the ally character as the main character appears. However, as will be described later, only in the first appearance rate change mode (or in the second appearance rate change mode), the first notice effect has a display mode that cannot appear in the normal effect mode. An effect image EG2b to be performed may appear.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 202 (d) and 204, after the effect image EG2a in which the first notice effect is performed in this way appears, in the second notice determination (FIG. 198: step S1229d) Is obtained after the fluctuation time t1 at the time of shortening has elapsed and before the fluctuation time t2 at the time of normal fluctuation has elapsed. The effect image EG3a to be performed appears. Even in the case where the first notice effect is not performed, the effect image EG3a in which the second notice effect is performed can appear when the second effect is obtained in the second notice determination.

  Here, in the same way, in the second notice effect, a plurality of display modes (here, the types of lines by the ally characters who are the main characters) are prepared with different notice expectations (probability of winning a big hit when the notice appears). One of these display modes is selectively displayed based on the result of the second notice determination (type per effect). In the effect image EG3a shown in FIG. 204, the second notice effect having a display mode in which the hero character who is the main character states a line saying “Take a friend well! Has been done. Note that when the per-effects are not obtained in the second notice determination, an effect image in which no words are described appears, although the ally character as the main character is projected.

  As will be described later, only when the mode is the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), the display mode (appearance of enemy characters, which cannot appear when in the normal performance mode, An effect image EG3b in which the second notice effect is performed can be displayed with a line by an enemy character. As will be described later, in the second notice effect, what kind of past (story) has existed between the ally character and the enemy character through such a change in the display mode. As the number of counted times increases, the display mode (line that can appear) as the notice effect is changed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 202 (d) and 205, after the effect image EG3a (or the effect image EG3b) in which the second notice effect is performed in this manner appears, the fluctuation time t2 at the time of normal fluctuation has elapsed. After that, the effect image EG4 in which the appearance of the duel between the ally character and the enemy character as the main characters is projected, and the effect image EG5 in which the appearance of the enemy character performing the attack first appear sequentially. Then, after that, an effect image EG6a in which a third notice effect by the teammate character who becomes the hero is performed using the time before the change time t3 at the time of the specific change elapses appears.

  Here, similarly to the third notice effect, a plurality of display modes (here, the type of aura color of the ally character who becomes the main character) having different notice expectations (probability of winning a big hit when the notice appears) are prepared. One of these display modes is selectively displayed based on the result of the third notice determination. In the effect image EG6a shown in FIG. 205, a third notice effect having a display mode in which the aura of the teammate character as the main character is red is performed. In the third notice determination, no production loss is obtained, and the color of the aura corresponding to the type of the determination result is selectively displayed.

  However, as will be described later, only in the first appearance rate change mode (or second appearance rate change mode), a display mode (such as the appearance of an enemy character) that cannot appear in the normal performance mode. The effect image EG6b on which the third notice effect is performed can appear.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 202 (d) and 206, after the effect image EG6a (or the effect image EG6b) in which the third notice effect is performed in this way appears, the description of the ally character as the main character is the center. An effect image EG7a appears that shows how this teammate character avoids an attack by an enemy character. Next, after the effect image EG8a on which the appearance of the ally character making an attack appears, the effect before the change time t4 for the display effect elapses is used for the effect in the fourth notice determination. On the condition that the winning is obtained, the display output of the notice video that requires a predetermined time is started, and the effect image EG9a that ends the display output of the notice video appears when the predetermined time elapses from the start. (4th notice effect).

  However, in the notice video (fourth notice effect) that requires this predetermined time, the player may be permitted to accept an effect operation (such as a pressing operation to the pressing operation unit 405) by the player at the stage of the animation. The displayed effect is displayed. When there is an effect operation (such as a pressing operation to the pressing operation unit 405) by the player within the period during which the effect display is being performed, a notice display with different jackpot expectation levels is made based on the effect operation. An additional effect that a predetermined effect can newly appear is performed, such as the appearance of one of the modes.

  Here, based on the type of effect per stage obtained in the fourth notice determination (FIG. 198: step S1229d), the big hit expectation degree is indicated by the change of the background color that occurs when the player performs the stage operation. It is. On the other hand, when there is no presentation operation by the player, the notice video that requires a predetermined time is completed without changing the color of the background image. However, the fourth notice effect is performed on the condition that the effect is obtained in the fourth notice determination. Therefore, even when a notice video that requires a predetermined time is completed without any change in the color of the background image without a player's production operation, a big hit is obtained compared to the case where the notice production does not appear. It is shown that it is likely that

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 202 (d) and 207, after the effect image EG9a in which the fourth notice effect is performed in this way appears, this is a display mode centered on the description of the ally character as the main character. An effect image EG10a appears that shows the appearance of the teammate character attacking the enemy character. After this, when one of the 10R probability variable big hits B, C, D is won in the big hit lottery, the effect image that stops and displays the decorative symbols in the form of a combination of symbols corresponding to the relevant selection appears. EG11a will appear. In addition, in the effect image EG11a shown in FIG. 207, the symbol combination in which three number symbols “5” are arranged in accordance with the winning of 10R probability variation big hit B is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, when one of 10R probability variation big hit A, small hit, or lose is obtained in the big hit lottery, first, as shown in FIG. The effect image EG11b to be displayed appears. However, when a loss is obtained, those decorative symbols are fixed and stopped as they are, whereas when either 10R probability variation big hit A or small hit is obtained, those decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. Before, only the central symbol is replaced with the special symbol (see FIG. 194 (b)).

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, in the normal performance mode, as long as the reach state is formed early at the above-mentioned timing tr1 (although its appearance probability is low), a relatively long variation time t4 is required. A display effect that requires a long time (a specific expected effect pattern) is executed as a story-based effect that is displayed and output up to the complete portion without being ended in the intermediate effect stage. As a result, for a highly anticipated display effect associated with such an effect command “04H”, the reach state is early when the counted number of fluctuations is in a relatively small period (normal effect mode). At the time of formation, an image in which a highly anticipated and rare performance pattern appears is planted for the player.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, in the game period (first appearance rate change mode (or second appearance rate change mode)) after such an image is planted, In addition to the production command “04H”, even if any of the production commands “01H”, “02H”, “03H” is received, the production pattern in which the reach state is formed early (specific expected production) (Pattern) appears. That is, in this case, the reach state can be formed at an early stage in the liquid crystal display device 1900 even when the control related to the shortened variation pattern is performed. A highly anticipated display effect associated with the effect command “04H” (reach state is formed at an early stage tr1 without adversely affecting the number-dependent variation time setting, reach determination probability setting, etc.) Thus, the appearance rate of a specific background image that differs from the background image that appeared in the pre-reach fluctuation can be improved.

  202 to 207, in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), any one of the production commands “01H”, “02H”, and “03H” is received. The contents of the reach effect that is uniquely performed on the peripheral control MPU 4140a side when it is performed will be described. However, here, the production basically proceeds by following the production route indicated by the dotted line in FIGS. 203 to 207.

[Regarding production pattern when first appearance rate change mode (or second appearance rate change mode) and production command “01H”]
As described above, the effect command “01H” is received by the peripheral control MPU 4140a when the control related to the above-described shortened variation pattern is performed on the main control MPU 4100a side. That is, in the normal effect mode, when the effect command “01H” is received, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled so that the display effect at the time of the shortening variation appears.

  On the other hand, when it is in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), it is determined that the unique reach effect is to be performed based on the reception of the effect command “01H”. (Steps 1228b and 1228c). If the control for the unique reach effect is started (timing t0), as shown in FIG. 202 (a), in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the shortening associated with the effect command “01H” is performed. The display effect is started in the form in which the highly anticipated effect content associated with the above-described effect command “04H” appears within the changed change time t1 (there is no effect content at the time of a shortened change, Display output related to high-expected production content that also appears in the expected production pattern of the other).

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 203, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, first, an effect image EG1 in which a plurality of decorative symbol sequences are displayed is displayed. Next, at the timing tr1, the effect image in which the reach state is formed at an early stage by the plurality of decorative symbol sequences that are variably displayed in this way appears despite the shortened variation pattern. Similarly, when the reach state is formed early in this way, it is switched to a specific background image that is different from that before the reach state is formed early, so that the pre-reach fluctuation The reach effect is performed in the presence of a specific background image that is different from the background image that has appeared in the above.

  That is, in this case, the reach state is formed early in the liquid crystal display device 1900 in spite of the control related to the shortening variation pattern. Highly expected display effect (reach state is formed at the timing tr1 at an early stage) and the change before reach without adversely affecting the change time setting, reach determination probability setting, etc. It is possible to improve the appearance rate of the effect content) in which a specific background image that is different from the background image that appears in (1) appears.

  After the reach effect is started early in this way, the first notice effect is always shown using the time until the fluctuation time t1 at the time of the shortening change elapses (FIG. 198: Step S1229a, Step S1229b). . However, here, the effect image EG2b having a display mode that cannot appear when in the normal effect mode (here, the appearance of an enemy character) always appears. In this sense, it is not always necessary to make a preliminary determination as to which display mode is to appear, and it is not included in the preliminary display image that is additionally displayed with respect to the production pattern, but is incorporated in advance in the production pattern itself. It may be a production image.

  Then, when the first notice effect (strong loss notice effect) is performed by such an effect image EG2b, it is indicated that the possibility of losing in the big hit lottery is very high. When the shortened fluctuation time t1 has elapsed so as to end the highly anticipated production content associated with the production command “04H” in the middle of the production stage (before the conclusion of the teammate character and the enemy character). Thus, the effect image EG2bs in which the decoration symbol is confirmed and stopped by the stop symbol of reach lose is to appear.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game ball enters the second start port 2102 in which the counted number of rotations exceeds the specific number of adjustments and the probability of entering the ball is adjusted. When the big hit is obtained based on the ball, at least a part of the average total number of game balls to be thrown into the game area 1100 required until the specific number of adjustments is exceeded is the first expected quantity value. In this case, control is performed so that the player can acquire the game balls having the second expected quantity value, which is increased as a premium for the above. According to such a configuration, if at least the big hit is not won until the specific number of adjustments (800 times) is exceeded, there is a chance that the game balls that have been consumed can be recovered. . In this case, as the counted number of rotations becomes relatively large and approaches the specific number of adjustments, the game value when the losing is obtained (especially in this embodiment, the win is obtained). As mentioned above, it will gradually increase (in excess of the gaming value at that time).

  In addition, the notice performance in the game (the appearance rate change mode) in which the game value with such a high value of the loss has been realized, eliminates all of the numerous losses that have been obtained in the games so far. It can function as an effect that raises the possibility that a lottery result (big hit) is obtained as if it is attributed to value. In this regard, in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), the display with the lowest expected expectation degree is selected from the plurality of display modes that can appear in the normal performance mode. In addition to the fact that the notice expectation is lower than the mode, the display mode (in this case, not an ally character, the appearance of an enemy character) is shown to indicate that there is a very high probability that a loss has been obtained in the big hit lottery. The produced effect image EG2b is allowed to appear. This makes it possible to have an image that seems to have been rescued from the fact that numerous loses that have been gained in games so far are worthless, and when in appearance rate change mode The game will be maintained.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the present embodiment performs the above-described effect command “04H” when the first notice effect (strong loss notice effect) is performed by the effect image EG2b that cannot appear when in the normal effect mode. In spite of the highly-expected production content associated with the (a story-type production that cannot be terminated halfway in the normal production mode), it is immediately terminated at the midway production stage. As a result, although it is shown that there is a high possibility that a loss has been obtained, highly anticipated performance content (highly anticipated performance content that is originally associated only with the performance command “04H”) It is possible to avoid the endless useless performance over a long period of time only because of the appearance of. In addition, give the image as if it was forcibly rescued from the highly anticipated production content that shows that there is a high possibility that numerous loses that have been obtained in the game so far will be worthless It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment at the appearance rate change mode.

  Furthermore, even if such a production image EG2b is prepared, the value of the loss is enhanced, but for a player who wants to win a big hit at an early stage. In addition, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in gaming interest when a display mode having the lowest notice expectation degree among a plurality of types of display modes that can appear in the normal performance mode appears.

  As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, even when the highly expected display effect (specific expected effect pattern) associated with the effect command “04H” is performed, the first control is performed. Only in the appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), the first notice effect (lossy notice effect) is extremely rare (probability of about 1%) with such an effect image EG2b. I have something to do. In other words, in this case, the display output is continued until the content of the effect is completed, even though the first notice effect (strong loss notice effect) appears by the effect image EG2b. In such a configuration, even when the effect image EG2b appears, the effect image EG2bs appears (ends in the middle of the effect) or loses when the shortened variation time t1 has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to improve the performance up to the last time when the special symbol is stopped.

[Regarding production pattern when first appearance rate change mode (or second appearance rate change mode) and production command “02H”]
As described above, the effect command “02H” is received by the peripheral control MPU 4140a when the control related to the normal variation pattern is performed on the main control MPU 4100a side. That is, in the normal effect mode, when the effect command “02H” is received, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled so that the display effect at the time of normal fluctuation appears.

  On the other hand, when it is now in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), it is determined that the unique reach effect is performed based on the reception of the effect command “02H”. (Steps 1228a and 1228b). If the control for the unique reach effect is started (timing t0), as shown in FIG. 202B, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the control command “02H” is usually associated. Although it is within the fluctuation time t2 at the time of change, the display effect is started in the form of the highly anticipated effect content associated with the above-described effect command “04H” (not the effect content at the time of normal change, Display output related to highly anticipated effect contents that also appear in a specific expected effect pattern is started).

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 203 as well, even when the effect command “02H” is received, first, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a variation of a plurality of decorative symbol sequences. An effect image EG1 appears. Next, at the timing tr1 described above, an effect image in which the reach state is formed early by the plurality of decorative symbol sequences variably displayed in this way appears. Similarly, when the reach state is formed early in this way, it is switched to a specific background image that is different from that before the reach state is formed early, so that the pre-reach fluctuation The reach effect is performed in the presence of a specific background image that is different from the background image that has appeared in the above.

  That is, in this case, although the control related to the normal variation pattern is performed, the reach state is formed at an early stage in the liquid crystal display device 1900, and thereby the gameability (depending on the number of holdings) on the main control MPU 4100a side. Highly expected display effect (reach state is formed at the timing tr1 at an early stage) and the change before reach without adversely affecting the change time setting, reach determination probability setting, etc. It is possible to improve the appearance rate of the effect content) in which a specific background image that is different from the background image that appears in (1) appears.

  Similarly, after the reach production is started early, first, the variation time t1 at the time of the shortening variation is obtained on condition that the performance per win is obtained in the first notice determination (FIG. 198: step S1229a, step S1229b). The effect image EG2a in which the first notice effect is performed using the time until the elapses will appear. However, even when a unique reach effect (more precisely, the first notice effect) is performed based on the reception of the effect command “02H”, the effect image EG2b (losing) is substituted for the effect image EG2a. (Strong notice effect) may appear.

  In any case, when a unique reach effect is performed based on the reception of the effect command “02H”, after the first notice effect (effect image EG2a, effect image EG2b) is thus performed, FIG. As shown in 202 (b) and FIG. 204, the second notice effect appears without fail using the time until the fluctuation time t2 at the time of normal fluctuation elapses (FIG. 198: Step S1229a, Step S1229). S1229b). However, here, the effect image EG3b having a display mode (here, a line by an enemy character) that cannot appear when in the normal effect mode always appears. In this sense, it is not always necessary to make a preliminary determination as to which display mode is to appear, and it is not included in the preliminary display image that is additionally displayed with respect to the production pattern, but is incorporated in advance in the production pattern itself. It may be a production image.

  And when the second notice effect (strong loss notice effect) is performed by such an effect image EG3b, it is shown that the possibility of losing in the big hit lottery is very high. When the normal fluctuation time t2 has elapsed so as to end the highly anticipated production content associated with the production command “04H” in the middle of the production stage (before the conclusion of the teammate character and the enemy character). Thus, the effect image EG3bs in which the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped by the stop symbol of reach lose is to appear. Thus, even when the second notice effect (strong loss notice effect) is performed by the effect image EG3b, the numerous loses that have been obtained in the game so far are considered to be worthless. It will be possible to have an image as if it were, and it will be possible to maintain the game entertainment at the appearance rate change mode.

  Moreover, in the effect image EG3b shown in FIG. 204, the enemy character that is hostile to the hero has a display mode that states a line saying "You are the one who has come first! Protect this village!" The second notice effect is performed. According to such a configuration, as the counted number of rotations increases, it is revealed that there is a valid reason not only for the alliance character but also for the enemy character. It will be. In other words, in this case, the game value when the losing is obtained (particularly in this embodiment, also exceeds the game value when the win is obtained) is gradually increased. As a player, it will naturally empathize with the enemy character side, and as a result, it will be easier to accept that the highly anticipated production content will be terminated in the middle of the production stage due to the appearance of the enemy character. Yes.

  In addition, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment has the first effect even when the highly expected display effect (specific expected effect pattern) associated with the effect command “04H” is performed. Only in the appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), the second notice effect (losing strong notice effect) is extremely rare (probability of about 1%) with such an effect image EG3b. I have something to do. In other words, in this case, the display output is continued until the content of the effect is completed, even though the second notice effect (strong loss notice effect) appears by the effect image EG3b. In such a configuration, even when the effect image EG3b appears, the effect image EG3bs appears (ends in the middle of the effect) or loses when the normal fluctuation time t2 has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to improve the stage performance until the last time when the special symbol is stopped.

[Regarding production pattern when first appearance rate change mode (or second appearance rate change mode) and production command “03H”]
As described above, the effect command “03H” is controlled on the above-described expected fluctuation pattern (highly expected fluctuation pattern) on the main control MPU 4100a side. When a specific variation pattern having only t3 (longer than the variation time t2 at the time of normal variation) is selected, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can be received. That is, in the normal effect mode, when the effect command “03H” is received, the display effect at the time of so-called normal reach effect is controlled to appear on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  On the other hand, when it is now in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), it is determined that the unique reach effect is performed based on the reception of the effect command “03H”. (Steps 1228a and 1228b). If the control for the unique reach effect is started (timing t0), as shown in FIG. 202 (c), in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the identification associated with the effect command “03H” is specified. Although it is within the fluctuation time t3 at the time of change, the display effect is started in the form in which the highly expected effect content associated with the above-described effect command “04H” appears (not the effect content at the time of normal change, Display output related to highly anticipated effect contents that also appear in a specific expected effect pattern is started).

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 203 as well, even when the effect command “03H” is received, first, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a plurality of decorative symbol sequences in a variable manner. An effect image EG1 appears. Next, at the timing tr1 described above, an effect image in which the reach state is formed early by the plurality of decorative symbol sequences variably displayed in this way appears. Similarly, when the reach state is formed early in this way, it is switched to a specific background image that is different from that before the reach state is formed early, so that the change before reach is achieved despite the specific change pattern. The reach effect is performed in the presence of a specific background image that is different from the background image that has appeared in the above.

  That is, in this case, the reach state is formed at an early stage in the liquid crystal display device 1900 in spite of the control related to the specific variation pattern, and thereby the playability (depending on the number of holdings) on the main control MPU 4100a side. Highly expected display effect (reach state is formed at the timing tr1 at an early stage) and the change before reach without adversely affecting the change time setting, reach determination probability setting, etc. It is possible to improve the appearance rate of the effect content) in which a specific background image that is different from the background image that appears in (1) appears.

  Similarly, after the reach production is started early, first, the variation time t1 at the time of the shortening variation is obtained on condition that the performance per win is obtained in the first notice determination (FIG. 198: step S1229a, step S1229b). The effect image EG2a in which the first notice effect is performed using the time until the elapses will appear. However, even when a unique reach effect (more precisely, the first notice effect) is performed based on the reception of the effect command “03H”, the effect image EG2b (losing) is substituted for the effect image EG2a. (Strong notice effect) may appear.

  In any case, when a unique reach effect is performed based on the reception of the effect command “03H”, after the first notice effect (effect image EG2a, effect image EG2b) is performed in this manner, FIG. As shown in 202 (b) and FIG. 204, the variation time t2 at the time of normal variation is obtained on the condition that the per-effects are obtained in the second notice determination (FIG. 198: step S1229a, step S1229b). The effect image EG3a in which the second notice effect is performed using the time until the passage of time appears. However, even when a unique reach effect (more precisely, the second notice effect) is performed based on the reception of the effect command “03H”, the effect image EG3b (losing) is used instead of the effect image EG3a. (Strong notice effect) may appear.

  In any case, even when the unique reach effect is performed based on the reception of the effect command “03H”, the second notice effect (effect image EG3a, effect image EG3b) is thus performed. As shown in FIGS. 202 (b) and 205, the teammate character and the enemy character that are the main characters are displayed, as in the case where the highly anticipated performance content (specific expected performance pattern) associated with the command “04H” appears. An effect image EG4 in which the appearance of a duel is projected and an effect image EG5 in which the enemy character first attacks are displayed in sequence. However, after this, the effect image EG6b having a display mode that cannot appear when in the normal effect mode (here, the black aura by the enemy character) always appears. In this sense, it is not always necessary to make a preliminary determination as to which display mode is to appear, and it is not included in the preliminary display image that is additionally displayed with respect to the production pattern, but is incorporated in advance in the production pattern itself. It may be a production image.

  Then, when the third notice effect (strongly missed notice effect) is performed by such an effect image EG6b, it is indicated that the possibility of losing in the big hit lottery is very high. The fluctuation time t3 at the time of specific fluctuation has elapsed in order to end the highly anticipated production content associated with the production command “04H” in the middle of the production stage (before the teammate character attacks the enemy character). At that time, the effect image EG6bs in which the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped by the stoppage pattern of reach lose is made to appear. Thereby, even when the third notice effect (strong loss notice effect) is performed by the effect image EG6b, the numerous loses obtained in the game so far are considered to be worthless. It will be possible to have an image as if it were, and it will be possible to maintain the game entertainment at the appearance rate change mode.

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, even when the highly anticipated display effect (specific expected effect pattern) associated with the effect command “04H” is performed, the first control is performed. Only in the appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), the third notice effect may be performed by using such an effect image EG6b (strong loss notice effect). When the effect image EG6b appears in the third notice effect, the display output related to the subsequent effect contents is continued in a display form different from that when the effect image EG6a appears.

[Regarding production pattern when first appearance rate change mode (or second appearance rate change mode) and production command “04H”]
As described above, this effect command “04H” is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4140a when the main control MPU 4100a side selects a highly expected variation pattern having the variation time t4 described above. Can be received. That is, in the normal effect mode, when the effect command “04H” is received, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled so that the highly expected display effect shown in FIGS. 203 to 207 appears.

  On the other hand, when the production command “04H” is received in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), basically, in the case of the normal production mode. Similarly, control is performed so that the highly anticipated display effects shown in FIGS. 203 to 207 appear in the liquid crystal display device 1900. That is, now, in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), the above-described fluctuation time t4 has based on the result of the big hit lottery (big hit or lose) on the main control MPU 4100a side. Assuming that the control related to the high-expected fluctuation pattern is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1900 starts the high-expected display effect shown in FIGS.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 203, even in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 First, an effect image EG1 in which a variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol sequences is performed appears. Next, similarly, at the above-described timing tr1, an effect image in which the reach state is formed early by the plurality of decorative symbol sequences variably displayed in this way appears. Also in this case, when the reach state is formed early in this way, the background is switched to a specific background image different from that before the reach state is formed early. After this, the reach effect is performed in the presence of a specific background image that is different from the background image that appeared due to the pre-reach fluctuation.

  Similarly, after the reach production is started early, first, the variation time t1 at the time of the shortening variation is obtained on condition that the performance per win is obtained in the first notice determination (FIG. 198: Steps S1229a and 1229b). The effect image EG2a in which the first notice effect is performed using the time until the time elapses appears. However, as described above, in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), although it is extremely rare (a probability of about 1%), the first notice effect is displayed on the effect image EG2a. Instead, the above-described effect image EG2b may also be performed (strong loss notice effect).

  In any case, after the effect image EG2a (or effect image EG2b) in which the first notice effect is performed in this way appears, as shown in FIGS. 202 (d) and 204, the second notice determination (FIG. 198: The time after the fluctuation time t1 at the time of shortening has elapsed and before the fluctuation time t2 at the time of normal fluctuation has elapsed, on condition that the performance per unit is obtained in step S1229d). The effect image EG3a in which the second notice effect is performed using it will appear. However, as described above, in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), the second notice effect is described as the above-described effect image EG3b, although it is extremely rare (a probability of about 1%). Depending on the situation, there is also a notice of strong loss notice.

  In any case, after the effect image EG3a (or effect image EG3b) in which the second notice effect is performed in this way appears, it is in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode). Even so, as shown in FIGS. 202 (b) and 205, there is an effect image EG4 that shows a battle between a hero character and an enemy character as the main characters, and a situation in which the enemy character first attacks. The effect images EG5 to be projected appear sequentially. After this, the effect image EG6a in which the third notice effect is performed using the time before the change time t3 at the time of the specific change elapses appears. However, as described above, in the first appearance rate change mode (or second appearance rate change mode), the third notice effect is also performed by the above-described effect image EG6b.

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when executing the third notice effect when in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), the main control MPU 4100a side Based on the result of the big hit lottery, an effect form of the third notice effect is determined. More specifically, the probability that it is determined that the third notice effect will be performed by the effect image EG6a when the big hit is obtained in the big hit lottery on the main control MPU 4100a side than when the loss is obtained. The effect form of the third notice effect is determined so as to be higher.

  As a result, when the third notice effect is performed by the effect image EG6a, the same applies to the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode) as shown in FIGS. 202 (d) and 206. As shown in FIG. 6B, an effect image EG7a appears in which the appearance of the teammate character serving as the main character is displayed and the appearance of the teammate character avoiding the attack by the enemy character is displayed. Next, similarly, after the effect image EG8a that shows the appearance of the ally character making an attack appears, a predetermined time is required using the time before the change time t4 for the display effect elapses. The production video display output is started, and when a predetermined time has elapsed from this start, the production image EG9a for which the production video display output ends is displayed (fourth notice production).

  Similarly, in the effect movie (fourth notice effect) that requires this predetermined time, the player is allowed to accept an effect operation (press operation to the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) at the effect stage in the middle of the movie. An effect display indicating that the user is present is performed. If there is an effect operation (such as a pressing operation to the pressing operation unit 405) by the player within the period during which the effect display is being performed, a notice display with a different degree of expectation of the big hit is made based on the effect operation. An additional effect in which a predetermined effect can newly appear, such as one of the aspects, can appear.

  However, as will be described later, when an effect operation (such as a pressing operation to the pressing operation unit 405) by the player is performed, the effect image EG9a is displayed at a stage before the predetermined time has elapsed from this start (stage in the middle of the effect). ), It may be terminated in the form of replacement with a later-described effect image EG9b having a display mode (in this case, an effect movie by an enemy character) that cannot appear when in the normal effect mode.

  Then, after the effect image EG9a in which the fourth notice effect is performed appears in this way, as in the case of the normal effect mode, as shown in FIGS. 202 (d) and 207, the ally character serving as the main character is drawn. An effect image EG10a appears that shows how the teammate character attacks the enemy character with a central display mode. After this, when one of the 10R probability variable big hits B, C, D is won in the big hit lottery, the effect image that stops and displays the decorative symbols in the form of a combination of symbols corresponding to the relevant selection appears. EG11a will appear.

  On the other hand, when one of 10R probability variation big hit A, small hit, or lose is obtained in the big hit lottery, first, as shown in FIG. The effect image EG11b to be displayed appears. However, when a loss is obtained, those decorative symbols are fixed and stopped as they are, whereas when either 10R probability variation big hit A or small hit is obtained, those decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. Before, only the central symbol is replaced with the special symbol (see FIG. 194 (b)).

  On the other hand, in the effect pattern associated with the effect command “04H” when in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), the effect image EG6b performs the third notice effect. When it is broken, the subsequent effect form is different from the case where the third notice effect is performed by the effect image EG6a.

  That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when the loss is obtained in the big hit lottery on the main control MPU 4100a side, the third effect image EG6b causes the third to be generated by the effect image EG6b. The effect form of the third notice effect is determined so as to increase the probability that it will be determined that the notice effect will be performed. As a result, when the third notice effect is performed by the effect image EG6b, as shown in FIGS. 202 (d) and 206, the teammate character has the display mode centered on the depiction of the enemy character. An effect image EG7b appears that shows how to avoid an attack by the character.

  According to such effect control, the contents of the effect appearing when the third notice effect is performed by the effect image EG6a and when the third notice effect is performed by the effect image EG6b Is avoided). However, when the third notice effect is performed by the effect image EG6a, the target as the center of the depiction is a teammate character (effect image EG7b) struggling to win the big hit. When the third notice effect is performed by the image EG6b, the target that is the center of the depiction is an enemy character (effect image EG7b) struggling so that the big hit is not won. In this regard, the case where such an enemy character is the center of depiction is that the game value when the game is lost is gradually increasing, and the enemy character is naturally empathized. The present invention is limited to the case where the game situation is such that the counted number of rotations is increased, while the presenting performance is realized. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved by indicating that the possibility of losing is relatively high by using the enemy character as the center of the depiction.

  After the effect image EG7b appears in this way, after the effect image EG8b in which the appearance of the attack of the teammate character appears, the time before the change time t4 related to the display effect elapses is used for the predetermined time. The display output of the effect moving image that requires time is started, and the effect image EG9b in which the display output of the effect moving image ends is displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start (fourth notice effect). As will be described later, the effect image EG9b is a moving image paired with the effect image EG9a described above.

  Then, after the fourth notice effect is performed by the effect image EG9b in this way, as shown in FIG. 202 (d) and FIG. 207, the teammate character has the display mode centered on the depiction of the enemy character and the enemy character An effect image EG10b in which a state of attacking is projected appears. After this, when one of the 10R probability variable big hits B, C, D is won in the big hit lottery, the effect image that stops and displays the decorative symbols in the form of a combination of symbols corresponding to the relevant selection appears. EG11a will appear.

  On the other hand, when one of 10R probability variation big hit A, small hit, or lose is obtained in the big hit lottery, first, as shown in FIG. The effect image EG11b to be displayed appears. However, when a loss is obtained, those decorative symbols are fixed and stopped as they are, whereas when either 10R probability variation big hit A or small hit is obtained, those decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. Before, only the central symbol is replaced with the special symbol (see FIG. 194 (b)).

[First Appearance Rate Change Mode (or Second Appearance Rate Change Mode), Fourth Notice Effect]
As described above, in the first appearance rate change mode (or the second appearance rate change mode), the fourth notice effect is an effect that requires a predetermined time depending on either the effect image EG9a or the effect image EG9b. It is done as a video. However, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when there is an effect operation (such as a pressing operation to the pressing operation unit 405) by the player during a period in which such an effect video appears, Based on the effect video on the side of the effect image EG9a and the effect image EG9b, the effect video on the side of the effect image EG9a and the effect image EG9b is the effect. It can be controlled so that it is terminated at an intermediate stage.

  That is, the effect image EG9a in which the main character appears as the main character and the effect image EG9b in which the enemy character appears are different from each other, but the movements of the characters that require a predetermined time are associated with each other. I am trying to do it. Now, assuming that the effect image EG9a in which the hero character who will be the main character appears is present, the player can perform an effect operation (such as a pressing operation on the pressing operation unit 405) by the player. It is assumed that there is a production operation (such as a pressing operation on the pressing operation unit 405). Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect image EG9a is terminated at the midway effect portion that appeared at the timing when the effect operation was performed, and the effect is produced from the midway effect portion associated therewith. An image EG9b appears anew. When the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the display output of the effect image EG9a is continued as it is in the case of the normal effect mode, and the big hit expectation is indicated by the change of the background color.

  Here, when the fourth notice effect is performed by the effect image EG9a in which the ally character as the main character appears, whether or not such replacement in the middle of the effect (replacement from the effect image EG9a to the effect image EG9b) is performed ( Whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied) may be determined in advance at the time of execution of the effect pattern, or may be determined by a predetermined effect lottery or the like when there is an effect operation by the player. It may be. However, when the big win is obtained in the big hit lottery on the main control MPU 4100a side, the replacement in the middle of the production (replacement from the production image EG9a to the production image EG9b) is performed more than when the loss is obtained. The probability of being judged is lowered, and when the effect image EG9b in which an enemy character appears is replaced, there is a possibility that the loss is obtained more than when any background color is changed. It is desirable to show that is high.

  When the effect image EG9a is changed to the effect image EG9b in the middle of the effect, the fourth notice effect EG9b is started by the effect image EG9b. Will be terminated. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 202 (d) and 207, an effect image EG 10 b appears that shows the appearance of the enemy character attacking the enemy character with a display mode centered on the depiction of the enemy character. After this, when one of the 10R probability variable big hits B, C, D is won in the big hit lottery, the effect image that stops and displays the decorative symbols in the form of a combination of symbols corresponding to the relevant selection appears. EG11a will appear.

  On the other hand, when one of 10R probability variation big hit A, small hit, or lose is obtained in the big hit lottery, first, as shown in FIG. The effect image EG11b to be displayed appears. However, when a loss is obtained, those decorative symbols are fixed and stopped as they are, whereas when either 10R probability variation big hit A or small hit is obtained, those decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. Before, only the central symbol is replaced with the special symbol (see FIG. 194 (b)).

  On the other hand, when there is no presentation operation (such as a pressing operation on the pressing operation unit 405) by the player within a period during which the player can accept a presentation operation (such as a pressing operation on the pressing operation unit 405). No change to the effect image EG9b and no change in the background color occur, and the fourth notice effect is ended by the effect image EG9a.

  On the other hand, assuming that an effect image EG9b in which an enemy character appears now appears, an effect operation (by the player) within a period during which the player can accept an effect operation (such as a pressing operation to the pressing operation unit 405). It is assumed that there is a pressing operation on the pressing operation unit 405). Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect image EG9b is terminated at the midway effect portion that appeared at the timing when the effect operation was performed, and the effect is generated from the midway effect portion associated therewith. The image EG9a will newly appear. When the predetermined condition is not satisfied, as in the case where the player does not perform the rendering operation, the replacement to the rendering image EG9a does not occur and the background color does not change, and the fourth rendering is performed by the rendering image EG9b. The notice effect will be terminated.

  Here, when the fourth notice effect is performed by the effect image EG9b in which the enemy character appears, whether or not the replacement in the middle of the effect (replacement from the effect image EG9b to the effect image EG9a) is performed (predetermined condition) Whether or not is satisfied) may be determined in advance when the effect pattern is executed, or may be determined when an effect operation is performed by the player. However, when the loss is obtained in the big hit lottery on the main control MPU 4100a side, the replacement in the middle of the production (replacement from the production image EG9b to the production image EG9a) is performed more than when the big hit is obtained. It is desirable that the probability of determination be made low, and further that the possibility that a loss has been obtained is high by continuing the effect image EG9b in which the enemy character appears.

  When the effect image EG9b is changed to the effect image EG9a in the middle of the effect, the fourth notice effect EG9a is started by the replaced effect image EG9a even though the effect image EG9b starts the fourth notice effect. 202 (d) and FIG. 207, the appearance of the teammate character attacking the enemy character is displayed with a display mode centered on the depiction of the teammate character as the main character. The effect image EG10a appears. After this, when one of the 10R probability variable big hits B, C, D is won in the big hit lottery, the effect image that stops and displays the decorative symbols in the form of a combination of symbols corresponding to the relevant selection appears. EG11a will appear.

  On the other hand, when one of 10R probability variation big hit A, small hit, or lose is obtained in the big hit lottery, first, as shown in FIG. The effect image EG11b to be displayed appears. However, when a loss is obtained, those decorative symbols are fixed and stopped as they are, whereas when either 10R probability variation big hit A or small hit is obtained, those decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. Before, only the central symbol is replaced with the special symbol (see FIG. 194 (b)).

  Hereinafter, when summarizing the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, in a normal gaming state, within the range in which the average total number of game balls to be hit before a big hit is obtained is maintained as a relatively large value. However, when the number of changes (the number of rotations counted above) of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) exceeds a specific number of adjustments (for example, 800), By replacing the normal time variation determination table used for the determination process with a different table, the ease of accepting the game ball into the second start port 2102 is adjusted and changed to the side advantageous to the player. . Then, when the start rate is in a predetermined period before the upward correction is made, instead of increasing the appearance rate of a specific high-expected effect, a case where this effect ends may be interrupted when it appears. ing.

  According to such production control, even if the big hit is not won during the period when the appearance rate of a specific high expectation production is high, at least a privilege that the start rate is upwardly corrected is given. Become. Therefore, even if the big hit is not obtained during the same period, the production reliability related to the expectation of privilege provision as a specific high expectation production is maintained. In addition, since it is decided to have a case where the appearance rate of a specific high-expected production is increased in the middle of the production, the high-expected production can be made frequent without lowering the reliability of winning the big hit. It becomes like this.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the start rate is in a predetermined period before the upward correction, the reach state regardless of whether or not the main control MPU 4100a determines that the control related to the expected fluctuation pattern is to be performed. It was decided to make the reach production as a high expectation production frequently by forming the early. According to such effect control, it is associated with the effect command “04H” without adversely affecting the game playability (variation time setting depending on the number of holds, reach determination probability setting, etc.) on the main control MPU 4100a side. To improve the appearance rate of a highly anticipated display effect (the effect of a specific background image that is different from the background image that was formed in the reach state at an early stage tr1 and that has appeared in the pre-reach fluctuation). become able to.

  In the above embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the number of fluctuations (the counted number of rotations) of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is a specific number of adjustments (for example, 800 times). In the event that a big hit is obtained based on the game ball entering the second start port 2102 with the probability of entering the ball adjusted, the game area 1100 required until the specific number of adjustments is exceeded. The player can acquire a game ball having the second expected quantity value, in which at least a part of the average amount of game balls in the game is increased as a premium with respect to the first expected quantity value. I try to control it. And in such a game, when the start rate is in the predetermined period before the upward correction, instead of increasing the appearance rate of a specific high expectation effect, It is designed to have a case where it is terminated halfway.

  In other words, the specific high-expected production that appears in the predetermined period before the start rate is revised upward under such a gameability is worthless to the numerous loses that have been obtained in the past games. It will function as an effect as if it were to make something. In this regard, by increasing the appearance rate of such specific high-expected productions, you may want to win the jackpot or do not want to win until the period when it is returned as a premium Providing complex games will keep the game fun.

  Further, in the above embodiment, any game that can appear in the normal performance mode only in a predetermined period before the starting rate is upwardly corrected under such a gameability. It was made possible to appear a losing notice image indicating that the possibility of losing being obtained is higher than the display mode (first notice effect to fourth notice effect). According to such a loss notice image, it becomes possible to have an image as if the rescue was rescued because the loss would be worthless, and in a predetermined period before the start rate is corrected upwards It will be possible to maintain the fun of gaming.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the period (normal production mode) which plantes the image which a specific high expectation production is high expectation from the time of appearance, and the period (appearance rate change mode) which performs production using it. It is supposed to have. More specifically, when the counted number of rotations is relatively small (for example, a period shorter than the average number of rotations until the big hit calculated from the big hit probability is obtained), Only the “appearance pattern that produces a specific high-expected production until the end” is performed, and the specific high-expected production ends in the middle as long as the jackpot is won at a frequency commensurate with the winning probability of the jackpot Because there is no, there is only an image of "specific high-expected production = intense heat". Even in the rare case where the counted number of revolutions has shifted to a relatively large period (rare production state), even if it has not been decided to perform a specific high expectation production, Since the start of a specific high-expected production that has been planted with the image of heat, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of a specific high-expected production with a high-expected image from its appearance. . In addition, even if it is not decided to perform a specific high-expected production, the specific high-expected production that was started is not completed until the end, but is terminated halfway. Reliability will be maintained.

  Moreover, in the above-described embodiment, in the appearance rate change mode, when a notice effect (a losing strong notice effect) is performed with an effect image that cannot appear when in the normal effect mode, a specific high-expected effect is shown in the middle. It will be terminated immediately at the stage of production. As a result, in spite of the fact that it is highly probable that a loss has been obtained, it is avoided that a specific high-expected production is performed vainly for a long time. Become. In addition, give the image as if it was forcibly rescued from a certain high-expected production that shows that there is a high possibility that numerous loses that have been obtained in the past games will be worthless Will be able to maintain the game fun when in the appearance rate change mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, even in the case where a strong loss notice effect such as the effect image EG2b or the effect image EG3b appears in the appearance rate change mode, the highly anticipated effect content is displayed in the middle of the effect stage (friend character). And the case where it does not end before the enemy character is settled. However, only when the content of the highly anticipated production is ended in the middle of the production stage (before the conclusion of the teammate character and the enemy character), the strong notice of advance notice such as the production image EG2b or the production image EG3b appears. It may be. In other words, in this case, despite the fact that highly anticipated production content has appeared, it is suddenly determined that a losing has been obtained in the middle of the production prior to the stop display by the design, so the appearance rate It is possible to maintain the gaming interest when in the change mode.

  In the above embodiment, the first notice effect to the fourth notice effect are changed to the effect pattern only when a predetermined result is obtained in the first notice determination to the fourth notice determination. On the other hand, it was decided to execute as an effect displayed additionally. However, the first notice effect to the fourth notice effect may always be executed in the form in which the display mode determined in the notice determination appears. That is, in this case, in the first notice determination to the fourth notice determination, only the determination process of which display mode is to be performed is performed when the first notice effect to the fourth notice effect is executed. .

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, from the time when the counted number exceeds a specific number (here, half of the predetermined number (800 times) (400 times)) less than the above-mentioned branch point (524 times). In performing the production based on the result of the lottery process for the special symbol, the production lottery is performed as to whether or not to perform the production switching (increasing the appearance ratio of the specific expected production). According to such a control structure, when the counted number of times is less than the above-mentioned branch point (524 times) (500 times), a specific expected effect can be made appear with high frequency. Will increase. That is, if you are in a gaming situation where the special symbol has been changed by the number of times more than the average value of the number of changes required to win the jackpot with a low probability of 1/399, Winning the big hit (second special symbol) as early as possible after exceeding the predetermined number of times (800 times) rather than winning the big hit (first special symbol) with only 100 expected values (10000) It is often the case that people start to feel attractive in the acquisition of prize balls. Therefore, if the specific expected performance is allowed to appear at a high frequency from when the counted number of times is less than the above-mentioned branch point (524 times) (500 times), the specific expectation Each time you are aware of the possibility of winning by the appearance of the production, you can have a complicated feeling that you think you want to win or you do not want to win. This makes it possible to realize a very special game / rendering performance that can give the player a certain level of satisfaction regardless of which result is obtained.

  Depending on the result of the effect lottery, a specific expected effect can appear at a high frequency when the counted number is greater than the above-described branch point (524 times). However, even in such a case, the type of jackpot (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot C), the responsiveness for winning a prize ball when the jackpot is obtained, and the number of game balls consumed until the jackpot is obtained In view of this risk, it is not entirely clear that it is absolutely beneficial to obtain only the loss until the counted number exceeds the predetermined number. Therefore, even if it is a case where a specific expected effect is allowed to appear at a high frequency since the number of times is greater than the above-mentioned branch point (524 times), the period during which such an effect is performed is Although it is shortened, a very special game / rendering performance that can give the player a certain level of satisfaction regardless of which result is obtained is realized.

  Further, as an effect during the control of the non-time-saving state after the number of changes of the special symbol exceeds a predetermined number (800 times), the non-time-shortening before the number of changes of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number of times (800). For example, it is desirable to perform a mode effect in which the effect is performed in a state of entering a specific mode, which is different from the state control.

  That is, during the control in the non-time-short state after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number (800 times), the operation of the blade 2125 according to the normal time-varying time determination table when the number of fluctuations has not been reached. Depending on the mode, a game ball can be entered into the second starting port 2102 with a high probability. However, the ease of entering the game ball is 25 on the second starting port 2102 on average. Compared with a state where the game ball is inserted and the time-shortening function is activated, consumption of the holding ball cannot be sufficiently suppressed. Therefore, since the player may feel frustrated with such an operation mode of the blade 2125, as an effect during the control of the non-time-short state after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds a predetermined number (800 times) It is desirable to attract attention to the production by performing a mode production in which the appearance frequency of the expected production such as a so-called pseudo-ream and pre-reading notice is increased.

  Also, when the number of wins in the high probability state is a predetermined number (9 in this case), after the big hit game according to the type of the hit, the special symbol changes for 100 times. It has been mentioned above that the time reduction function operates only until the end. In this game state, the probability variation function does not operate, but since a right-handed game is possible, when a big hit (second special symbol) is obtained, a high probability state (high The probability short-time state and the high probability non-time-short state) are started again, that is, 10,000 winning balls can be obtained by a total of 10 jackpot games. Therefore, it is desirable that an effect with expectation appears at a high frequency as an effect in the gaming state as a dedicated mode effect.

  In addition, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine was shown in the said embodiment, it is not limited to this, It applies to a pachislot machine or the gaming machine which united a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

  Further, regarding “10R probability variation big hit A”, the counter value of the fluctuation counter is not reset even if the winning is won, but the counter value of the fluctuation counter may be reset.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
1100 Game area 1200 Game panel (game board)
1200e Opening 1900 Liquid crystal display device (effect display means)
2401 Base frame member (center frame)
2413 Upper right decorative unit (decorative member)
2420 Logo front decoration (specific character part)
2421 Light diffusion sheet 2432 Logo lens (decorative character part)
3100 Upper character unit (movable decoration)
3110 Base member 3110d Support cylinder part (support part)
3113a Light reflecting surface 3120 Large side light emitting rotating part (decorating part)
3121 Small side light emission rotation part (decoration part)
3122 Large-side cover member (cover member)
3123 Small side cover member (cover member)
3126 Large driving means (driving means)
3130 Small drive means (drive means)
3135 Central light-emitting substrate (light-emitting part)
3139 Reflector 3142 Light-emitting substrate (light-emitting unit)
3143 Lens (support)
3145 Reflector 3162 Rotating body decoration (decoration part)
3168 lens (support)
3170 Reflector 3171 Light emitting substrate (light emitting part)
3172 Cover member 3175 Driving means 3180a Light reflecting surface 3180b Light reflecting surface 3400 Logo display unit (character decoration)
3400a First character part (character part)
3400b Second character part (character part)
3400c Third character part (character part)
3400d Fourth character part (character part)
3400e Fifth character part (character part)
3400f Sixth character part (character part)
3400w Overlapping part 3401 Logo decoration part (character decoration part)
3403 Light diffusion sheet 3405 Left side light emitting substrate (light emitting means)
3406 Right side light emitting substrate (light emitting means)

Claims (1)

A special lottery is performed based on a game board in which a game area is formed, a start port where a game ball driven into the game area can be received, and a game ball received in the start port On the condition that at least a special lottery result is obtained in this special lottery, the average total number of game balls to be thrown into the gaming area required until the special lottery result is obtained is a normal gaming state. A gaming machine comprising control means for controlling to an advantageous gaming state in which the game can be made to be relatively smaller than when
As the starting port, a first starting port and a second starting port are provided,
The control means includes
First game progress control means for performing the special lottery based on the fact that a game ball is received at the first start port;
A second game progress control means for performing the special lottery based on the fact that a game ball is received at the second starting port;
First special symbol control means for performing control related to the variable display of the first special symbol so that a result of the special lottery by the first game progress control means is indicated;
Second special symbol control means for controlling the display of the variation of the second special symbol so that the result of the special lottery by the second game progress control means is shown;
In the normal gaming state, the number of times required for the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol control means and the number of times required for the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol control means A normal time determination means for determining whether or not the calculated total value has exceeded a specific number of adjustments,
Of the normal gaming state, during the period when the normal time determination means determines that the specific number of adjustments has not been exceeded, the game ball is less likely to be received at the second starting port than at the first starting port. First side game control means for allowing the original game to be played,
Of the normal gaming state, with respect to the gaming area required until the special lottery result is obtained during a specific period after the normal determination means determines that the specific number of adjustments has been exceeded. A second side game that allows a game ball to be received at the second start port with a probability equal to or greater than that of the first start port, although the average amount of game balls to be shot is relatively large. Control means,
When the expected number of game balls that can be obtained by the player when a special lottery result is obtained in the special lottery by the first game progress control means is the first expected number, When a special lottery result is obtained based on the game ball entering the second starting port whose probability of entering is adjusted by the two-side game control means, the specific adjustment is made by the normal time judging means At least a part of the average amount of game balls to be thrown into the gaming area required until it is determined that the number of times has been exceeded is increased as a premium for the first expected quantity. A return privilege control means for controlling the player so that the player can acquire the second expected ball quantity;
High expectation notice determination means for making a notice determination as to whether or not to perform a specific high expectation notice effect based on a result of the special lottery by the first game progress control means;
Only when it is determined in the advance notice determination by the high expectation notice determination means that a specific high expectation notice effect is to be performed, the display output of the high expectation notice video that requires a predetermined time at a specific timing is started. High expectation notice control means for performing production control so that the display output of the high expectation notice video ends when a predetermined time elapses;
When the total value calculated by the normal time determination means is in a relatively large period of time until a specific number of adjustments is exceeded, a specific high expectation notice effect is provided by the notice determination by the high expectation notice determination means. Control is possible so that display output of a highly anticipated warning video that requires a predetermined time is started at a specific timing after the first special symbol variation display is started, even though it is not determined to be performed. When the display output of the high-expected notice moving image that requires the predetermined time is started by the high-expected notice advancement means, the predetermined time before the predetermined time elapses from the start. A gaming machine comprising: a notice video blocking means for terminating display output of the high expectation notice video at an intermediate stage where a required high expectation notice video is not completed.